| By Author | [ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z | Other Symbols ] |
| By Title | [ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z | Other Symbols ] |
| By Language |
|
Download this book: [ ASCII | HTML | PDF ] Look for this book on Amazon Tweet |
Title: A Manual of the Operations of Surgery - For the Use of Senior Students, House Surgeons, and Junior Practitioners
Author: Bell, Joseph, 1837-1911
Language: English
As this book started as an ASCII text book there are no pictures available.
*** Start of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "A Manual of the Operations of Surgery - For the Use of Senior Students, House Surgeons, and Junior Practitioners" ***
This book is indexed by ISYS Web Indexing system to allow the reader find any word or number within the document.
SURGERY***
Transcriber's note:
Spelling mistakes have been left in the text to match the original,
except for obvious typographical errors.
A MANUAL OF THE OPERATIONS OF SURGERY
For the Use of Senior Students, House Surgeons, and
Junior Practitioners.
Illustrated.
by
JOSEPH BELL, F.R.C.S. EDIN.
Lecturer on Clinical Surgery, Surgeon to the Royal Infirmary and to
the Eye Infirmary, and Late Demonstrator of Anatomy
in the University of Edinburgh.
FIFTH EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED.
Edinburgh: Maclachlan & Stewart,
Booksellers to the University.
London: Simpkin, Marshall, & Co.
1883.
TO THE MEMORY OF
JAMES SYME, ESQ., F.R.C.S. AND F.R.S.E.
SURGEON TO THE QUEEN IN SCOTLAND
PROFESSOR OF CLINICAL SURGERY
IN THE UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH
ETC. ETC.
THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED
BY HIS OLD HOUSE-SURGEON AND ASSISTANT
THE AUTHOR.
PREFACE TO FIFTH EDITION.
To retain the small size of the work and to keep it up to date have been
the Author's aim in the Fifth Edition.
20 MELVILLE STREET, EDINBURGH,
_August 1883._
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.
Having been asked, year after year, by the members of my Class for
Operative Surgery, to recommend to them some Manual of Surgical
Operations which might at once guide them in their choice of operations,
and give minute details as to the mode of performance, I have been
gradually led to undertake the production of this little work.
My aim has been to describe as simply as possible those operations which
are most likely to prove useful, and especially those which, from their
nature, admit of being practised on the dead body.
In accordance with this plan, neither historical completeness of detail,
nor much variety in the methods of performing any given operation, is to
be expected. Hence, also, many omissions which would be unpardonable in
the briefest system of Surgery are unavoidable. For example, excision of
tumours and operations for necrosis are hardly mentioned, because for
these no special instructions can well be given; for, while general
principles may guide us to _what_ should be done, the special
circumstances of each case must dictate _how_ it is to be done.
In such a work as this, to attempt originality would be undesirable and
intrusive; a judicious selection, a faithful compilation, are all that
can be expected.
That the selection of operations may sometimes show "Northern
Proclivities" is possible; and this is perhaps not unnatural to a
scholar and teacher in the Edinburgh School.
An earnest endeavour has been used to make the references correct and
copious: for any mistakes or omissions the author would crave
indulgence.
The four plates which precede the letterpress were drawn on wood (from
original photographs) by Mr. D.W. Williamson, Melbourne Place, and the
lines of incision for the various operations were added by the author.
The rough woodcuts scattered through the work were drawn on wood by the
author, and for their roughness he, not his engraver, is responsible. He
also hopes that the references in the letterpress will be accepted as
sufficient acknowledgment of the true ownership, in those few instances
in which the idea of the diagram has been borrowed.
It has been thought unnecessary to introduce woodcuts of surgical
instruments, as the illustrated catalogues lately published by Weiss,
Maw, and others, are sufficiently accurate.
In excuse of the frequent baldness and brevity of the style, the author
must point to the size and price of the work. Its composition would have
been easier had its dimensions been greater.
Though intended chiefly to guide the studies, on the dead subject, of
students and junior practitioners, the author ventures to hope that the
Manual may be useful to those who, in the public services, in the
colonies, or in lonely country districts, find themselves constrained to
attempt the performance of operations which, in the towns, usually fall
to the lot of a few Hospital Surgeons.
JOSEPH BELL.
5 CASTLE TERRACE, EDINBURGH,
_July 1866._
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I.
LIGATURE OF ARTERIES.
PAGE
Ligature of Arteries--General Maxims--Ligature of
Aorta--Iliacs--Gluteal--Femoral--Popliteal--Innominate--Carotids--
Lingual--Subclavian--Brachial, etc., 1-45
CHAPTER II.
AMPUTATIONS.
Eras of Amputation--Flap and Circular compared--Special Amputation of
Arm and Leg, 46-107
CHAPTER III.
EXCISION OF JOINTS.
Brief Historical Sketch--Comparison of Excisions with
Amputations--Special Excisions of the six larger Joints--Excisions of
smaller Joints and Bones, 108-146
CHAPTER IV.
OPERATIONS ON CRANIUM AND SCALP.
Trephining--Excision of Wens, 147-150
CHAPTER V.
OPERATIONS ON THE EYE AND ITS APPENDAGES.
Entropium and Ectropium--Trichiasis--Tarsal Tumours--On Lachrymal
Organs--Mr. Bowman's Operation--Pterygium--Strabismus, convergent
and divergent--Paracentesis of the Anterior Chamber--Operations
for Cataract by Displacement, Solution, and Extraction--Various
methods of Extraction--Operations for Artificial
Pupil--Iridesis--Corelysis--Iridectomy--Excision of Staphyloma--Excision
of Eyeball, 151-174
CHAPTER VI.
OPERATIONS ON THE NOSE AND LIPS.
Rhinoplastic Operations from Cheek, Forehead, and elsewhere--Removal of
Nasal Polypi--Excision of Cancers of Lips--Cheiloplastic
Operations--Operations for Harelip, 175-187
CHAPTER VII.
OPERATIONS ON THE JAWS.
Excision of Upper Jaw--Of Lower Jaw, 188-195
CHAPTER VIII.
OPERATIONS ON MOUTH AND THROAT.
For Salivary Fistula--Excision of Tongue, complete and partial--Fissures
of the Palate, soft and hard--Excision of Tonsils, 196-205
CHAPTER IX.
OPERATIONS ON AIR PASSAGES.
Larynx and
Trachea--Tracheotomy--Tubes--Laryngotomy--OEsophagotomy--[see
Addendum, p. 302], 206-217
CHAPTER X.
OPERATIONS ON THORAX.
PAGE
Excision of Mamma--Paracentesis Thoracis, 218-221
CHAPTER XI.
OPERATIONS ON ABDOMEN.
Paracentesis Abdominis--Gastrotomy--Ovariotomy--Operation for
Strangulated Hernia--Inguinal--Femoral--Umbilical--Operations for the
Radical Cure of Hernia, 222-255
CHAPTER XII.
OPERATIONS ON PELVIS.
Lithotomy--Varieties--Lithotrity--Operations for Stricture--Puncture of
the Bladder--Phymosis--Amputation of
Penis--Hydrocele--Hæmatocele--Castration--Operation for
Fistula--Fissure--Polypi of Rectum--Piles, 256-295
CHAPTER XIII.
TENOTOMY.
On Tenotomy for Wry Neck and Club Foot, 296-298
CHAPTER XIV.
OPERATIONS ON NERVES.
Nerve-stretching--Nerve-cutting--Nerve suture, 299-301
ADDENDUM to Chapter IX., 302
INDEX, 303-311
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
FIG. PAGE
I. Amputations of Fingers, 50
II. Diagram of Finger showing Articulations, 50
III. Dubrueil's Amputation at Wrist (front view), 57
IV. " " (dorsal view), 57
V. Amputations of Toes, 69
VI. Excision of Wrist-joint--Lister's, 126
VII. Operations for Ectropium and Entropium, 151
VIII. Operation for Trichiasis--Streatfeild's, 151
IX. Operation for Epiphora--Bowman's, 155
X. Greenslade's Instrument for above, 156
XI. Operations for Squint, 157
XII. Linear Extraction of Cataract, 162
XIII. Flap Extraction of Cataract, 162
XIV. Operation of Corelysis--Streatfeild's, 171
XV. Operation for Staphyloma--Critchett's, 172
XVI. Result of above, 172
XVII. Rhinoplastic Operation from Cheek, 176
XVIII. " " Forehead, 177
XIX. Operation on Lip, V-shaped incision, 181
XX. Operation on Lip, by scissors, 181
XXI. Operation for a new Lip, incisions, 182
XXII. Operation for New Lip sewed up, 182
XXIII. Diagram of Partial Fissure (Harelip), 184
XXIV. Nelaton's Operation for ditto, 184
XXV. Operation for Double Harelip, 185
XXVI. Diagram of Double Harelip, 186
XXVII. Excision of Upper and Lower Jaws, 189
XXVIII. Operation for Salivary Fistula, 196
XXIX. Operation for Fissure in Soft Palate, 201
XXX. Operation for Fissure in Hard Palate, 203
XXXI. Diagram illustrating Operations on Air Passages, 207
XXXII. Diagram illustrating Operations for Hernia, 241
XXXIII. Diagram of an Artificial Anus, 253
XXXIV. Diagram of Section of Prostate, 257
XXXV. Diagram of Membranous portion of Urethra, 259
XXXVI. Diagram illustrating Puncture of Bladder, 284
XXXVII. Diagram of Operation for Phymosis, 286
XXXVIII. Diagram of Amputation of Penis, 287
[Illustration]
PLATE I.
1. Ligature of Aorta--Sir A. Cooper's incision.
2. Ligature of Aorta--South and Murray's incision.
3. Ligature of Common Iliac.
4. Ligature of External Iliac--Sir A. Cooper's.
5. Ligature of Femoral in Scarpa's triangle.
6. Ligature of Femoral below Sartorius.[1]
7. Ligature of Innominate.
8. Ligature of third part of Left Subclavian.
9. Ligature of Axillary in its first part.
10. Ligature of Axillary in its third part.
11. Ligature of Brachial.
12. Amputation of Arm by double flaps.
13. Amputation at Shoulder-joint (1st method), showing portion of skin
left uncut till the conclusion of the disarticulation.
14. Amputation at Ankle-joint by internal flap--Mackenzie's.
15-16. Amputation of Leg just above the Ankle-joint.
17-18. Amputation below Knee--modified circular.
19. Amputation through Condyles of Femur--Syme, and Pl. III. 5.
20. Amputation at lower third of Thigh--Syme, and Pl. III. 6.
A. Excision of Head of Humerus.
B. Excision of Knee-joint; semilunar incision.
FOOTNOTES:
[1] This line is placed too low down; it should be in the middle third
of the thigh.
[Illustration]
PLATE II.
1. Amputation at lower third of Fore-arm--Teale's.
2-2. Amputation at Shoulder-joint by large postero-external flap--2d
method.
3-3. Amputation at Shoulder-joint by triangular flap from deltoid--3d
method.
4-5. Amputation through Tarsus--Chopart's.
6-7. Amputation at Knee-joint.
8. Amputation by Single Flap--Carden's, and Pl. IV. 16.
9-10. Amputation of Thigh--Teale's.
A. Excision of Hip-joint.
B-B. Excision of Ankle-joint--Hancock's incisions.
[Illustration]
PLATE III.
1. Ligature of Popliteal.
2. Amputation at Elbow-joint--posterior flap.
3. Amputation at Shoulder-joint--posterior incision of first method, and
Pl. I. 13.
4. Amputation at Ankle-joint--Mackenzie's, and Pl. I. 14.
5. Amputation through Condyles of Femur--Syme, and Pl. I. 19.
6. Amputation at lower third of Thigh--Syme, and Pl. I. 20.
7. Amputation at Knee--posterior incision.
8. Amputation of Thigh--Spence's, and at Pl. IV. 18.
9. Amputation at Hip-joint, and Pl. IV. 20.
A. Excision of Shoulder-joint--deltoid flap.
B. Excision of Shoulder-joint by posterior incision.
C. Excision of Elbow-joint--H-shaped incision.
D. Excision of Elbow-joint--linear incision.
E. Excision of Hip-joint--Gross's.
F. Excision of Os Calcis.
G. Excision of Scapula.
[Illustration]
PLATE IV.
1. Ligature of Carotid.
2. Ligature of Subclavian (3d stage)--Skey's incision.
3. Amputation at Wrist-joint--dorsal incision.
4. Amputation at Wrist-joint--palmar incision.
5. Amputation at Fore-arm--dorsal incision.
6. Amputation at Fore-arm--palmar incision.
7. Amputation at Elbow-joint--Anterior flap, and Pl. III. 3.
8. Amputation at Arm--Teale's method.
9. Amputation at Shoulder-joint--1st method, and Pl. III. 3.
10-11. Amputation of Metatarsus--Hey's.
12-13. Amputation at Ankle--Syme's.
14-15. Amputation of Leg--posterior flap--Lee's.
16. Amputation at Knee-joint--Carden's, and Pl. II. 8.
17. Amputation of Thigh--B. Bell's.
18. Amputation of Thigh--Spence's, and Pl. III. 8.
19. Amputation of Thigh in middle third.
20-20. Amputation at Hip-joint, and Pl. III. 9.
A. Excision of Wrist--radial incision.
B. Excision of Wrist--ulnar incision.
CHAPTER I.
LIGATURE OF ARTERIES.
LIGATURE OF ARTERIES.--In a work of this nature there is no room for any
discussion of the principles which should guide us in the selection of
cases, or of the pathology of aneurism, or the local effects of the
ligature on the vessels. One or two fundamental axioms may be given in a
few words:--
1. In selecting the spot for the application of the ligature, avoid as
far as possible bifurcations, or the neighbourhood of large collateral
branches.
2. A free incision should be made through the skin and subjacent
textures, till the sheath of the artery is reached and fairly exposed.
3. The sheath must be opened and the artery cleaned with a sharp knife
till the white external coat is clearly seen. The portion cleaned
should, however, be as small as possible, consistent with thorough
exposure, so that the ligature may be passed round the vessel without
force.
4. As the artery should never be raised from its bed, it is generally
advisable to pass the needle only so far as just to permit the eye to be
seen past the vessel. The ligature should then be seized by a pair of
forceps and gently pulled through, the needle being cautiously
withdrawn. When catgut is used, it is better to pass the unarmed needle
till the eye is visible, then thread and withdraw it, thus pulling the
catgut through.
5. As a rule, the needle should be passed from the side of the vessel at
which the chief dangers exist. This will generally be in the side at
which the vein is.
6. The ligature should be single, and consist of strong well-waxed silk,
and should always be drawn as tight as possible, so as to divide the
internal and middle coats of the vessel. In cases where the wound is to
be treated with antiseptic precautions and an attempt at immediate union
made, the ligature may be of strong catgut properly prepared, and both
ends of it may be cut off.
7. Before the ligature is tightened, it is well to feel that pressure
between the ligature and the finger arrests the pulsation of the tumour.
LIGATURE OF THE AORTA.--It has been found necessary in a few rare cases
to place a ligature on the abdominal aorta; no case has as yet survived
the operation beyond a very few days, but they have in their progress
sufficiently proved that the circulation can be carried on, and gangrene
does not necessarily result even after such a decided interference with
vascular supply.
_Operation._--The ligature may be applied in one of two ways, the choice
being influenced by the nature of the disease for which it is done.
1. A straight incision (Plate I. fig. 1) in the linea alba, just
avoiding the umbilicus by a curve, and dividing the peritoneum, allows
the intestines to be pushed aside, and the aorta exposed still covered
by the peritoneum, as it lies in front of the lumbar vertebræ. The
peritoneum must again be divided very cautiously at the point selected,
and the aortic plexus of nerves carefully dissected off, in order that
they may not be interfered with by the ligature. The ligature should
then be passed round, tied, cut short, and the wound accurately sewed
up.
2. Without wounding the peritoneum.
A curved incision (Plate I. fig. 2), with its convexity backwards, from
the projecting end of the tenth rib to a point a little in front of the
anterior superior spinous process of the ilium. At first through the
skin and fascia only, this incision must be continued through the
muscles of the abdominal wall, one by one, till the transversalis fascia
is exposed, which must then be scraped through very cautiously, so as
not to injure the peritoneum, which is to be detached from the fascia
covering the psoas and iliacus muscles, and must be held inwards and out
of the way by bent copper spatulæ. The common iliac will then be felt
pulsating, and on it the finger may easily be guided up until the aorta
is reached.
The really difficult part of the operation now begins: to isolate the
vessel from the spine behind, the inferior cava on the right side, and
the plexus of nerves in the cellular tissue all round. The cleaning of
the vessel must be done in great measure by the finger-nail, and much
dexterity will be required to pass the ligature without unnecessarily
raising the vessel from its bed, especially as the vessel itself may
very possibly be diseased, and the aneurism of the iliac trunk for which
the operation is required will displace and confuse the parts, and may
have set up adhesive inflammation.
_Results._--Operation has been performed at least ten times. By the
first method by Sir Astley Cooper and Mr. James; by the second by Drs.
Murray and Monteiro, M'Guire, Heron Watson, and Stokes, and Mr. South,
and Czerny of Heidelberg. All the cases proved fatal; Dr. Monteiro's
survived for ten days, and eventually perished from hæmorrhage; the rest
all died at shorter intervals.
LIGATURE OF COMMON ILIAC.--_Anatomical Note._--This short thick trunk
varies slightly in its relations on the two sides of the body. As the
aorta bifurcates on the left side of the body of the fourth lumbar
vertebra, the common iliac of the right side would have a longer course
to pursue than that on the left, if both ended at corresponding points.
However, this is not always the case, as has been pointed out by Mr.
Adams of Dublin, as the right common iliac often bifurcates sooner than
the left does. With this slight difference, the position of the two
vessels is precisely similar, each extending along the brim of the
pelvis from the bifurcation of the aorta towards the sacro-iliac
synchondrosis for about two inches. Sometimes the division takes place a
little higher, even at the junction of the last lumbar vertebra and the
sacrum. This variation depends chiefly on the length of the artery,
which, as Quain has shown, varies from one inch and a half to more than
three inches.
The anterior surface of both arteries is covered by the peritoneum, and
each is crossed by the ureter just as it bifurcates into its branches.
The artery of the right side is in close contact behind with its
corresponding vein, which at its upper part projects to the outside, and
below to the inner side. The artery of the left side is less involved
with its vein, which lies below it, and to the inside. The right is in
contact with a coil of ileum, the left with the colon. The inferior
mesenteric artery crosses the left one, while to the outside of both,
and behind them, lie the sympathetic and obdurator nerves.
There are no named branches from the common iliac.
_Operation._--The chief difficulties to be encountered are--1. The close
proximity of the peritoneum, and specially the risk there is that it has
become adherent to the sac of the aneurism; 2. The depth of the parts,
and tendency of the intestines to roll into the wound; 3. Specially on
the right side, the proximity of the great veins. With these exceptions
the passing of the ligature is not so difficult as in some situations,
the lax cellular tissue in which the vessel lies generally yielding much
more easily than the tough sheath which elsewhere, as in the femoral,
requires accurate dissection.
_Incision._--(Plate I. fig. 3.)--From a point about half an inch above
the centre of Poupart's ligament, a crescentic incision should be made,
at first extending upwards and outwards, so as to pass about one inch
inside of the anterior superior spine of the ilium, and then prolonged
upwards and inwards, as far as may be rendered necessary by the size of
the aneurism or the depth of parts. It must extend through skin and
superficial fascia, exposing the tendon of the external oblique, which
must then be slit up to the full extent visible. The spermatic cord may
then be easily exposed under the edge of the internal oblique, and the
forefinger of the left hand inserted on the cord, and thus beneath the
internal oblique and transversalis muscles, the peritoneum being quite
safe below.
On the finger these muscles may be safely divided to the full extent of
the external incision. The deep circumflex iliac artery if possible
should not be divided, but may bleed smartly and require a ligature.
The peritoneum must then be very cautiously raised from the tumour, and
supported, along with the intestines, by copper spatulæ. The surgeon
will rarely succeed in obtaining anything like a satisfactory view of
the vessel, but can expose it for the ligature by the aid of his
finger-nail. An ordinary aneurism-needle will generally suffice for the
conveyance of the ligature.
The difficulties may occasionally be much increased by special
circumstances, such as great stoutness of the patient, and consequent
thickness of the abdominal wall; or large size of the aneurism, which
may cause alterations in the relation of parts and adhesion of the
peritoneum. The ureter generally gives no trouble, as in pressing back
the peritoneum it is adherent to it, and is removed along with it
towards the middle line.
_Results._--Are not by any means satisfactory.
Out of twenty-two cases in which the common iliac has been tied for
aneurism, eight recovered and fourteen died; while out of thirteen cases
where it required ligature for hæmorrhage after amputation, rupture of
aneurism, etc., only one recovered.
LIGATURE OF INTERNAL ILIAC.--Little need be added to the account just
given of the operation for ligature of the common iliac, as precisely
the same incisions are required. The operator having reached the
bifurcation of the vessel, must, instead of tracing it upwards,
endeavour to trace it downwards, and the same time inwards, into the
basin of the pelvis. To do this his finger must cross the external iliac
artery, which will pulsate under the joint of the ungual phalanx, while
the pulp of the finger is touching the internal iliac,--the external
iliac vein, which occupies the angle formed by the bifurcation of the
artery, lying between these two points. The ligature should be applied
within three-quarters of an inch from the bifurcation.
_Anatomical Note._--This short thick trunk extends backwards and inwards
(Ellis); downwards and backwards (Harrison), in front of the sacro-iliac
synchondrosis, as far as the upper extremity of the great sacro-sciatic
notch, a distance varying in the adult from one and a half to two inches
in length. It forms a curve with its concavity forwards, and at its
termination divides into, rather than gives off, its two or three
principal branches. Its corresponding vein is in close contact behind,
as also the lumbo-sacral nerve, the obdurator nerve to its outer side.
The peritoneum covers it anteriorly, and it is crossed just at its
commencement by the ureter. On the left side it is covered anteriorly by
the rectum. Of its anatomical relations, that of the external iliac vein
is perhaps the most important, as it is apt to interfere with the
passing of the needle.
_Results._--This vessel has been tied for aneurism of one or other of
its branches, or for wound, about seventeen times.[2] Of these seven
recovered; in ten the operation proved fatal, in most of them from
secondary hæmorrhage. In one case the hæmorrhage occurred within twelve
hours after the operation. The circulation of the parts supplied after
the ligature is carried on mainly by the lumbar and lateral sacral
branches, which become much developed even before the operation, in
cases of aneurism.
LIGATURE OF EXTERNAL ILIAC.--_Anatomical Note._--This artery extends
from the bifurcation of the common iliac to the centre of Poupart's
ligament, where it leaves the abdomen, passing under the ligament, and
becomes the common femoral. Its upper extremity is thus not always
constant, varying in position from the sacro-lumbar fibro-cartilage to
the upper end of the sacro-iliac synchondrosis, or even a little lower
down. Thus, though the position of the lower end is at a fixed point,
the artery varies in length. In an adult male of moderate stature it is
from three and a half to four inches in length. On the surface of the
abdomen the position of this vessel would be indicated by a line drawn
from about an inch on either side of the umbilicus to the middle of the
space between the symphysis pubis and the crest of the ilium. Its
relations to neighbouring parts are as follows:--The peritoneum lies _in
front_ of it, separated from it only by a subperitoneal layer of loose
fascia, in which the artery and vein lie, which varies much in
consistence and amount, and which occasionally gives a good deal of
trouble in the operation of ligature. Near its origin it is sometimes
crossed by the ureter, and near its termination the genito-crural nerve
lies on it. The spermatic vessels cross it, and occasionally a quantity
of subperitoneal fat marks its course. _Externally._--The fascia-iliaca
and some fibres of the psoas muscle separate it from the anterior
crural nerve, which lies outside of the vessel, and at a somewhat deeper
level, hidden amid the fibres of psoas and iliacus. _Internally._--The
external iliac vein lies on the same plane, and to the inner side of the
artery, at Poupart's ligament, on both sides of the body. As we trace it
upwards we find that on the left side it lies internal to the artery in
its whole course, while on the right side it becomes posterior to the
artery as it approaches the bifurcation of the common iliac. Lastly,
just before the vessel reaches Poupart, the circumflex iliac vein
crosses it from within outwards.
_Branches._--The two large branches to the wall of the abdomen, the
epigastric and the circumflex iliac, rise a few lines above Poupart's
ligament. Their position is unfortunately apt to vary upwards, to the
extent of an inch and a half or even two inches, and they are important,
as, besides being liable to be cut during the operation, their position
very materially modifies the prognosis, as, if too high up, they
interfere with the proper formation of the coagulum.
_Operation._--Various plans of incision through the skin have been
recommended by various operators, the chief difference being with regard
to the part of the artery aimed at; the plan known as that of Mr.
Abernethy, with various modifications, being intended to expose the
artery pretty high up, and enable the surgeon to reach it from above;
while the method going by the name of Sir Astley Cooper's exposes the
lower part of the artery, and enables the surgeon to reach it from
below. Though the latter is in some respects easier, the former method
is generally to be preferred, being further from the seat of disease,
and especially more out of the way of the epigastric and circumflex
arteries.
The higher operation (ABERNETHY'S modified).--An incision must be made
through the skin about four inches in length, but longer in proportion
to the amount of subcutaneous fat, and the depth of the pelvis,
extending from a point one inch to the inside of the anterior superior
spine of the ilium, to a point half an inch above the middle line of
Poupart's ligament. It must be slightly curved, with its convexity
looking outwards and downwards.[3]
The subcutaneous cellular tissue and the tendon of the external oblique
may then be divided freely in the same line. Then at some one point or
other (generally easiest below), the internal oblique and transversalis
muscles must be cautiously scraped through with the aid of the forceps,
till the transversalis fascia is reached; they may then be freely
divided by a probe-pointed bistoury (guarded by the finger pushed up
below the muscles) to the required extent. The muscles being held aside
by flat copper spatulæ, the fascia transversalis must be carefully
scratched through near the crest of the ilium, and thus the operator
will be enabled to push the peritoneum inwards, and by the forefinger
will easily recognise the pulsation of the artery lying on the soft brim
of the pelvis.
A branch of the circumflex iliac artery will very likely be cut in
dissecting through the muscles, and must be secured, as also any
branches of the epigastric which may be divided in the incisions through
the abdominal wall (_ut supra_, p. 5).
The operator should then, by pressing the peritoneum and its contents
gently inwards, endeavour to see the vessel; if, from the depth of the
pelvis, this cannot be done, the sense of touch will be in most cases
sufficient to enable him to isolate the artery by the point of his
finger-nail, or by the blunt aneurism-needle, from the vein. The
ligature should be passed from the inner side to avoid including the
vein, and thus there will be less chance of wounding the peritoneum
from the convexity of the needle being applied to it. If possible, the
genito-crural nerve should not be included in the ligature, but probably
such an accident would do no great harm.
It is of much more consequence to avoid injuring the peritoneum. This is
sometimes very difficult, from the adhesions which are set up between
the peritoneum, the artery, and especially the aneurism, as the result
of pressure and inflammation. The accident of wounding the peritoneum
has happened to Keate, Tait, Post, and others, and in some cases with
perfect impunity. However, the peritoneum should be displaced as little
as possible from its cellular connections, as such displacement
increases the risk of diffuse inflammation of that membrane; and the
vessel itself should be raised and disturbed as little as possible, lest
destruction of the vasa vasorum cause ulceration of the weak coats and
secondary hæmorrhage.
The operation from below (Plate I. fig. 4), SIR ASTLEY COOPER'S, is thus
described by Mr. Hodgson:[4]--"A semilunar incision is made through the
integuments in the direction of the fibres of the aponeurosis of the
external oblique muscle. One extremity of the incision will be situated
near the spine of the ilium; the other will terminate a little above the
inner margin of the abdominal ring. The aponeurosis of the external
oblique muscles will be exposed, and is to be divided throughout the
extent, and in the direction of the external wound. The flap which is
thus formed being raised, the spermatic cord will be seen passing under
the margin of the internal oblique and transverse muscles. The opening
in the fascia which lines the transverse muscle through which the
spermatic cord passes, is situated in the mid space between the anterior
superior spine of the ilium and the symphysis pubis. The epigastric
artery runs precisely along the inner margin of this opening, beneath
which the external iliac artery is situated. If the finger therefore be
passed under the spermatic cord through this opening in the fascia, it
will come in immediate contact with the artery which lies on the outside
of the external iliac vein. The artery and vein are connected by dense
cellular tissue, which must be separated to allow of the ligature being
passed round the former."
In comparing the two methods of operating, we find that while the latter
is in some respects easier, and the vessel in it lies more superficial,
it has certain disadvantages which more than counterbalance its
advantages. Thus, first, the epigastric artery is very likely to be
wounded. It may be said, Well, if so, the ends can be tied; but this
tying is sometimes very difficult; and, as shown in Dupuytren's case of
this accident, involves considerable interference with the peritoneum,
and a possibly fatal peritonitis. Besides this, by cutting the
epigastric you destroy an important agent which would have carried on
the anastomosing circulation, and thus greatly increase the risk of
gangrene. By this method, also, the artery is exposed too near to the
seat of disease; and if found to be enlarged and involved in the
aneurism, considerable difficulty may be experienced in reaching the
upper part of the vessel. Again, ligature of the lower third or half of
the vessel, which this method implies, is dangerous from the occasional
high origin of the circumflex or epigastric, or both, rendering the
formation of a clot much more difficult, and secondary hæmorrhage much
more likely.
The circumflex iliac vein must also be remembered, as it crosses the
artery from within outwards in the lower end of it, just before it goes
under Poupart's ligament.
However, the method may occasionally vary with the individual case. In
every case of ligature of the great vessels of the abdomen, the bowels
should be carefully evacuated before the operation, and the bladder
emptied. A properly managed position, with the shoulders raised and the
knees semiflexed, will greatly facilitate the gaining access to the
vessel.
In sewing up the wounds in the abdominal walls, advantage will be gained
by putting in a certain number of stitches so deeply as to include the
whole thickness of the muscles, and in the intervals between these deep
ones to insert others less deeply, so as accurately to approximate the
edges of the skin. This will both facilitate union and also render the
occurrence of hernia less probable. This latter accident did occur in a
case, otherwise successful, in which Mr. Kirby tied the external iliac.
Both external iliacs have been tied in the same patient with success, on
at least two occasions, once by Arendt, with an interval of only eight
days between the operations; and a second time by Tait, at an interval
of rather more than eleven months.
This operation is in the great majority of cases performed for femoral
aneurism, and naturally secondary hæmorrhage is a too frequent result.
Wounds of these great vessels generally result in so rapid death from
hæmorrhage as to give no time for surgical interference. One case,
however, is recorded,[5] in which the external iliac was cut in a lad of
seventeen by an accidental stab, and in which Drs. Layraud and Durand,
who were almost instantly on the spot, succeeded in stopping the
bleeding by compresses, till Velpeau arrived, who tied the vessel above
with perfect success.
Of the first twenty-two cases collected by Hodgson, fifteen recovered--a
mortality of 31.81 per cent.; and of 153 in Norris's collection,
including Cutter's cases, forty-seven died--a mortality of only 32.5 per
cent.,--a very satisfactory result, considering the size of the vessel
and the importance of its relations.
LIGATURE OF GLUTEAL.--This vessel, though one of the branches of the
internal iliac, approaches the surface so nearly as to be occasionally
wounded. It is also, though very rarely, the subject of spontaneous
aneurism. The principle of treatment and the operation to be selected in
any given case, depends upon its origin, whether traumatic or
spontaneous. For if traumatic, the wound must almost necessarily be
accessible from the outside; the neighbouring part of the artery is
probably healthy, and hence the case can be treated by the old
operation, slitting up the tumour, and tying the vessel above and below
the wound. When the aneurism is spontaneous, there is no guide to tell
us where the aneurism may have first originated; it may be that it is
high up in the pelvis, and that the visible tumour is only its expansion
in the direction of least resistance, or the coats of the vessel may be
extensively diseased. The only chance is ligature of the internal iliac.
1. The old operation, or ligature of the gluteal artery in the hip.
_Anatomical Note._--The gluteal is the largest branch of the internal
iliac, and leaves the pelvis by the great sacro-sciatic notch just at
the upper edge of the pyriformis muscle. After a very short course, it
divides into superficial and deep branches opposite the posterior margin
of the glutens minimus, between it and the pyriformis muscles.
Very precise rules have been given to enable the operator to hit on the
exact spot where the artery leaves the pelvis. These, though perhaps
interesting anatomically, are quite useless in a surgical point of view,
for the only reasons which could possibly induce a surgeon to cut down
upon the gluteal in the living body, are the existence either of a wound
of the vessel or an aneurism. In the first the flow of blood, in the
second the tumour, would give sufficient guidance.
In cases of traumatic aneurism the operation should be something like
the following:--A free incision should be made into the tumour, dividing
it in its long direction; the contents should be rapidly scooped out,
and a finger placed on the bleeding point, just at the upper corner of
the sciatic notch. This will at once stop the hæmorrhage till the vessel
can be secured. This sounds easy enough, and has been done several times
with success. Thus, John Bell, by an incision two feet long, as he tells
us in his hyperbolical language, was enabled to tie the vessel in the
case of the leech-gatherer who had punctured the artery by a pair of
long scissors. Carmichael of Dublin used a smaller incision, removed one
or two pounds of clots, and tied the vessel, in a case of wound by a
penknife.[6]
Now, though both of these cases were eventually successful, both
patients lost during the operation a very large quantity of blood; John
Bell's especially could not be removed from the operating-table for a
considerable time after the operation. The period at which the great
loss of blood took place was the interval after the incision was made,
and before the artery was exposed to view, _i.e._ the interval in which
the surgeon was busy dislodging the clots from the cellular membrane,
the sac of the false aneurism. The procedure devised by Mr. Syme to
obviate this difficulty, and which was put in practice by him in several
very trying cases, is best given in his own terse description of an
operation in a case of traumatic gluteal aneurism:--
"The patient having been rendered unconscious, and placed on his right
side, I thrust a bistoury into the tumour, over the situation of the
gluteal artery, and introduced my finger so as to prevent the blood from
flowing, except by occasional gushes, which showed what would have been
the effect of neglecting this precaution, while I searched for the
vessel. Finding it impossible to accomplish the object in this way, I
enlarged the wound by degrees sufficiently for the introduction of my
fingers in succession, until the whole hand was admitted into the
cavity, of which the orifice was still so small as to embrace the wrist
with a tightness that prevented any continuous hæmorrhage. Being now
able to explore the state of matters satisfactorily, I found that there
was a large mass of dense fibrinous coagulum firmly impacted into the
sciatic notch; and, not without using considerable force, succeeded in
disengaging the whole of this obstacle to reaching the artery, which
would have proved very serious if it had been allowed to exist after the
sac was laid open. The compact mass, which was afterwards found to be
not less than a pound in weight, having been thus detached, so that it
moved freely in the fluid contents of the sac, and the gentleman who
assisted me being prepared for the next step of the process, I ran my
knife rapidly through the whole extent of the tumour, turned out all
that was within it, and had the bleeding orifice instantly under
subjection by the pressure of a finger. Nothing then remained but to
pass a double thread under the vessel, and tie it on both sides of the
aperture."
The bleeding in this case was thus rendered comparatively trifling, and
the patient made a speedy and complete recovery. He returned home within
six weeks after the operation.[7]
2. In one case, at least, the gluteal artery has been tied with success
(for traumatic aneurism) just where it leaves the pelvis, without the
tumour being opened. This was in the practice of Professor Campbell of
Montreal. The operation was a very difficult one, and while possible
only in cases seen very early, and where the tumour is very small, does
not appear to have any advantage over the old method.
Cases of spontaneous aneurism of the gluteal artery should be treated by
ligature of the internal iliac. Steven's and Syme's cases of ligature
of the internal iliac were of this nature.
Manuals of operative surgery occasionally devote pages to the
description of special operations for the ligature of such arteries as
the sciatic, epigastric, circumflex ilii, and pudic. They do not require
ligature, except in cases of wound either of the vessels themselves or
their branches; and, according to the modern principles of surgery in
such cases, the ligature should be applied to the bleeding point, rather
than to the vessel at a distance above it.
LIGATURE OF FEMORAL.--Under this head we practically mean cases of
ligature of the superficial femoral, for the common femoral, or (as
called by some anatomists) the femoral, before the profunda is given
off, very rarely requires to be tied. If it is wounded, of course the
bleeding point must be sought, and the artery tied above and below it,
but if an aneurism on the superficial femoral renders ligature of that
trunk impossible, experience teaches that ligature of the external iliac
gives better results than ligature of the common femoral. Erichsen
asserts that out of twelve cases in which the common femoral has been
tied, only three have succeeded, the others dying from secondary
hæmorrhage. The experience of the Dublin surgeons, Porter, Smyly, and
Macnamara, has been more satisfactory, as in eight cases of this
operation six were successful.[8] A ninth case was unsuccessful. Reasons
to explain the danger are not far to seek, for the numerous small
muscular branches, along with the superficial epigastric, circumflex,
and pudic trunks, reduce the chances of a good coagulum in the common
femoral to a minimum, even without taking into consideration the
shortness of the trunk before the great profunda femoris is given off.
For the common femoral artery is only from one to two inches in length,
and if there are some rare cases in which it is a little later in its
bifurcation, there are others in which it divides nearer to Poupart's
ligament.
The superficial femoral is the name given to the main trunk between the
origin of the profunda, and the point at which, passing through the
tendon of the adductor magnus, it receives the name of popliteal. During
this long course it gives off no branch large enough or regular enough
to receive a name, except one, the anastomotica magna, which rises in
Hunter's canal, close to the end of the vessel, so in that respect it is
peculiarly suitable for the application of a ligature. Again, in the
upper part of its course, it is superficial, being covered only by skin
and fascia. A short notice of its most important anatomical relations is
necessary.
For the first two inches or two inches and a half of its separate
existence, the superficial femoral lies in Scarpa's triangle, covered,
as we said, only by skin and fascia. This triangle is formed by the
sartorius and adductor longus muscles which meet at its apex, and by
Poupart's ligament, which defines its base. The artery lies almost
exactly in the centre of the space, and at the apex is covered by the
sartorius muscle. The spot where it goes under the sartorius is the one
selected for the application of the ligature. The femoral vein lies to
the inner side of the femoral artery in this triangle, but their mutual
relations vary with the portion of the limb; for, on the level of
Poupart's ligament, the artery and vein lie side by side on the same
plane, but in different compartments of their sheath; as the artery
dives below the sartorius, the vein is still on the inside, but on a
plane slightly posterior; while, by the time they reach Hunter's canal,
the vein has got completely behind the artery. The separate compartments
of the sheath in which the vessels lie are much less marked as the
vessels go down the limb, the septum between the artery and the vein
being in most cases very ill marked, even at the level where the
ligature is applied. The anterior crural nerve, which on the level of
Poupart's ligament lay outside of the artery and on a plane somewhat
posterior, has divided into numerous branches before it reaches the
point of ligature. One of its branches requires to be mentioned, and may
sometimes be noticed and avoided during the operation, namely the
internal saphenous nerve, which, first lying external to the artery,
crosses it in front, reaching its inner side just before it enters
Hunter's canal, where it leaves the vessel accompanying the anastomotica
magna branch.
OPERATION OF LIGATURE OF THE FEMORAL--SCARPA'S SPACE.--The patient being
placed on his back, and being brought very thoroughly under chloroform,
the knee of the affected limb should be bent at an angle of about 120°,
and supported on a pillow. Having previously ascertained the angle of
junction of the sartorius and adductor, the surgeon should make an
incision (Plate I. fig. 5) just over the pulsations of the vessel, in
the middle line of the space, having its lower end quite over the
sartorius muscle, and its upper one, at a distance from two and a half
to three and a half inches, varying according to the amount of fat and
muscle. The saphena vein can generally be recognised, and is almost
always safe out of the way of this incision at its inner side.
The first incision should divide the skin, superficial fascia, and fat,
quite down to the fascia lata. The edges of the wound being held apart,
the fascia should be carefully divided, and the sartorius exposed; its
fibres can generally be easily enough recognised by their oblique
direction; once recognised, the fascia should be dissected from it till
its inner edge be gained, the corner of which should then be turned so
that it may be held outwards by an assistant with a blunt hook. The
sheath of the vessels is now exposed, and after having thoroughly
satisfied himself of the position of the artery by the pulsation, the
surgeon should carefully raise a portion of the sheath with the
dissecting forceps, and open it freely enough to allow the coats of the
artery to be distinctly seen. If the parts are deep, as in a fat or
muscular patient, great advantage will be gained by seizing one edge of
the sheath by a pair of spring forceps, and committing it to the care of
an assistant, while the operator holds the other in his dissecting
forceps; there is thus no fear of losing the orifice of the sheath,
which without this precaution may easily happen, from the parts being
confused with blood, or the position altered by movements of the
patient. Now comes the stage of the operation on which, more than on
anything else, success or failure depends. A _small_ portion of the
vessel must be cleaned for the reception of the ligature, and it must be
_thoroughly_ cleaned, so that the needle may be passed round it without
bruising of the coats, or rupture of an unnecessary number of the vasa
vasorum by rough attempts to force a passage for it. Hence all
compromises, such as blunted instruments, silver knives, and the like,
are dangerous, for in trying to avoid the Scylla of wounding the artery,
they fall into the Charybdis, on the one hand, of isolating too much of
the vessel and causing gangrene from want of vascular supply, or, on the
other, expose the vein to the danger of injury by the aneurism-needle in
their attempts to force it round an uncleaned vessel.
The needle should in most cases be passed from the inner side, care
being taken to avoid including the vein which is on the inner side and
behind the vessel; the internal saphenous nerve, if seen, should be
avoided. The needle must not be passed quite round the vessel raising it
up, still less must the vessel be held up on the needle, as used to be
done, as if the surgeon was surprised at his own success, but the needle
should be passed just far enough to expose the end of the ligature,
which must be seized by forceps and cautiously drawn through. It must
then be tied very firmly and secured with a reef knot.
The edges of the wound must be brought into accurate apposition, and
secured by one or two stitches. If antiseptics are used, drainage should
be provided for.
From the very fact that ligature of the superficial femoral is a
remarkably successful operation in causing consolidation of the aneurism
and a rapid cure, there is also a corresponding danger that the limb be
not sufficiently supplied with blood at first. The limb may very
possibly become cold, and remain so for some hours at least after the
operation. To avoid this as far as possible, it should be wrapped in
cotton wadding, and very great care should be taken that it be not
over-stimulated by hot applications, friction, or the like, any of which
measures might very likely excite reaction, which would result in
gangrene.
Complete rest of the limb and of the whole body must be enjoined; the
food must be nourishing and in moderate quantity. The chief danger is
from gangrene of the limb, which is especially apt to result when the
vein is wounded, or even too much handled during the operation.
When properly performed, and in suitable cases, the operation is very
successful. Mr. Syme tied this artery for aneurism thirty-seven times,
and of these every one recovered. The statistics of Norris and Porta,
who collected all the cases in which ligature of the femoral had been
employed for _any_ cause, show a mortality of somewhat less than one in
four. Rabe's table up to 1869 with the additional cases collected by Mr.
Barwell to 1880 gives 297 cases with 53 deaths.[9] Mr. Hutchinson's
table, again, of fifty cases collected from the records of Metropolitan
Hospitals, shows the very startling result of sixteen deaths out of the
fifty cases, or a mortality, in round numbers, of one-third.
Certain anomalies have been observed in the distribution of the femoral
vessels, of some importance as affecting the possibility of applying,
and the result of, ligature; such as--1. A high division of the branches
which afterwards become posterior tibial and peroneal. 2. A double
superficial femoral, both branches of which may unite and form the
popliteal, as in Sir Charles Bell's well-known case. 3. Absence of the
artery altogether, as in Manec's case, where the popliteal was a
continuation of an immensely enlarged sciatic.
In such a case the absence of pulsation in front, and the presence of
increased pulsation behind the limb, ought to prevent any fruitless
attempt at search.
LIGATURE OF THE SUPERFICIAL FEMORAL BELOW THE SARTORIUS MUSCLE.--This
operation, though once common in France, and though the one recommended
by Hunter himself, is now comparatively little used in this country; and
rightly so; for while it has no advantage over the upper position, it is
at once nearer the seat of disease, and the vessel is more deeply buried
under muscles, and has a more distinct fibrous sheath, which requires
division.
It is, however, by no means a difficult operation, and is thus
performed:--
The limb being laid as before on the outside, and slightly bent, the
skin shaved and the pulsation of the artery detected, an incision (Plate
I. fig. 6) must be made from the lower edge of the sartorius muscle just
as it crosses the vessel, along the course of the vessel, avoiding if
possible the internal saphena vein.
The sartorius when exposed must be drawn inwards. The fibrous canal
filling the interspace between the abductor magnus and vastus internus
is then recognised, and must be fairly opened; the artery is now seen
lying in it, and over the vein which is posterior to it, but projects
slightly on its outer side; the internal saphenous nerve is lying on the
artery. The needle is best passed from without inwards so as to avoid
the vein. The anastomotica magna is sometimes a large trunk, and has
been mistaken for the femoral in this situation, and tied instead of it.
LIGATURE OF THE POPLITEAL.--This operation is now hardly ever performed
for aneurism, ligature of the superficial femoral having quite
superseded it, and it is very rarely required for wounds, from the
manner in which the vessel is protected by its position.
Before the invention of the Hunterian principle of ligature at a
distance, the old operation for popliteal aneurism consisted in cutting
into the space, clearing out the contents of the aneurismal sac, and
tying both ends of the vessel; from the depth of parts and the close
connection of the popliteal vein, this operation was very rarely
successful, and is now quite given up. If the vessel is wounded the
bleeding point is the object to be aimed at, and is generally sufficient
guide.
In cases of hæmorrhage for suppuration of an aneurismal sac, it might
possibly be advisable, and there are certain cases of rupture of the
artery, without the existence of an external wound, in which attempts
have been made to save the limb by tying the vessel.[10] From the
complexity of the parts, the numerous tendons, veins, and nerves crowded
together in a narrow hollow, and chiefly from the great depth at which
the artery lies, any attempt at ligature is very difficult. It is least
so at the lower angle of the space, where, between the heads of the
gastrocnemius, the vessel comes more to the surface, but is still
overlapped by muscle.
_Operation._--The patient lying on his face, a straight incision (Plate
III. fig. 1), at least four inches in length, should be made over the
artery, and thus nearer the inner than the outer hamstring; a strong
fibrous aponeurosis will require division after the skin and superficial
fascia are cut through, the limb is then to be flexed, and the tendons
drawn aside with strong retractors; fat and lymphatic glands must next
be dissected through, and then the vein and artery, lying on a sort of
sheath of condensed cellular tissue, are seen, the vein lying above the
artery and obscuring it. The vein must be drawn to the outside, and the
thread passed round the artery, which lies close to the bone, on the
ligamentum posticum of Winslowe.
It is a very difficult subject to decide what operations should be
described in a work of this character, on the vessels of the leg and
foot. A very large number of distinct methods of operations on the
various parts of the three chief arteries of the leg have been described
by surgeons and anatomists, but specially by the latter.
The fact is, however, that these complicated procedures are rarely
required, for aneurisms of the arteries of the leg and foot are almost
unknown, while in cases of wound of the vessel, or rupture resulting in
traumatic aneurism, the proper treatment is not to tie the vessel higher
up, but by dilating the wound and clearing out the clots, if required,
to secure the bleeding point, and tie the vessel above and below.
Again, a wound of the sole of the foot often gives rise to very severe
and persistent hæmorrhage, while the fasciæ and complicated tendons
render ligature of the vessel at the spot very difficult; yet ligature
of either the anterior or posterior tibial would probably be
insufficient; and to tie both these vessels, with possibly the peroneal
and interosseous as well, would be a much more severe and dangerous
procedure than ligature of the superficial femoral; while probably
careful plugging of the wound, combined with flexion of the knee, will
be found to stop the hæmorrhage sooner than either of the more
formidable methods.
A competent knowledge of the anatomy of the part, and of the ordinary
methods of checking hæmorrhage, such as ligatures, graduated compresses,
and styptics, aided by position, specially flexion of the knee after Mr.
Ernest Hart's method, will suffice to enable the surgeon to check any
hæmorrhage of the foot or leg, without it being necessary to burden the
memory with the three positions in which to tie the peroneal, or the
various methods, more or less bloody and tedious, by which the posterior
tibial in its upper third may be secured.
NOTE.--While, as a matter of surgical principle to guide our
practice on the living, I still hold very strongly the opinions
here expressed against special operations for ligature of the
arteries of the leg, and allow the sentences to stand as in the
first edition of this work, I insert in a note a brief description
of the more important ones, in deference to the advice of friends
and the urgent request of pupils, as these operations are used by
Examining Boards as tests of the operative dexterity of
candidates:--
1. ANTERIOR TIBIAL ARTERY IN LOWER HALF OF LEG.--_Anatomical
Note._--This vessel is related on its tibial side to the tibialis
anticus, and on its fibular, to the extensor longus digitorum
above, and the extensor pollicis below. The anterior tibial nerve
lies first on its outer side, then crosses the artery, and
eventually reaches its inner side near the foot. _Operation._--An
incision, at least three inches long, parallel with the outer edge
of the tibia, and about three-quarters of an inch from it, exposes
the deep fascia. This being divided, the outer edge of the tibialis
anticus must be found, and will be the guide to the artery, which,
surrounded by its venæ comites, lies very deeply between the
muscles.
2. Posterior Tibial.--_A._ In middle third of leg. Here the artery
is separated from the inner border of the tibia, by the flexor
longus digitorum, and is covered by the soleus. _Operation._--An
incision at least four inches long, along the inner margin of the
tibia, exposes the edge of the gastroenemius; then divide the
tendinous attachment, then expose the soleus, and divide its
attachment also; the deep fascia will then be seen; slit it up, and
the vessel will be found about an inch internal to the edge of the
bone. The nerve is there just crossing it.
Guthrie's, or the direct operation, has the very high authority of
the late Professor Spence in its favour. An incision through skin
and fascia in the middle of the back of the leg allows the two
heads of the gastrocnemius to be separated to the same extent. The
soleus is then to be scraped through in same direction, and its
deep aponeurotic surface carefully slit up. The artery and vein are
then easily seen.
B. In lower third of leg.--This is an easier and more scientific
operation, as it does not involve the division of great tendons. An
incision midway between the internal malleolus and the tendo
Achillis, parallel with both, will expose the very deep and strong
fascia in which the tendons lie. The artery, with its venæ comites,
occupies a central position, having the tendons of the tibialis
posticus and flexor communis in front between it and the internal
malleolus, and the posterior tibial nerve behind it, while the
flexor longus pollicis lies still nearer the tendo Achillis.
TABLE illustrating anastomotic circulation after ligature of
arteries of lower limb.
1. AORTA.--Epigastric and mammary of both sides. Hæmorrhoidal and
spermatic, with branches of pudic both deep and superficial.
2. COMMON ILIAC.--Internal iliac and branches, with those of the
other side, along with the following:--
3. EXTERNAL ILIAC.--Internal mammary and deep epigastric.
Iliolumbar and lumbar branches of aorta, with deep circumflex ilii.
Pudic from internal iliac, with superficial pudic of common
femoral.
Gluteal, sciatic, and obturator, with the circumflex and
perforating branches or deep femoral.
4. FEMORAL.--External circumflex, with external articular of
popliteal.
Perforating, with branches of gluteal and sciatic.
Profunda branches with anastomotica and articular branches.
Obturator and internal circumflex with anastomotica and superior
internal articular.
NOTE.--The importance of the articular branches of the popliteal
explain the danger of gangrene after a sudden rupture or increase
in size of a popliteal aneurism.
LIGATURE OF THE INNOMINATE.--The performance of this extremely
dangerous, in fact almost hopeless operation, is by no means so
difficult as might be expected.
The patient lying down with the shoulders raised and head thrown well
back, the sternal attachment of the right sterno-mastoid must be very
freely exposed. This may be done by an incision (Plate I. fig. 7) along
its anterior edge from the upper edge of the sternum, as far as may be
necessary; another about the same length along the upper edge of the
clavicle, will meet the former at an acute angle, and will include a
triangular flap of skin, which must be carefully dissected up. The
sternal, and probably a portion of the clavicular attachment of the
right sterno-mastoid, must then be cautiously divided. This being done,
the sterno-hyoid and sterno-thyroid muscles require division immediately
above their sternal attachments.
A dense process of cervical fascia (just becoming thoracic) now covers
the vessel, binding it on the right side to the right innominate vein,
and on the left maintaining the relation of the innominate artery to the
trachea. The inferior thyroid veins lie on this fascia, and must be
drawn aside, not cut. The fascia is then to be scraped through very
cautiously, exposing the root of the right carotid, which, being traced
downwards, will lead to the innominate. The following parts lie in close
relation to the vessel at the point of ligature, and must be
avoided:--1. The left innominate vein crosses the artery in front from
left to right, and must be drawn down. 2. The right innominate vein and
right pneumogastric are in close contact with the artery on the right
side; to avoid them the aneurism-needle must be entered on the outside
(right of the vessel). 3. The apex of the right pleura and the trachea
are in close contact behind, requiring the point of the needle to be
kept close to the artery in bringing the thread round.
It might have been expected that the sudden arrest of so large a
proportion of the vascular supply of the body, so very near the heart,
would cause serious, or even fatal symptoms; this, however, is not the
case, no serious inconvenience of this sort being experienced; yet
hitherto every case has proved fatal, either from secondary hæmorrhage
or inflammation of lungs and pleura.
In fifteen well-authenticated, and in three more doubtful cases, the
ligature has been applied; all of these died at periods varying from
twelve hours (as in Hutin's case), to forty-two days as in Thomson's,
and sixty-seven days (Graefe's).[11]
A successful case of ligature of the innominate along with the right
carotid and (after secondary hæmorrhage) the right vertebral, in a
mulatto aged thirty-two, for a subclavian aneurism, has been put on
record by Dr. Smyth of New Orleans, in the _American Journal of Medical
Science_ for July 1866.
And here we may also note that Mr. Heath has lately treated a case of
innominate aneurism by simultaneous ligature of the third part of the
subclavian and the carotid. Both ligatures separated on the eighteenth
day, and the tumour was much smaller some months afterwards.[12]
Mr. R. Barwell has reported several most interesting cases in which
simultaneous ligature of carotid and subclavian have proved of marked
benefit in aortic as well as in innominate aneurisms.[13]
In four cases the operation was attempted, but the operators had to
desist before the application of the ligature, in consequence of the
diseased state of the arterial coats. Of these, three died, and one
(Professor Porter's of Dublin) case recovered, the patient leaving the
hospital with the aneurism nearly consolidated.
Dr. Peixotto of Portugal applied a precautionary ligature to the
innominate in a case where secondary hæmorrhage occurred from the
carotid. The ligature was not tightened beyond what was necessary merely
to cause flattening of the vessel. The patient made a good recovery.
Professor George Porter of Dublin records an interesting case of
subclavian aneurism, in which, after failing to close the axillary
artery by acupressure, he applied L'Estrange's compressor to the
innominate itself for three days, with temporary benefit. The patient
eventually died of hæmorrhage.[14]
For a very full and interesting account of ligatures of vessels in root
of neck we may refer to vol. iii. of the 1883 edition of _Holmes'
Surgery_, pp. 119-122.
LIGATURE OF COMMON CAROTID.--Though the anatomical relations of the
right and left carotid are different at their origin, they so precisely
resemble each other in the whole of that part of their course which is
at all amenable to surgical treatment, that one description will suffice
for both, and the necessary anatomy will be brought out quite
sufficiently in the description of each operation.
From its giving off no collateral branches, the common carotid artery
may be tied at any part of its course.
It has been tied successfully at the distance of only three-quarters,
or, in one case by Porter, hardly to be imitated, one-eighth of an inch
from the innominate, and up to an equal distance from its bifurcation.
In choosing the part of the vessel for operation, the operator must be
guided by the position of the aneurism, if on the vessel itself, but if
the aneurism be distant, as in scalp or orbit, he need have regard to
position simply as facilitating the operation.
The easiest position in which to apply the ligature is just above the
omohyoid muscle, the vessel being there superficial.
LIGATURE ABOVE OMOHYOID.--Using the anterior border of the
sterno-mastoid as a guide, but leaving it gradually above to a little
nearer the mesial line, an incision (Plate IV. fig. 1), varying in
length according to the depth of fat and cellular tissue in the neck,
but with its central point opposite the upper border of the cricoid
cartilage, must be made through skin, platysma, and superficial fascia.
While making the incision the head should be held back, and the face
slightly turned to the opposite side; the parts being now relaxed by
position, the edges of the wound must be held apart by blunt hooks or
copper spatulæ, and the deep fascia carefully divided over the vessel,
which will be recognised by the pulsation. It may be noted here that
even in thin subjects the sterno-mastoid edge _invariably_ overlaps the
vessel, though in many anatomical diagrams it would appear to be in part
subcutaneous.
The descendens noni may possibly be seen, but this is by no means
invariably the case, crossing the sheath of the vessel very gradually
from without inwards in its progress down the neck. It must be carefully
displaced outwards.
The sheath of the vessel is then to be cautiously opened to the extent
of about half an inch. The internal jugular vein, possibly much
distended, may overlap the artery on its outer side, and will require to
be pressed, emptied, and held out of the way. A small portion of the
artery being thoroughly separated from the sheath, the aneurism-needle
must be passed from without inwards to avoid the vein, and keep as close
to the artery as possible to avoid the vagus.
The tendon of the omohyoid muscle, or, in muscular subjects, a portion
of its anterior fleshy belly, may be seen crossing the vessel from
above downwards and outwards at the lower angle of the wound.
An enlarged lymphatic gland has occasionally given much trouble, by
being mistaken for the vessel and cleaned, while the ligature has even
been placed on a carefully isolated fasciculus of muscular fibres.
LIGATURE OF CAROTID BELOW THE OMOHYOID.--An incision in precisely the
same direction as the former, but at a slightly lower level, is
required, but the dissection is rather more difficult. The edge of the
sterno-mastoid when exposed must be drawn outwards; the sterno-hyoid and
thyroid inwards; the omohyoid upwards; the sheath opened, and the
descendens noni or its branches drawn to the tracheal side. The jugular
vein and vagus are both at the outer side, and must be avoided, while
the inferior thyroid artery and sympathetic nerve both lie behind the
vessel, and may be included in the ligature if care be not taken.
VARIETIES.--_Sedillot's Operation._--To secure the artery still
lower in the neck: An incision two and a half inches long, from the
inner end of the clavicle obliquely upwards and outwards in the
interval between the sternal and clavicular attachments of the
sterno-mastoid; this divides the superficial textures; the two
portions of muscle must then be drawn apart. The internal jugular
vein lies in the interval, and must be drawn to the outside before
the artery can be seen at all, and it is this that makes this
operation very difficult and dangerous, especially on the left
side, where the vein is close to the artery, and probably even
crossing it from left to right. The thoracic duct is behind.
_Malgaigne's modification of the above_ is an improvement: to
expose the external attachment of the muscle, to cut it through and
turn it to the outside, as in the operation for ligature of the
innominate, then to divide or pull inwards sterno-hyoid and
sterno-thyroid, thus exposing the sheath. The needle must be passed
from without inwards.
_Results._--Pilz has collected 600 cases, of which 43.16 per cent. died.
The united tables of Norris and Wood give 188 cases, with a mortality of
sixty, or nearly one in three. These tables include cases in which the
vessel was tied for wounds, and as a preparatory step in the operation
of removal of tumours of the jaw, etc. Later statistics give a very much
lessened mortality, due chiefly to the use of animal ligatures.
Of thirty-one cases in which it was tied for pulsating tumours of the
orbit, only two died from the operation.[15] Rivington's statistics to a
later date give forty-six cases on forty-four patients with six deaths.
Both carotids have been tied in the same patient twenty-five times, at
intervals of less than a year; and it is a very remarkable fact that
only five of these fifty ligatures proved fatal,--two in which both were
tied on the same day, and three in which the operation was performed to
arrest hæmorrhage from malignant disease of the face and jaws--from
gunshot wound,--and from syphilitic ulceration.
The external carotid, and also most of its principal branches, have been
tied for aneurisms, wounds, goitres, enlargement of the tongue, vascular
tumours on occiput and other lesions; also as a first stage in the
operation of extirpation of the upper jaw, for the purpose of preventing
hæmorrhage. However, such operations are rare, and will probably become
rarer still, and it is hardly necessary to describe the operations on
each _seriatim_.
Aneurism of the external carotid or branches are rare; if idiopathic,
ligature of the common carotid will be found at once easier, not more
dangerous, and more effectual than ligature of the branch; if traumatic,
the aneurism itself should be attacked, and the bleeding point secured
by a double ligature. Wounds are common enough, but if accessible at
all, the injured vessel should be tied at the bleeding point; if
inaccessible (and under this head we may include wounds of the internal
carotid), the common carotid must be tied.
No one would think of trying the superior thyroids for goitre, unless
they were so manifestly enlarged, tortuous, and pulsating, as to render
the operation so simple (from their superficial position) as to require
no special directions; besides this, the cases in which it has been
already done have given very little encouragement to repeat it.
As cases may occur in which any diminution of the cerebral supply is
contra-indicated, and thus the more difficult ligature of the external
carotid may be preferred to the more simple operation on the common
trunk, and as the lingual may require ligature near its root, in
consequence of obstinate hæmorrhage from the tongue, short directions
are given for the performance of both these operations.
1. LIGATURE OF EXTERNAL CAROTID.--Head in same position as for the
common carotid. A straight incision parallel with the anterior edge of
sterno-mastoid, but about half an inch in front of it, must begin almost
at angle of jaw, and extend downwards nearly to the level of the thyroid
cartilage. Cautiously divide skin, platysma, and fascia; the lower end
of the parotid must be pulled upwards, and the veins, which are
numerous, cautiously separated. The anterior border of the
sterno-mastoid must be pulled backwards, and the digastric and
stylo-hyoid forwards and inwards. The superior laryngeal nerve which
lies behind the vessel must be avoided.
2. LIGATURE OF LINGUAL.--To secure this vessel either before it becomes
concealed by the hyo-glossus, or after it is under the muscle, a curved
incision is necessary, following the line of the hyoid bone, and
especially of its greater cornu, but a line or two above its upper
border. After the skin and platysma are divided, the posterior belly of
the digastric must be recognised, which again will guide to the
posterior edge of the hyo-glossus. The edge of the sub-maxillary gland
may very probably require to be raised out of the way. The artery can
then be secured, either before it dips under the hyo-glossus muscle, or
after it has done so, by the division of a few of its fibres on a
director. Care is needed to avoid injury of the hypo-glossal nerve,
which lies above the muscle.
The internal carotid artery occasionally, but very rarely, is the
subject of aneurism. It may, like any other artery, be wounded,
especially from the fauces. The treatment of either of these lesions is
ligature of the common carotid itself, in preference to ligature of the
internal carotid. Guthrie's operation for securing the bleeding internal
carotid at the injured spot, by dividing and turning up the ramus of the
lower jaw, has never been performed in the living body, and is so
difficult, dangerous, and unnecessary, as not to merit description.
LIGATURE OF SUBCLAVIAN.--_Note._--In consequence of the difference in
the origin, and variety in the anatomical relations of the right and
left subclavian arteries, in so far at least as their first stage is
concerned, it is necessary to give a very brief separate account of
each.
_Right Subclavian._--The innominate artery divides into the right
subclavian and right carotid exactly behind the sterno-clavicular
articulation. The right subclavian extends from this point in an arched
form across the neck, between the scalene muscles, over the apex of the
pleura, till, passing under cover of the clavicle, it changes its name
to axillary at the lower end of the first rib. For convenience of
description, the artery is divided into three parts, which have very
various anatomical relations, and differ from each other much in their
amenability to surgical treatment by ligature. The anterior scalenus
muscle defines the three parts, the first extending to the inner border
of the muscle, the second being concealed by the muscle, and the third
reaching from its outer border to the lower border of the first rib.
_Branches of the Subclavian._--While the deep relations of pleura,
veins, and nerves can be noticed under the head of each operation in
detail, one anatomical point must never be forgotten as influencing very
much the success of all surgical interference with the subclavian
arteries--_i.e._ the branches given off. To give any chance of success
in the application of a ligature to such a large vessel, so near the
heart, a large portion of artery free from branches is required, that
the clot may be long, firm, and undisturbed. The first part of the
subclavian gives off the vertebral, thyroid axis, and internal mammary;
the second, the superior intercostal; while the third part has in most
cases no branch whatever. In these anatomical differences we find the
reason for the almost invariable fatality resulting on any interference
with the first and second parts, and the comparative safety of ligature
of the third part, without requiring to account for the difference on
other grounds, such as depth of part, importance of nervous relations,
or nearer proximity to the heart.
The second and third parts of both arteries are so similar to each
other, that a separate account is not required for the two sides.
LIGATURE OF RIGHT SUBCLAVIAN.--_First Part._--_Operation._--An incision
just at upper edge of sternum and right clavicle, extending from inner
edge of _left_ sterno-mastoid transversely to outer border of right
sterno-mastoid through skin, platysma, and exposing sterno-mastoid, to
be joined at an angle by a second incision, which, two, three, or even
four inches long, must extend along inner border of right
sterno-mastoid. Flap to be raised upwards and outwards. The sternal
attachment of the sterno-mastoid must then be cautiously divided, as
also part or the whole of its clavicular attachment, according as room
is required. The sterno-hyoid and thyroid muscles will then require
similar division. The internal jugular will then be seen very
prominent,[16] and will require to be drawn inwards or outwards,
according to circumstances. The carotid and right subclavian arteries
will then be felt lying close together crossed by the pneumogastric and
recurrent nerves, the latter turning behind the subclavian. The nerves
must be drawn inwards; the cardiac filaments of the sympathetic will
then be observed, and drawn outwards. The subclavian vein lies below,
concealed by the clavicle, and will probably not be seen during the
operation. The needle should be passed round the artery from below
upwards, care being taken not to injure the pleura, which lies beneath
and behind the artery.
_Results._--Twelve cases, all of which died; ten of hæmorrhage, one of
pleurisy and pericarditis, and one from pyæmia. Attempted in one case by
Mr. Butcher, but the artery was too much diseased to bear a ligature.
The patient died on the fourth day.
LIGATURE OF LEFT SUBCLAVIAN.--_First Part._--This operation, which has
been described by some as impossible, has, I believe, been only once
performed on the living body. _Operation._--Incisions as for the
preceding operation, except being on the opposite side. After the skin,
platysma, and muscles have been divided, as already described, the deep
cervical fascia requires division close to the inner edge of the
scalenus anticus. The artery lies excessively deep, and great difficulty
is experienced in avoiding injury to the pleura and the thoracic duct.
_Results._--Once performed by Dr. Rodgers of New York; death from
hæmorrhage on fifteenth day.
_Anatomical Note._--The course of the left subclavian in its first stage
is much straighter, as its origin is much deeper, than on the right
side. The pneumogastric, phrenic, and cardiac nerves lie parallel to its
course; the oesophagus and thoracic duct lie behind it, and to its inner
side.
LIGATURE OF SUBCLAVIAN.--_Second Part._--This very rare operation hardly
requires a separate description, as the incisions necessary for ligature
of the artery in its third part will, with very slight modifications, be
sufficient for the purpose.
It has, however, special elements of danger in it, involved in the
unavoidable division, of part at least, or probably the whole, of the
scalenus anticus. The phrenic nerve, from its position on that muscle,
requires special care to avoid dividing it, and in most cases the
internal jugular vein is also in the way. The branches of the thyroid
axis, which cross the neck, are quite in the line of the incision. The
lowest cord of the brachial plexus lies immediately behind the artery,
between it and the middle scalenus. The pleura lies just below it. The
subclavian vein is generally quite safe, running in front of the
scalenus anticus, and at a lower level.
The presence of the superior intercostal branch adds greatly to the
danger of ligature of the vessel in this position, from its interfering
with a proper clot.
_Results._--Dupuytren[17] performed it successfully for a traumatic
axillary aneurism. Auchincloss[18] did it for a large true aneurism, but
the patient died sixty-eight and a half hours after the operation.
Liston cut through the outer portion of the scalenus with success for an
idiopathic aneurism. Thirteen have been collected by Wyeth with four
recoveries and nine deaths.
LIGATURE OF SUBCLAVIAN.--_Third Part._--For this comparatively common
operation, various methods of procedure have been suggested and
employed.
In the dead body, where the axilla is free from swelling, and in thin
patients, the artery in this third stage is tolerably superficial, and
can be secured with ease. But in very muscular men, with short necks and
well curved clavicles, and specially when the axilla is filled up with
an aneurism, and the shoulder cannot be depressed, the operation becomes
very difficult.
_Operation of Ramsden, Liston, and Syme._--_Position._--The patient
lying on his back with his shoulders supported by pillows, and his head
lying back, and drawn to the opposite side; the shoulder of the affected
side must be depressed as much as possible.
_Incisions._--(Plate I. fig. 8.)--One through skin, superficial fascia,
and platysma, along the upper edge of the clavicle, for at least three
inches from the anterior edge of the trapezius to the posterior border
of the sterno-mastoid, and in muscular subjects freely overlapping the
edges of both muscles. Another two inches in length along posterior
border of sterno-mastoid meets the first at an angle. On reflecting the
chief flap thus made upwards and backwards, the external jugular will be
seen, and, if possible, must be drawn to a side; if not, it must be
divided, and both ends tied. The lower edge of the posterior belly of
the omohyoid must then be sought; this leads at once to the posterior or
outer margin of the scalenus anticus. The connection of the deep fascia
to that muscle must then be very carefully scraped through, and by
tracing the muscle to its insertion to the first rib, the artery is at
once reached, lying behind the insertion. The pulsation of the vessel
between the forefinger and the first rib will prove a great assistance;
yet care is required, lest one of the branches of the brachial plexus be
secured instead of the artery. The lowest cord lies very close to the
vessel. The subclavian vein is not likely to give much trouble, from
its being on a lower level, and (unless very much dilated) nearly
concealed by the clavicle. The suprascapular artery is also hidden, but
the transverse cervical crosses the very line of incision, and may give
trouble, being occasionally much enlarged, so much so as even for a time
to have been mistaken for the subclavian itself. If possible, both these
branches should be saved, as being important means of carrying on the
anastomosis for the future support of the limb.
An absorbent gland is occasionally in the way, and has even been
mistaken for the vessel and carefully cleaned. Such may be removed
without scruple.
Care must be taken not to injure the pleura, which lies immediately
behind and below the vessel at the seat of ligature. Various
instrumental devices have been invented for passing the ligature. The
simplest seems still to be best, a common aneurism-needle with a
considerable curve.
_Other methods of operating._--A single curved incision above the
clavicle, with its concavity upwards, of about three or four inches
long, with its inner end rather higher than the outer (Green,
Fergusson).
A linear transverse incision in the same situation (Velpeau).
A single linear incision perpendicular to the clavicle (Roux).
An arched incision (Plate IV. fig. 2) with its convexity outwards,
and its base on the posterior edge of the sterno-mastoid, from
three inches above the clavicle to the clavicular attachment of the
muscle (Skey).
_Results._--Dr. Wyeth's Tables in 1877 give 251 cases with 134 or 53 per
cent. of deaths.
The late Mr. Furner of Brighton reported a most interesting case,
in which he tied both subclavian arteries at an interval of two
years in the same patient, for axillary aneurisms, with success.
LIGATURE OF AXILLARY.--_Anatomical Note._--This vessel, the next stage
in the continuation of the subclavian downwards, may be defined
surgically as extending from the clavicle to the lower border of the
teres major. From the depth of the vessel at its upper part, the
numerous nerves, and the close proximity of the vein, the surgeon has
carefully to study the anatomical relations. It, like the subclavian, is
commonly divided into three stages, and, also like the subclavian, these
stages are defined by the relations of the artery to a muscle, the
pectoralis minor. Surgically we may draw a very close parallel between
the two vessels, for we find that in the axillary, as in the subclavian,
the first stage is very deep, and very rarely amenable to ligature; the
second, still deeper and more rarely attempted, as in both the operation
involves division of a deep muscle; while the third stage in each is the
one most frequently chosen by the surgeon.
_First Stage._--Between the lower edge of the first rib and upper border
of the pectoralis minor the vessel is deeply seated, contained in that
process of deep fascia called the costo-coracoid membrane, and covered
above by skin, platysma, and the clavicular portion of the pectoralis
major. It lies on the first intercostal muscle and the upper digitation
of the serratus magnus, while the cords of the brachial plexus are on
its acromial side, and the axillary vein in close contact with it on its
thoracic side, and frequently overlapping the artery.
_Operation._--The great desideratum is free access. An incision (Plate
I. fig. 9), semilunar in shape, with its convexity downwards, must
extend from half an inch outside of the sterno-clavicular articulation
to very near the coracoid process, stopping just before it arrives at
the edge of the deltoid, in order to avoid injury of the cephalic vein.
It must include skin, fascia, and platysma, and the flap must be thrown
upwards. The clavicular portion of the pectoralis major must then be
divided right across its fibres, which will retract. The arm must then
be brought close to the side to relax the pectoralis minor, which must
be drawn aside. The artery will then be felt pulsating, but hidden by
the costo-coracoid membrane, which acts as its sheath. This must be
carefully scratched through, the nerves pulled outwards, the vein
avoided and pulled downwards and inwards, and the thread passed round
from within outwards. (Manec, Hodgson, and, with slight modification in
the incision through the skin, Chamberlaine.)
Ligature has been performed in this position by separating the
pectoralis and deltoid muscles, without dividing the muscular
fibres (Roux, Desault).
To attempt to gain access between the clavicular and sternal
portions of pectoralis major, as has been proposed by some, is
almost impracticable in the living body, from the position of the
vein, to which, rather than to the artery, this incision leads.
LIGATURE OF AXILLARY, _in its second stage_, is not an advisable
operation, when it is merely intended to throw a ligature round the
artery for an aneurism lower down.
It has been performed at least twice by Delpech, but it is a rude
procedure; in his cases, after the muscle was cut, a dive with the
finger was made to collect the whole mass of vessels and nerves, and
bring them to the surface near the collar-bone; in this position it is
said the artery was easily isolated and tied.
In Mr. Syme's operation of cutting into large axillary aneurisms, and
tying both ends of the vessel, the pectoralis minor may, indeed
generally has, to be divided, and must take its chance without any
special notice or precaution, in the sweeping, free incisions required.
LIGATURE OF AXILLARY _in its third stage_.--This is an operation very
much more common, more easy of accomplishment, and safer in its results
than either of the preceding; the artery in this stage being more
superficial, in fact almost subcutaneous.
_Operation._--The arm being extended and supinated, an incision (Plate
I. fig. 10) two and a half or three inches long, must be made in the
base of the axilla over the artery, involving at first skin and
superficial fascia only; the deep fascia is then exposed and must be
carefully scraped through, avoiding injury of the basilic vein, if (as
sometimes occurs) it has not yet dipped through the fascia. The vessel
can now be felt; the median nerve which lies over the artery, or
slightly to its outer side, must be drawn outwards, and the axillary
vein, which lies at the thoracic side, but often overlaps the vessel,
must be carefully drawn inwards. The ligature must then be passed from
within outwards.
When the patient is very fat or muscular, the coraco-brachialis muscle
may be required as a guide to the vessel; but in general its superficial
position renders any guide quite unnecessary, even in the dead body.
_Anatomical Note._--While in each stage the axillary artery gives off
branches, those arising from the third stage are by far the most
important, especially the subscapular, which leaves it at the edge of
the muscle of the same name. To avoid these the ligature should be
applied as low down on the vessel as possible, and, in point of fact,
the operation called ligature of the third stage of the axillary is,
anatomically speaking, really ligature of the brachial high up, and
where there is room at all, there will be the less chance of secondary
hæmorrhage, the greater the distance is between the ligature and the
great subscapular branch.
_Mr. Syme's Operation for Axillary Aneurism._--Description of the
operation in his own words:--
"Chloroform being administered, I made an incision along the outer edge
of the sterno-mastoid muscle, through the platysma myoides and fascia of
the neck, so as to allow a finger to be pushed down to the situation
where the subclavian artery issues from under the scalenus anticus and
lies upon the first rib. I then opened the tumour, when a tremendous
gush of blood showed that the artery was not effectually compressed;
but while I plugged the aperture with my hand, Mr. Lister, who assisted
me, by a slight movement of his finger, which had been thrust deeply
under the upper edge of the tumour, and through the clots contained in
it, at length succeeded in getting command of the vessel. I then laid
the cavity freely open, and with both hands scooped out nearly seven
pounds of coagulated blood, as was ascertained by measurement. The
axillary artery appeared to have been torn across, and as the lower
orifice still bled freely, I tied it in the first instance. I next cut
through the lessor pectoral muscle close up to the clavicle, and holding
the upper end of the vessel between my finger and thumb, passed an
aneurism-needle, so as to apply a ligature about half an inch above the
orifice."[19]
In a similar operation lately performed by the author for traumatic
aneurism, the result of a stab, very little blood was lost, though no
incision was made above the clavicle. The patient made a good
recovery.[20]
LIGATURE OF BRACHIAL.--To arrest hæmorrhage from a wound of the artery
itself, no special directions are required, except to enlarge the wound,
and secure the vessel above and below the bleeding point. There are,
however, rare cases in which for bleeding in the palm (after all other
means have failed), or for aneurism lower down the arm, a ligature may
be necessary.
_Operation._--The biceps muscle, at its inner edge, is the best guide to
the position of the incision, or if it be obscured by fat or oedema, a
line extending from the axilla, just over the head of the humerus to the
middle of the bend of the elbow will define its course. An incision
(Plate I., fig. 11) three inches in length, about the middle of the arm
(when you have the choice of position), through skin and superficial
fascia, will expose the deep fascia, and probably the basilic vein.
Drawing the latter aside, cautiously divide the deep fascia. The artery
is then exposed, but in close relation to various nerves; of these the
ones most likely to come in the way are--1. The median, which lies in
front of, but a little to the outside of the artery, though in some rare
cases it lies behind it; 2. The internal cutaneous; 3. The ulnar, both
of which ought to be rather to the inside of the artery. Two brachial
veins accompany and wind round the vessel, occasionally interlacing.
Pulsation will, in the living body, usually suffice to distinguish the
artery from the other textures, and the ligature may be passed from
whichever side is most convenient.
_Note._--The relation of the median nerve to the vessel varies
according to the part of the arm--thus, as low as the insertion of
the coraco-brachialis it is to the outer side, as has been
described, it then crosses the vessel obliquely, and two inches
above the elbow it is on the inner side of the artery. Again, the
operator must never forget the possibility of there being a high
division of the artery. This occurs, Mr. Quain has shown, perhaps
once in every ten or eleven cases, and may necessitate ligature of
both trunks.
In those cases (once much more frequent than at present) where an
aneurism has formed after a wound of the brachial at the bend of the arm
in venesection, the aneurism may be either circumscribed or diffuse.
If circumscribed, it is advised by some surgeons, specially by the late
Professor Colles of Dublin, that the brachial should be tied immediately
above the tumour. In most cases of circumscribed, and in all such cases
of diffuse aneurism, the preferable operation is boldly to lay open the
tumour, turn out all the clots, seek for the wound in the artery, and
tie the vessel above and below. A tourniquet above, or, better still, a
trustworthy assistant, prevents all fear of hæmorrhage, and such a
radical operation exposes the limb to far less chance of gangrene than
do any attempts at removing or lessening the tumour by pressure (as
recommended by Cusack, Tyrrell, Harrison), and is much more certain
than a mere ligature above.[21]
LIGATURE OF VESSELS IN FORE-ARM.--Here, as also we found is the case in
the leg, it is almost useless to go on giving exact directions as to the
method of throwing a ligature round the vessels in all possible
situations.
For below the elbow spontaneous aneurism is almost unknown, and even
traumatic aneurisms are extremely rare. It is therefore for hæmorrhage
only that the vessels are likely to require ligature, and it is a rule
in surgery that to enlarge the wound and to apply a ligature above and
below the bleeding point is better practice than to apply a ligature at
a distance.
In the case of wounds of the palmar arch, it is extremely difficult, and
very apt to injure the future usefulness of the hand, thus to seek for
the bleeding point under the palmar fascia, and for _these_, ligatures
of radial and ulnar have occasionally been practised. However, as even
this has proved ineffectual, and the interosseous has proved sufficient
to continue the bleeding, ligature of the brachial at once is preferable
to ligature of so many branches in the fore-arm.
The use of graduated compresses, carefully applied, combined with
flexion of the elbow over a bandage, will generally prove sufficient to
check such hæmorrhage from the palm, without having recourse to either
of the above more severe measures.
_Note._--As in the lower limb at page 24, and for the same reasons,
I here insert a brief account of the methods of tying the ulnar and
radial arteries.
1. LIGATURE OF ULNAR.--Only admissible in the lower half of its
course. _Operation._--Use the tendon of the flexor carpi ulnaris as
a guide, and make an incision along its radial edge, at least two
inches in length; expose the deep fascia of the arm and then
cautiously divide it; then bending the hand, the flexor carpi
ulnaris is relaxed, and the artery is found lying pretty deeply
between it and the flexor sublimis digitorum. The ulnar nerve lies
at its ulnar side, and the venæ comites accompany the artery. In a
tolerably muscular arm, the incision will have to be about an inch
inside of the ulnar border of the limb.
2. RADIAL.--This artery lies more superficial than the preceding,
and may be tied at any part of its course.
_A._ Operation in upper part of fore-arm. Here the artery lies in
the interval between the supinator longus and the pronator radii
teres. In a muscular arm, the edge of the former muscle is the best
guide; in a fat one, the incision may be made in a line extending
from the centre of the bend of the arm to the inner edge of the
styloid process of the radius. The deep fascia must be exposed and
opened, and the muscles relaxed and held aside. The radial nerve
lies on the radial side of the vessel.
_B._ Operation in lower half of arm. Here the vessel is more
superficial, lying in the groove between the flexor carpi radialis
and supinator longus. An incision two inches in length, and
parallel with these tendons, easily exposes the artery. The nerve
is still on its radial side.
_C._ Operation at first metacarpal. The artery may be tied easily
enough in the triangular space bounded by the extensors of the
thumb, on the dorsum of the proximal end of the first metacarpal
bone. Skey[22] recommends a transverse,--Stephen Smith[23] and
others, a longitudinal incision. The author had lately to secure
the radial in its lower third, the superficialis volæ, and the
radial again in the triangular space, in a case where division of
the artery by a transverse cut had caused a large aneurism to form
close above the annular ligament.
TABLE illustrating anastomotic circulation after ligature of
arteries of neck and upper limb.
1. Common carotid.
(_a_) Across middle line: thyroids, linguals, facials, occipitals;
also terminal branches of external carotids; also internal carotids
by circle of Willis.
(_b_) Of same side: occipital with vertebral; superior thyroid with
inferior thyroid, etc.
2. Subclavian, 3d part.
Suprascapular with dorsal branches of subscapular; posterior
scapular with costal and muscular branches of subscapular. Thoracic
anastomosis between internal mammary and intercostals, with
branches of axillary.
3. Axillary and brachial. Anastomosis varies with the position of
the ligature, but is very free between the various muscular
branches of these vessels.
FOOTNOTES:
[2] Erichsen, _Surgery_. Sixth edition, vol. ii. p. 121.
[3] The line 3 in Plate I. shows the direction required. It
will not be necessary to carry the incision so far up for the external
as for the common iliac.
[4] _On the Arteries and Veins_, p. 421.
[5] _Cyclopædia of Practical Surgery_, vol. i. p. 277.
[6] John Bell's _Prin. of Surg._, vol. i. 421; _Dublin Jour._,
vol. iv. 321.
[7] _Observations in Clinical Surgery_, Syme, pp. 171-3.
[8] _Brit. Med. Jour._ 1867, Oct. 5.
[9] _International Encyclopædia of Surgery_, vol. iii. p. 466.
[10] Poland, _Guy's Hosp. Report_, ser. iii. vol. vi.
[11] Mr. W. Thomson's most interesting paper on this subject is
full of information down to the latest date.
[12] _Lancet_, Jan. 5, 1867.
[13] _Lancet_, May 1879.
[14] _Dublin Quarterly Journal_, Nov. 1867.
[15] W. Zehender--Monatsbl. für Augenheilkunde. 1868.
[16] Butcher, _Op. and Cons. Surgery_, p. 861.
[17] _Leçons Orales_, iv. 530.
[18] _Ed. Med. and Surg. Journ._ vol. xlv.
[19] _Observations in Clinical Surgery_, pp. 148, 149.
[20] _Edin. Med. Journal_, March 1879.
[21] See case of recurrence, Fergusson's _Practical Surgery_
1st ed. p. 222.
[22] _Operative Surgery_, p. 279.
[23] _Surgical Operations_, p. 50.
CHAPTER II.
AMPUTATIONS.
In ordinary surgical language the name Amputation is applied to all
cases of removal of limbs, or portions of limbs, by the knife, though in
strict accuracy it should be restricted to those cases in which a limb
is removed _in the continuity of a bone_, its removal _at a joint_ being
called a Disarticulation.
The briefest outline of a history of amputation would fill a work much
larger than the present. I may be allowed in a few sentences to attempt
to show the principle on which such a sketch should be written, in
describing the three great eras of progress in improvement of the
methods of amputating.[24]
I. Prior to the invention, or at least prior to the general
introduction, of the ligature and the tourniquet, the great barrier to
all improvement in operating was the impossibility of checking
hæmorrhage during an operation, and after its conclusion. Many surgeons
would not amputate at all, others only through gangrenous parts; others
more bold, only at the confines of parts in which gangrene had been
artificially induced by tight ligatures.
With the exception of Celsus, who in one place recommends a flap to be
dissected up, and the bone thus divided at a higher level, all were in
too great a hurry to get the operation completed to think of flaps. Cut
through all the parts at the same level with a red-hot knife, if you
will, like Fabricius Hildanus; by a single blow with a chisel and
mallet, like Scultetus; or by a crushing guillotine, like Purmannus: or
by two butchers' chopping-knives fixed in heavy blocks of wood, one
fixed, the other falling in a grove, like Botal; and then try to check
the bleeding by tying a pig's bladder over the face of the stump, like
Hans de Gersdorf; or tying it up in the inside of a hen newly killed; or
by plunging it at once into boiling pitch.
We are the less surprised to read of Celsus's description of a flap
operation, when we remember that it is almost certain that Celsus _was_
acquainted with the ligature as a means of checking hæmorrhage.[25]
II. A new era was ushered in when, about 1560, Ambrose Paré invented, or
re-introduced, the ligature as a means of arresting hæmorrhage, but not
for more than a century after this did the full benefit of his discovery
begin to be felt, when the tourniquet was introduced by Morel at
Besançon in 1674, and James Young of Plymouth in 1678, and improved by
Petit in 1708-10.
_Now_ surgeons had time to look about them during an amputation, and to
try to get a good covering for the bone, so that the stump might heal
more rapidly and bear pressure better. Great improvements were rapidly
made, and any history of these improvements would need to trace two
great parallel lines, one the circular method, the other the flap
operation.
1. The old method in which the limb was lopped off by one sweep, all the
tissues being divided at the same level, might be called the true
circular. This, however, was soon improved--
_A._ By Cheselden and Petit, who invented the double circular incision,
in which first the skin and fat were cut and retracted, and then the
muscle and bone were divided as high as exposed.
_B._ By Louis, who improved this by making the first incision include
the muscles also, the bone alone being divided at the higher level.
_C._ By Mynors of Birmingham, who dissected the skin back like the
sleeve of a coat, and thus gained more covering.
_D._ Then comes the great improvement of Alanson, who first cut through
skin and fat, and allowing them to retract, next exposed the bone still
further up by cutting the muscles obliquely so as to leave the cut end
of the bone in the apex of a conical cavity.
_E._ An easier mode, fulfilling the same indications, is found in the
triple incision of Benjamin Bell of Edinburgh, who in 1792 taught that
first the skin and fat should be divided and retracted, next the
muscles, and lastly the bone.
_F._ A slight improvement on _E_, made by Hey of Leeds, who advised that
the posterior muscles of the limb should be divided at a lower level
than the anterior, to compensate for their greater range of contraction.
2. In the progress of the flap operation fewer stages can be defined.
Made by cutting from within outwards, after transfixion of the limb, the
flaps varied in shape, size, position, and numbers, from the single
posterior one of Verduyn of Amsterdam, to the two equal lateral ones of
Vermale, and the equal anterior and posterior ones of the Edinburgh
school.
Then came the battle of the schools: flap or circular.
_Flap._--Speedy, easy, and less painful; apt to retract, and that
unequally.
_Circular._--Leaving a smaller wound, but more slow in performance, and
apt to leave a central adherent cicatrix.
3. The last era in amputation began after the introduction of
anæsthetics. Now speed in amputation is no object, and the surgeon has
full time to shape and carve his flaps into the curves most suited for
accurate apposition, and suitable relation of the cicatrix to the bone.
It has also been brought clearly out that different methods of operating
are suitable for different positions, and also that even in the same
operation it is possible to unite the advantages of both the flap and
the circular method.
In the modified circular, which is best suited for amputation below the
knee, in the long anterior flaps of Teale, Spence, and Carden, we have
illustrations of the manner in which the advantages of both the flap and
circular methods have been secured, without the disadvantages of either.
The long anterior flap, not like Teale's to fold upon itself, but like
Spence's and Carden's to hang over and shield the end of the bones, and
the face of a transversely-cut short posterior flap, seems to be now the
typical method for successful amputations. There may be exceptions, as
when the anterior skin is more injured than the posterior, or where an
anterior flap would demand too great sacrifice of length of limb, but as
a rule it will be found the best method for the patient.
AMPUTATION OF THE UPPER EXTREMITY.--The extreme importance of the human
hand, its tactile sensibility, its grasping power, and the irreparable
loss sustained by its removal, render the greatest caution necessary,
lest we should remove a single digit or portion of one that might be
saved. In cases of severe smashing injuries involving the fingers, it is
the surgeon's bounden duty not recklessly to amputate the limb with neat
flaps at the wrist-joint, but carefully to endeavour to save even a
single finger from the wreck, though at the risk of a longer
convalescence, or even of a profuse suppuration. While a toe or two, or
a small longitudinal segment of the foot, may be comparatively useless,
and a good artificial foot, with an ankle-joint stump, certainly
preferable, a single finger, provided its motions are tolerably intact,
will prove much more valuable to its possessor than the most ingeniously
contrived artificial hand.
[Illustration: FIG. I.]
However, while in cases of extensive smash we endeavour to save anything
we can, the case is very much altered when it is only one or two fingers
that are injured. Here we find another principle brought into play, and
our conservative surgery must be limited by the following consideration.
In endeavouring to save a portion of the injured finger or fingers, will
the saved portion interfere with the important movements of the
uninjured ones? These two principles--1. Generally to save as much as we
can; 2. Not to save anything which may be detrimental or in the
way,--will guide us in describing the amputations of the upper
extremity.
[Illustration: FIG. II.]
_Amputation of a distal phalanx._--This small operation is not very
often required. In cases of whitlow in which the distal phalanx alone
has necrosed, removal of the necrosed bone by forceps is generally all
that is necessary. In cases of injury, however, in which nail and distal
phalanx are both reduced to pulp, it will hasten recovery much to remove
the extremity. There is no choice as to flap, the nail preventing an
anterior one, so a flap long enough to fold over must be cut from the
pulp of the finger in either of two ways (Fig. I. 1):--1. Holding the
fragment to be removed in the left hand, and bending the joint, the
surgeon makes a transverse cut across the back of the finger, right into
and through the joint, cutting a long palmar flap from within outwards
as he withdraws the knife.
_Note._--Some difficulty is often felt in making the dorsal
incision so as exactly and at once to hit the joint; the most
common mistake being, that the transverse incision is made too
high, and the knife, instead of striking the joint, only saws
fruitlessly at the neck of the bone above. To avoid this, the
surgeon should take as a guide to the joint, not the well-marked
and tempting-looking _dorsal_ fold in the skin, but the _palmar_
one, which exactly corresponds with the joint between the proximal
and middle phalanges, and is only about a line above the distal
articulation.--(Fig. II.)
2. Making the long flap by transfixion, it may be held back by an
assistant, and the joint cut into.
_Amputation through the second phalanx._--If the distal phalanx be so
much crushed that a flap cannot be obtained, two short semilunar lateral
flaps may be dissected (Fig. I. 2) from the sides of the second phalanx,
which may then be divided by the bone-pliers at the spot required.
In cases of injury which do not admit of either of the preceding
operations, it is quite possible to amputate either at the first joint,
or even through the proximal phalanx. Patients are sometimes anxious for
such operations in preference to amputation of the whole finger. The
surgeon should, however, never amputate through a finger higher up than
the distal end of the second phalanx, unless absolutely compelled by the
patient, for the resulting stump, being no longer commanded by the
tendons, will prove merely an incumbrance, and may possibly require a
secondary operation at no distant date for its removal.
This rule is applicable in cases in which a single finger is injured,
and two or three complete ones are left; in cases where all the fingers
have been mutilated every morsel should be left, and may be of use.
_Amputation of a whole finger._--(Fig. I. 3)--This is an operation of
great importance, from its frequency.
If the third or fourth digits require amputation, it should be performed
as follows:--The vessels of the arm being commanded, an assistant holds
the hand, separating the fingers at each side of the one to be removed.
The surgeon holding the finger to be removed, enters the point of a long
straight bistoury exactly (some authorities say half an inch) above the
metacarpo-phalangeal joint, and cuts from the prominence of the knuckle
right into the angle of the web, then, turning inwards there, cuts
obliquely into the palm to a point nearly opposite the one at which he
set out.
_Note._--While most authorities agree with the direction in the
text regarding the palmar termination of the incision, I believe,
in most cases, it is not necessary to go so far, and that the
incisions may fitly meet in the palm at a point midway between a
point opposite to the knuckle, and the centre of the well-marked
"sulcus of flexion."
He then repeats this incision on the other side, makes tense the
ligaments, first at one side and then at the other, by drawing the
finger to the opposite side, and cuts them. The tendons being cut, the
finger is detached. The vessels being tied, one point of suture is put
in on the dorsal aspect, and the fingers on each side tied together at
their extremities, with a pad of lint between them.
_Modification._--Lisfranc's method is too long in its minute
description to give in detail. The principle is to make a semilunar
flap at one side (the one opposite the operator's right hand), by
cutting from without inwards, then to open the joint from this cut,
and, still keeping the edge of the knife close to the head of the
phalanx, cutting the other flap from within outwards. This can be
very rapidly done, but the last flap is apt to be irregular and
deficient, especially in those common cases, in which, after
whitlow or the like, the tissues are hard and brawny, and the skin
does not play freely.
It is quite unnecessary to remove the head of the metacarpal, either for
the sake of appearance, or to render healing more rapid, and its removal
weakens the arch of the hand; where the cartilage is eroded by disease,
the cartilage-covered portion can be scooped off by a gouge or removed
entire by pliers, without interfering with the broad end to which the
transverse ligament of the palm is attached. If required either for
injury or disease, the metacarpal head may be easily removed by a single
straight incision from the knuckle upwards, as far as the point at which
it may be deemed necessary to saw it through, or better still, divide it
with the bone-pliers. This incision should be made as a first step in
the first incision for amputation of the finger, and the finger should
not be disarticulated, but kept on, to aid by its leverage in separating
the metacarpal head.
_Amputation of the index or little fingers._--This operation differs
from the preceding only in this, that care must be taken to make a good
large flap on the free side of each; making the incision, which begins
at the knuckle (Fig. I. 4), enclose a well-rounded flap, and not
allowing it to enter the palm till it reaches the level of the web
between the fingers. The metacarpal heads may here be cut obliquely with
the bone-pliers, to prevent undue projection.
_Amputation of one or more metacarpals._--These operations may be
rendered necessary by disease or injury. If the latter demands their
performance, no rules can be given for incisions or flaps, they must
just be obtained where and how they can best be got. If for disease, a
single dorsal incision (Fig. I. 5) over the bone will allow it to be
dissected out of the hand.
_N.B._--In no case, except that of the thumb, should any attempt be
made to save a finger while its metacarpal is removed. (See _Excisions
of Bones_.)
_Amputation of first and fifth metacarpals._--Various special operations
have been devised for speedy and elegant removal of these bones. Their
disadvantages, etc., are fully detailed under _Amputations of the Foot_.
The vascularity and consequent vitality of the tissues of the hand and
arm sometimes afford very encouraging and satisfactory results in
conservative operations.
The following is an instance of what may be accomplished in a young
healthy subject.
A. A., æt. 18, ploughman, was harnessing a vicious horse, when it caught
his right hand between its teeth, and gave a severe bite. On admission,
I found the middle and ring fingers completely separated at the
metacarpal joints, but each hanging on by a portion of skin, the middle
by the skin on its radial side, the ring by that on its ulnar. The back
and the palm were both stripped of skin up to the middle of the third
and fourth metacarpal bones, which were exposed, but not fractured. As
it was important for him to maintain the transverse arch of the hand
intact, I determined to make an attempt to save the metacarpals, and
finding that the skin on the radial side of the middle, and ulnar side
of the ring fingers, was still warm, and apparently alive, I carefully
dissected as long a flap as possible from each, and then folded them
down, one at the front, the other at the back of the hand. The flaps
survived, and the result was admirable, the patient being able in a very
few weeks to guide the plough. The sensation in his new palm and back of
the hand is very peculiar, they being still the fingers, so far as
nervous supply is concerned.
In amputations involving the metacarpals for injury, it is always
important to avoid entering the carpo-metacarpal joint, hence if it can
be done it is best to saw through the bones at the required level,
rather than disarticulate. This rule should be observed even in those
cases in which the thumb alone can be saved, for notwithstanding the
isolation of the joint between the first metacarpal and the trapezium,
it is very important for the future use of this one digit that the
motions both of the wrist and carpal joints should be preserved entire.
No exact rules can be given for the performance of these operations, as
the size and positions of the flaps must be determined by the nature of
the accident and the amount of skin left uninjured.
In the rare condition where the greater part of the metacarpus is
destroyed, and yet carpal joints are uninjured, a most useful artificial
band, preserving the movements of the wrist, may be fitted on; and as
much as possible should be saved, but in cases of injury, where the
carpus is opened and the hand irreparably destroyed, the question
arises, Where ought amputation to be performed? To this we answer that
there appears no conceivable advantage to be gained by leaving all or
any of the carpal bones. If successful, it would result only in the
retention of a flapping joint, unless from there being no tendons to act
upon it, except the tendon of the flexor carpi ulnaris attached to the
pisiform, and there are several risks it would run in the inflammation
of all the carpal joints, and the almost certain spread of this
inflammation to the bursa underneath the flexor tendons, beyond the
annular ligament, and up the arm among the muscles.
AMPUTATION AT THE WRIST-JOINT.--This is an operation by no means
frequent, and it has the advantages of preserving a long stump, and
retaining the full movements of pronation and supination, in cases where
the radio-ulnar joint is sound and uninjured, but in practice it is
often found that fibrous adhesions limit to a great extent the motions
of the two bones on each other, specially in those cases where the
radio-ulnar joint has been diseased or injured.
Another advantage is the extreme ease with which disarticulation may be
performed on emergency, no saw being required, and the ordinary bistoury
of the pocket-case being quite sufficient for cutting the flaps.
_Operation._--By double flap. An incision (Plate IV. fig. 3) on the
dorsal surface, extending in a semilunar direction from one styloid
process to the other, will define a flap of skin only, which must be
raised; the joint must then be opened by a transverse incision, and a
long semilunar flap of skin and fascia should be shaped (Plate IV. fig.
4) from the palm. Disarticulation is facilitated by the surgeon forcibly
bending the wrist when he makes the transverse cut, and it will be found
easier to shape the palmar flap from the outside by dissection, than to
do it by transfixion after disarticulation, on account of the prominence
of the pisiform on the inner side of the palm.
In the thin wasted wrists of the aged, or in any case where the
skin is very lax, this amputation may be very easily performed by
the circular method. While an assistant draws up the skin as much
as possible, the surgeon makes an accurate circular incision
through the skin, about an inch below the styloid processes, just
grazing the thenar and hypothenar eminences. Another circular sweep
just above the pisiform and unciform bones divides all the soft
textures, after which the joint may be opened, and, if necessary,
the styloid processes cut away with saw or pliers.
Amputation by a long single flap, either dorsal or palmar, may be
rendered necessary by accident. The palmar one of the two is
preferable; indeed, rather than trust for a covering to the thin
skin of the back of the hand, with its numerous tendons, it is
better to amputate an inch or two higher up through the fore arm.
The following amputation by external flap has been described (so
far as I can discover, for the first time) by Dr. Dubrueil, in his
work on operative Surgery:[26]--"Commencing just below the level of
the articulation, while the hand is pronated, the surgeon makes a
convex incision, beginning at the junction of the outer and middle
thirds of the arm behind, reaching at its summit the middle of the
dorsal surface of the first metacarpal, and terminating in front
just below the palmar surface of the joint, again at the junction
of the outer and middle thirds of the breadth of the arm. This flap
being raised, the wrist is disarticulated, beginning at the radial
side. A circular incision finishes the cutting of the skin." (Figs.
III. and IV.)
[Illustration: FIG. III.[27]]
[Illustration: FIG. IV.[27]]
AMPUTATION THROUGH THE FORE-ARM.--The method of operating must, in the
fore-arm, depend a good deal upon the part of the arm where you require
to amputate, the muscularity of the limb, and the condition of the skin
and subcutaneous cellular tissue.
It must be remembered that a section of the fore-arm involves two bones,
not, like the tibia and fibula, on a constant permanent relation in
position to each other, but which rotate one upon another to an amount
which varies with the part of the limb divided, and which rotation is a
very important element in the future usefulness of the stump; again,
that two sets of muscles occupy, one the back, the other the front of
the limb, that these two are unequal in size, and that the outer sides
or rather edges of each bone are subcutaneous; again, that these sets of
muscles are comparatively fleshy in the upper two-thirds of the limb,
and almost entirely tendinous in the lower third.
Remembering these points, we find that certain things require our
attention, and certain difficulties are present in amputation of the
fore-arm, from which amputation of the arm, with its single bone and
copious muscular covering on all sides, is completely free.
Thus our flaps in the fore-arm must be antero-posterior; lateral flaps
are an impossibility. Great care is requisite to cut them at all equal,
from the inequality of the muscles on the two sides. In the lower third
we cannot obtain available muscular flaps. Lastly, care must be taken
lest, from the ever-varying relations of the two bones to each other in
the varying positions of the limb, the surgeon mistake their position
and pass his knife between them.
The next question that arises is, Where are we to operate? In cases
where we have a choice, is there here, as in the leg, any "point of
election"? _No._ As a rule in the fore-arm, the surgeon should endeavour
to save as much as possible; especially when nearing the middle of the
fore-arm, he should try to save the insertion of the pronator teres, so
important in its function of pronating the radius.
AMPUTATION IN LOWER THIRD OF THE FORE-ARM.--By two flaps. These
antero-posterior flaps must consist of skin only, as the tendons are
only in the way, and thus should be made by dissection from without.[28]
Making the dorsal one first, the surgeon should enter his knife at the
palmar edge of the bone that is further from him, and cut a semilunar
flap of skin only, finishing the incision quite on the palmar edge of
the inner bone. The two ends of this incision must then be united by a
similar semilunar flap of skin on the palmar side. The two flaps having
been dissected back, he then clears the bones by a circular incision
through tendons and muscles, not forgetting to pass the knife between
the bones, and retracting all the soft parts, saws through the bones, at
least half or probably three-quarters of an inch higher up. It is
generally easiest to saw through both bones at once.
_Long Dorsal Flap._--Where it is possible from laxity of the soft parts
and the wrist not being much destroyed, to get a long flap from the back
of the arm after Mr. Teale's method, a very good stump will result. This
rule is, "In tracing the long flap a longitudinal line is drawn over the
radius, so as to leave the radial vessels for the short flap (Plate II.
fig. 1). At a distance equal to half the circumference of the limb,
another line parallel to the former is drawn along the ulna. These are
then joined at their lower ends, across the dorsal aspect of the wrist
or fore-arm, by a transverse line equal in length to half the
circumference of the fore-arm. The short flap is marked by a transverse
line on the palmar aspect, uniting the long ones at their upper fourth.
"The operator, in forming the long flap, makes the two longitudinal
incisions merely through the integuments, but the transverse one is
carried directly down to the bones. In dissecting the long flap from
below upwards, the tissues of which it is composed must be separated
close to the periosteum and interosseous membrane. The short flap is
made by a transverse incision through all the structures down to the
bones, care being taken to separate the parts upwards close to the
periosteum and membrane." The stump must be placed in the prone
position, "to allow the long dorsal flap to be the superior when the
patient is recumbent, and thus fall over the ends of the bones."[29]
The principal objection to the long dorsal rectangular flap (which
makes an excellent covering) is, that unless it can be obtained from
over the wrist-joint it requires the bones to be sawn so very high up.
This may be avoided, to some extent, by making it shorter and rounded
off, as in Carden's Amputation, _q.v._
AMPUTATION IN UPPER TWO-THIRDS.--Where the fore-arm is very fat or
fleshy, this amputation can be very easily performed by two equal
antero-posterior flaps made by transfixion. In most cases, however, from
the comparative leanness of the dorsal aspect of the limb, the following
method will have the best result. The surgeon must, as in the former
case, shape a rounded dorsal flap by dissection from without (Plate IV.
fig. 5), embracing the whole breadth of the limb down to the palmar edge
of both bones. Then at once he transfixes the two points of this dorsal
flap, and cuts out an equal one from the anterior aspect of the limb
(Plate IV. fig. 6). Dissecting up the dorsal flap he clears the bones at
least half an inch above as before, and applies the saw.
_N.B._--This operation should be performed even in cases where only an
inch of radius can be retained, as the attachment of the biceps makes a
very small stump of fore-arm wonderfully useful.
AMPUTATION AT ELBOW-JOINT.--In cases where it is found impossible to
save any portion of the fore-arm, disarticulation at the elbow-joint may
be easily performed. This operation was proposed and performed so long
ago as the days of Ambrose Paré,[30] was much approved by Dupuytren,
Baudens, and Velpeau, had fallen into disuse for a time, but is now
again recommended by some excellent surgeons, especially by Gross[31]
and Ashhurst,[32] both of Philadelphia.
It is tolerably easy to perform, and does not involve any sawing of
bones, but the flaps are apt to be cut too short, unless care be taken,
from the manner in which the trochlea projects downwards beyond the line
of the condyles, so that if the base of an ordinary-shaped flap be made
on a level with the condyles, it will prove insufficient to cover the
bone. It may be performed either by the circular method (Velpeau), oval
(Baudens), or by a long anterior and short posterior flap (Textor and
Dupuytren). Probably the best method is by a long anterior flap when it
can be obtained, thus:--The arm being placed in a slightly flexed
position, the surgeon transfixes in front of the joint, in a line
extending from the level of the external condyle to a point one inch
below the internal condyle (Plate IV. fig. 7); the tissue should be held
well forward at the moment of transfixion. The flap should be at least
two and a half inches deep at its apex, which must be rounded off. The
two ends of this flap may then be united behind by a semilunar incision
(Plate III. fig. 2), which will separate the radial attachments. The
ulna must then be cleared, and the triceps divided at its insertion.
_Modifications._--Dupuytren used to saw through the ulna, leaving
the olecranon attached. Velpeau opposed this, but it is again
recommended by Gross, who leaves the olecranon, and at the same
time improves the shape of the stump by sawing off the "inner
trochlea" on a level with the general surface.
AMPUTATION OF THE ARM.--This amputation is best performed by double
flap, and is the typical instance which exhibits all the advantages of
two equal flaps made by transfixion, without any of the disadvantages of
that method. These advantages are, easiness of performance, rapidity,
excellent covering for the bone, with as little sacrifice of tissue as
is possible, while the fact that the cicatrix is opposite the end of the
bone is hardly a disadvantage in the arm (as it certainly is in the
leg), as no weight has to be borne on it. When they can be obtained,
anterior and posterior flaps are generally considered most satisfactory,
but Mr. Spence prefers lateral ones, lest the line of union should be
interfered with by the deltoid raising the bone. If the right arm has to
be amputated, the operator standing at the inner side raises the
anterior muscles with his left hand, and enters the knife just in front
of the brachial vessels (Plate I. fig. 12); keeping as close as possible
to the bone, he brings out the knife at a point exactly opposite, then
with a brisk sawing motion, cuts a semicircular flap, taking care to
bring out the knife more suddenly just at the end, in order to cut
through the skin as perpendicularly to the arm as possible. The knife is
again entered at the same point, carried behind the bone, and brought
out at the same angle, and an exactly corresponding flap cut from the
other side of the limb, the flaps are then retracted, the bone cleared
by circular incision and sawn through as high up as it is exposed. In
primary cases, where the muscles are firm and developed, the flaps
should be cut a little concave.
_Modifications and Varieties._--Teale's method may of course be
used here as elsewhere. The internal line of incision (Plate IV.
fig. 8) should be made just in front of the brachial vessels. This
method requires the amputation to be performed higher up than would
otherwise be necessary (from the length of the anterior flap), and
this disadvantage is not counterbalanced by any special advantage
in the posterior retraction of the cicatrix.
In feeble flabby arms, the true circular operation is very easily
performed, and with good results. A circular sweep of the knife is
made through the skin alone, which is drawn up by an assistant,
while the surgeon separates it from the fascia; another circular
cut through fascia and muscles exposes the bone, which must then be
cleared and cut through at a still higher level.
AMPUTATION AT THE SHOULDER-JOINT.--This operation, like that at the hip
joint, can, from the nature of the joint to be covered, and the abundant
soft parts in the normal state of the tissues, be performed on the dead
in very various ways, by single, double, or triple flaps, by transfixion
or dissection, rapidly or slowly. Hence manuals of operative surgery
might collect at least twenty different methods, most of which have some
recommendation, and all of which are practicable enough.
When, however, we reflect that in the living body, in cases where
amputation at the shoulder-joint is required at all, the severity of the
accident, or the urgency of the disease, will, in general, leave no room
for selection, we shall see how utterly valueless is any knowledge of
mere methods of operating, and of how much greater importance it is that
we should be simply thoroughly familiar with the anatomy of the joint.
For example, an accident which necessitates amputation so high up has,
in all probability, opened into the joint and destroyed the soft parts
on at least one aspect; in such a case the flaps must be cut from the
uninjured soft parts only. If an aneurism has rendered amputation
through it and through the joint a last resource, the flap must be
gained chiefly at least from the outside; a malignant tumour of the
humerus will almost certainly prevent any transfixion, and require flaps
to be made by dissection, wherever the skin is least likely to be
involved. Again, some of the most vaunted and most rapid operations
almost require for their success the integrity of the humerus, which has
to make itself useful as a lever in disarticulation, while in most cases
of accident we are amputating for compound injury of the humerus, almost
certainly implying fracture with comminution.
From its proximity to the trunk, hæmorrhage is one of the chief dangers
to be apprehended during this operation, especially from the axillary
artery. As far as possible to obviate this danger, most plans of
operating are based on the principle that the vessels and nerves should
be the last tissues to be cut; in some they are not divided till after
disarticulation.
While a good assistant, to make pressure on the subclavian above the
clavicle, is a most advisable precaution, too much must not be trusted
to this pressure above, as the struggles of the patient and the
spasmodic movements of the limb, which are so apt to occur under the
stimulus of the knife, are apt to render futile the best efforts at
compression.
The operator should trust rather to making the incisions in such a
manner that the great vessel be not divided till the hand of an
assistant, or in default of a suitable one, his own left hand, is able
to follow the knife and grasp the flap.
The bleeding from the circumflex, subscapular, and posterior scapular
arteries can easily be arrested by a dossil of lint till the great
vessel is tied, and they can be secured.
In cases where proper assistants cannot be had, temporary closure of the
axillary vessel could easily be made by carrying a strong silver wire or
silk ligature completely round the vessel by a curved needle before the
incisions are commenced, and by tying this firmly over a pad of lint.
Pressure on the artery above the clavicle is best made by the thumb of a
strong assistant, who endeavours to compress it against the first rib;
where the parts are deep and muscular, the padded handle of the
tourniquet, or of a large door-key, will do as the agent of pressure.
A brief notice of three of the best methods of operating will be quite
sufficient to show what should be aimed at in shoulder-joint
amputations:--
#1.# In cases where the surgeon can choose his flaps, the following
method will be found the most satisfactory, as resulting in the smallest
possible wound, in having less risk of hæmorrhage during the operation
than any other method, and in providing excellent flaps.
It is Larrey's method slightly modified.
_Operation._--With a moderate-sized amputating knife an incision of
about two inches in length, extending through all the tissues down to
the bone, should be made from the edge of the acromion process to a
point about one inch below the top of the humerus; from this latter
point a curved incision, enclosing a semilunar flap, should be made on
each side of the limb to the anterior and posterior folds of the axilla
respectively (Plate IV. fig. 9, and Plate III. fig. 3). These flaps
should then be dissected back, including the muscles and exposing the
joint. When thoroughly exposed, the joint must then be opened from
above, and the bone separated. One small portion of skin lying above the
artery, vein, and nerves still remains to be divided (Plate I. fig. 13).
This may be done by an oblique cut from within outwards, in such a
direction as to form part of the anterior or internal incision, and with
the precaution of having an assistant to command the vessels before they
are divided. The resulting wound is almost perfectly ovoid, the flaps
come together with great ease in a straight vertical line, which admits
of easy and thorough drainage. Union is generally rapid. Larrey's
success by this method was very remarkable: ninety out of a hundred
cases in military practice were saved, notwithstanding the well-known
risks of such operations.
#2.# As good as the former, and nearly as universally applicable, is the
method devised by Professor Spence, and practised by him in nearly every
case:--"With a broad strong bistoury I cut down upon the inner aspect of
the head of the humerus, immediately external to the coracoid process,
and carry the incision down through the clavicular fibres of the deltoid
and pectoralis major muscles till I reach the humeral attachment of the
latter muscle, which I divide. I then with a gentle curve carry my
incision across and fairly through the lower fibres of the deltoid
towards, but not through, the posterior border of the axilla. Unless the
textures be much torn, I next mark out the line of the lower part of the
inner section by carrying an incision through the _skin and fat only_,
from the point where my straight incision terminated, across the inside
of the arm to meet the incision at the outer part. This insures accuracy
in the line of union, but is not essential. If the fibres of the deltoid
have been thoroughly divided in the line of incision, the flap so marked
out, along with the posterior circumflex trunk, which enters its deep
surface, can be easily separated from the bone and joint, and drawn
upwards and backwards so as to expose the head and tuberosities, by the
point of the finger without further use of the knife. The tendinous
insertions of the capsular muscles, the long head of the biceps, and the
capsule, are next divided by cutting directly upon the tuberosities and
head of the bone; and the broad subscapular tendon especially, being
very fully exposed by the incision, can be much more easily and
completely divided than in the double-flap method. By keeping the large
posterior flap out of the way by a broad copper spatula or the fingers
of an assistant, and taking care to keep the edge of the knife close to
the bone, the trunk of the posterior circumflex is protected. In regard
to the axillary vessels, they can either be compressed by an assistant
before completing the division of the soft parts on the axillary aspect,
or to avoid all risk, the axillary artery may be exposed, tied, and
divided between two ligatures so as to allow it to retract before
dividing the other textures."[33]
Another, but not so good method of making an external flap, is the
following:--(_a._) For the right arm.--The patient lying well over
on his left side, the surgeon stands to the inside of the arm to be
removed. Seizing the deltoid in the left, with the right he passes
an amputating knife, seven or eight inches in length, from a point
a little nearer the clavicle than the middle space between the
acromion and coracoid processes; then, transfixing the base of the
deltoid, and just grazing the posterior surface of the humerus,
thrusts the knife downwards and backwards till it protrudes at the
posterior margin of the axilla. When doing this, it is important
that the arm be held outwards and backwards, and even upwards, as
far as possible to relax the deltoid; without this it will be
impossible to make the flap of the full size. The flap must then be
cut of as full length as can be obtained, four or five inches at
least. An assistant then holds it upwards, while the surgeon, or
(if the arm is very muscular) another assistant, brings the arm
forwards well across the patient's chest, thus exposing the
posterior aspect of the joint. This may have very possibly been
already opened during the transfixion; the attachments of muscles
must now be divided, the knife passed behind the head of the bone,
which is dislocated forwards, and a suitable flap of the tissues in
front cut from within outwards. The assistant is to follow the
knife with his finger and compress the vessels.
(_b._) If the left shoulder is to be amputated, the patient lying
on his right side, the surgeon stands behind him, and raising the
elbow of the limb to be removed from the side, and pulling it
slightly backwards, enters the knife at the posterior fold of the
axilla (Plate II. fig. 2), and passing the posterior aspect of the
head of the humerus, endeavours to protrude it as near the acromion
as possible; the flaps must be cut and the rest of the operation
performed in the manner we have just described for the other arm.
#3.# Where the destruction of tissue has been chiefly below the joint, a
very good flap may be obtained from above, composed chiefly of the
deltoid muscle, and the skin over it. This may be made by transfixion at
its base, but is better obtained by dissection from without.
The surgeon cuts (Plate II. figs. 3, 3) in a semilunar direction (with
the convexity downwards) from one side of the deltoid to the other,
viz., from the root of the acromion to near the coracoid process; he
then raises the large flap upwards and throws it back, opens the joint,
disarticulates, passes the knife behind the head of the bone, and cuts
out without attempting to save any flaps below, in a transverse
direction. By this means the artery is still almost the last structure
to be divided, and can be secured by a ready assistant. In cases where
much injury has been done to the floor of the axilla and wall of chest,
the deltoid flap must be made large in proportion, and triangular rather
than semilunar in shape.
_N.B._--The statistics of amputation at the shoulder-joint bring out
some interesting facts: 1. That the primary amputations here are far
more successful than secondary ones. Guthrie records nineteen cases of
the former out of which only one died, while out of a similar number in
which the amputation was secondary, fifteen died. In the Crimea, British
surgeons had thirty-nine cases, with thirteen deaths; of thirty-three
primary, nine died; and of six secondary, four were fatal.
S.W. Gross's[34] statistics confirm this: of one hundred and
seventy-eight primary, forty-six died--25.8 per cent.; ninety-five
secondary, sixty-one died--64.2 per cent.
AMPUTATIONS ABOVE THE SHOULDER-JOINT.--Under this head we may group the
comparatively rare cases in which, from accident or disease, the removal
of portions of the scapula and clavicle, or even the entire bones, is
rendered necessary. That it is quite possible to survive such injuries
has been frequently shown in cases of accident when the scapula along
with the arm has been torn off, and yet the patient recovered.
Encouraged by such cases, Gaetani Bey of Cairo removed the whole of
scapula and part of the clavicle in a case where he had amputated at the
shoulder for smash. The patient recovered. Heron Watson has had a
similar case. Dr. George M'Lellan amputated arm and scapula in a youth
of seventeen for an enormous encephaloid tumour. Fifty-one such cases
are now on record.
Syme amputated with success the arm along with the scapula and outer
half of clavicle, in a case in which he had previously excised the head
of the humerus for a tumour.[35]
Gilbert, Mussey, Rigaud, Fergusson, and others have performed similar
operations, secondary to amputation at the shoulder-joint, for cases of
caries and malignant tumour. It is impossible to give any exact
directions for the incisions which must be planned for individual cases,
with two chief aims, to avoid hæmorrhage as far as possible, and to
leave abundance of skin. In operations on the scapula, it should be
freely exposed by large enough incisions. (See _Excisions_.)
AMPUTATIONS OF LOWER EXTREMITY.--Commencing with the most distal, and
gradually working our way upwards, we find that partial amputations of
the toes are extremely rare. Only in the case of the great toe is such
an operation _ever_ admissible, for the other toes are so short, and the
stumps left by amputation are at once so useless from their shortness,
and so detrimental from the manner in which they project upwards and rub
against the shoe, that any injury requiring partial amputation of a
lesser toe is treated by its complete removal.
[Illustration: FIG. V.]
AMPUTATION OF DISTAL PHALANX OF GREAT TOE.--This is comparatively rarely
required now. It used to be thought necessary for the cure of those not
uncommon cases of exostosis of the distal phalanx, but it is now found
that most of these can be cured by simply clipping off the exostosis.
When necessary, however, and when the choice of flaps is possible, the
best plan is by a long flap from the plantar surface (Fig. V. 4), as in
the similar operation on the thumb; laying the edge of the knife over
the dorsal aspect of the joint, cutting through it, and turning the edge
of the knife round close to the bone, so as to cut out a large flap from
the ball of the toe.
AMPUTATION OF A SINGLE LESSER TOE--_second_, _third_, _or fourth_.--This
operation is on exactly the same principle as that described for the
corresponding finger; but it must be remembered that the
metatarso-phalangeal joint is more deeply situated in the soft parts
than is the metacarpo-phalangeal; and thus the commencement of the
elliptical incision which is to surround the base of the toe must be
proportionally higher up (Fig. V. 1). On the other hand, as it is very
important to avoid as much as possible any cicatrix in the sole of the
foot, the plantar end of the incision need not be carried to a point
exactly opposite the one from which it set out, but it will be
sufficient if it reaches the groove between the toe and sole. A little
more care may thus be required in dissecting out the head of the first
phalanx, but this is quite repaid by the cicatrix in the sole being
avoided. Early division of flexor tendons renders disarticulation easy.
AMPUTATION OF THE FIRST AND FIFTH TOES.--The incisions are conducted on
the same principle as in the other operations, the operator being
careful to preserve as much as possible (Fig. V. 2) of the hard useful
pad of the inner and outer sides respectively.
Most surgeons are now agreed that in these toes it is best not to remove
the head of the metatarsal bone with the toe. Cutting off the large
cartilaginous head obliquely with a pair of bone-pliers may prevent an
awkward unseemly projection, but it does diminish the strength of the
transverse arch of the foot.
AMPUTATION OF ONE OR MORE TOES WITH THEIR METATARSALS.--It is not
necessary to give very particular details regarding such operations, as
the surgeon must be guided in the individual cases by the specialties of
accident or disease.
One or two guiding principles are important:--
1. Having made up your mind at what point you are to cut the metatarsal,
if the amputation be a partial one, or as to the exact position of the
joint, if you intend to disarticulate, commence your dorsal incision
(Fig. V. 3) at a point fully half an inch higher up than the selected
spot, as free access is of the very last importance.
2. Whenever it is possible, cut the bone through its continuity rather
than disarticulate. Specially is this important in the case of the
metatarsal bone of the great toe, that the insertion of the tendon of
the peroneus longus may be saved. If, however, the terminal branch of
the _dorsalis pedis_ artery be wounded, it may be necessary to
disarticulate the first metatarsal to secure it rather than trust to
compression to stop the bleeding.
3. In cutting through the first and fifth metatarsals, remember to apply
the bone-pliers obliquely, not transversely, so as to avoid unseemly
projection.
4. As far as possible avoid cutting into the sole at all.
The plantar cicatrix is almost a fatal objection to a plan of removing
the first and fifth toes and their metatarsals which has much otherwise
in rapidity and elegance to recommend it. In the great toe, for example,
it is performed as follows:--Seizing the soft parts of the inner edge of
the foot in his left hand, the surgeon draws them _inwards_, transfixes
just at the tarso-metatarsal joint, and, keeping as close as possible to
the inner edge of the metatarsal bone, cuts the flap as long as to the
middle of the first phalanx; then the soft parts of the foot being drawn
as far _outwards_ as possible by an assistant, the surgeon enters his
knife between the first and second toes, and succeeds in entering his
former incision so as to separate the metatarsal bone without removing
any skin. All that remains is to open the tarso-metatarsal joint. It is
a very neat-looking operation, leaves a very good covering for the
parts, and is performed with extreme rapidity. This last is not so much
required in these days of anæsthetics, and the cicatrix in the sole is a
very formidable objection to it.
The simplest and shortest rule that can be given for the amputation of a
toe, with the part or whole of its metatarsal, is to make one dorsal
incision, commencing about a quarter of an inch above the spot at which
you intend to divide the bone or to disarticulate, extending downwards
in a straight line to the metatarso-phalangeal articulation, and then
bifurcating so as to surround the base of the toe at the normal fold of
the skin. The soft parts are then to be cleared from the
metatarso-phalangeal joint, and the toe still being retained on the
metatarsal bone, it should be carefully dissected up, avoiding any
pricking of the soft parts below, till the joint is reached, or the spot
at which the bone-pliers are to be applied is fully cleared.
AMPUTATION OF THE ANTERIOR PORTION OF THE FOOT AT THE TARSO-METATARSAL
JOINT--HEY'S OPERATION.--This operation, which is now comparatively
rarely performed, has been invested with a halo of difficulty and
complexity which is to a great extent unnecessary.
There is no doubt that the anatomical conformation of the joints
involved, especially the manner in which the head of the second
metatarsal (Fig. V. C) projects upwards into the tarsus, and is locked
between the cuneiform bones, renders disarticulation in the healthy foot
rather difficult; but it must be remembered that in cases where for
accident we have to deal with previously healthy tissues, it is quite
unnecessary to disarticulate, a better result being attained by simply
sawing the foot across in the line of the articulation; and again, where
we have to operate for disease, the tissues are so matted, and the
bones so soft, that complete removal of the metatarsus is much easier
than it appears when practising on the dead subject.
Very various plans of incision have been proposed. Mr. Hey's original
procedure has not been much improved upon. His short account of it has
at once surgical value and historical interest:--
"I made a mark across the upper part of the foot, to point out as
exactly as I could the place where the metatarsal bones were joined to
those of the tarsus. About half an inch from this mark, nearer the toes,
I made a transverse incision through the integuments and muscles
covering the metatarsal bones (Plate IV. figs. 10, 11). From each
extremity of this wound I made an incision (along the inner and outer
side of the foot) to the toes. I removed all the toes at their junction
with the metatarsal bones, and then separated the integuments and
muscles forming the sole of the foot from the inferior part of the
metatarsal bones, keeping the edge of my scalpel as near the bones as I
could, that I might both expedite the operation and preserve as much
muscular flesh in the flap as possible. I then separated with the
scalpel the four smaller metatarsal bones at their junction with the
tarsus, which was easily effected, as the joints lie in a straight line
across the foot. The projecting part of the first cuneiform bone which
supports the great toe I was obliged to divide with a saw. The arteries,
which required a ligature, being tied, I applied the flap which had
formed the sole of the foot to the integuments which remained on the
upper part, and retained them in contact by sutures....
"The patient could walk with firmness and ease; she was in no danger of
hurting the cicatrix by striking the place where the toes had been
against any hard substance, for this part was covered with the strong
integuments which had before constituted the sole of the foot. The
cicatrix was situated upon the upper part of the foot, and had very
little breadth, as the divided parts had been kept united after being
brought into close contact."[36]
_Lisfranc's method_ has, briefly, the following modifications.--Having
fixed the position of the articulations of the first and fifth
metatarsals with the tarsus, the operator unites them by a curved
incision across the dorsum of the foot, with its convexity downwards. He
then divides the dorsal ligaments over the articulations, opens the
first from the inside, the fifth, fourth, and third from the outside, he
then with a strong narrow-bladed knife divides the interosseous
ligaments between the sides and end of the head of the second metatarsal
and the cuneiforms, thus completing the disarticulation; bending the
fore part of the foot downwards, he then keeps the edge of the knife
close to the lower surface of the bones, separating the plantar
ligaments, and cutting out a long plantar flap of skin and muscles.
In every case it must be remembered that the upper end of the fifth
metatarsal projects far up along the outer edge of the foot. Allowance
must be made for this projection in commencing the incision. A rule
given by Mr. Syme to guide the disarticulation of the three outer
metatarsals will often be of service; it is this: "Having once entered
the joint of the fifth, the knife must be drawn along in a direction of
a line drawn towards the distal end of the first metatarsal; for the
fourth, the direction must be changed to the middle of the same bone;
and to open the third it will be necessary to come across the dorsum of
the foot as if intending to reach the proximal end."
To avoid the difficulties of disarticulation, Skey recommends cutting
off the head of the second metatarsal with a pair of pliers. Baudens,
Guérin, and others approve of sawing all the bones across in the line
desired.
Most surgeons are now agreed that in this operation it is better to make
both flaps by cutting from without, in preference to transfixion of the
plantar one from within. In cases where, from injury and disease, the
plantar flap is deficient in size, it may be necessary to make the
dorsal flap longer. However, the long plantar is preferable both from
its superior hardness, and also because from its length it permits the
cicatrix to be well on the dorsum of the foot, and therefore less likely
to be injured by the pressure of the boot in front.
AMPUTATIONS THROUGH THE TARSUS.--Various plans of amputating through the
tarsus have been devised and described at great length. The most
important of these is the operation of removal of the anterior portion
of the foot, at the joints between the astragalus and scaphoid, and os
calcis and cuboid, well known to the profession by the name of its first
describer, Chopart.
It has been so completely superseded by the infinitely preferable
amputation at the ankle-joint of Mr. Syme, as rarely, if ever, to be
practised in this country. Indeed, amputation at the ankle-joint may be
said to have taken the place of all these amputations through the
tarsus; for though cases are occasionally met with in which the
limitation of the disease or injury may render Chopart's possible, and
though at first sight it appears to have an advantage in removing less
of the body, still the following objections are nearly fatal to its
chance of being selected:--1. In cases of injury, through leaving a long
stump, and, at first sight, a useful one, experience shows that the
tendo Achillis sooner or later (being unopposed by the extensors of the
toes) draws up the heel so as to make the end of the stump point, and
the cicatrix press on the ground, rendering it unable to bear any
weight. 2. In cases of removal for disease of the tarsus, the bones left
behind, though apparently sound at the time, are almost sure to become
eventually diseased.
As it has an historical interest, and as this operation (defective as it
is) had been the means of saving many legs prior to the invention of
amputation at the ankle-joint, a brief description may be appended:--
Chopart's own manner of operation was briefly somewhat as follows:--
The tourniquet having been applied, the surgeon is to make a transverse
incision through the skin which covers the instep, two inches from the
ankle-joint. He is to divide the skin, and the extensor tendons, and the
muscles in that situation, so as to expose the convexity of the tarsus.
He is next to make on each side a small longitudinal incision, which is
to begin below and a little in front of the malleolus, and is to end at
one of the extremities of the first incision. After having formed in
this way a flap of integuments, he is to let it be drawn upwards by the
assistant who holds the leg. There is no occasion to dissect and reflect
the flap, for the cellular substance connecting the skin with the
subjacent aponeurosis is so loose, that it can easily be drawn up above
the place where the joint of the calcaneum with the cuboides and that
between the astragalus and scaphoides ought to be opened. The surgeon
will penetrate the last the most easily, particularly by taking for his
guide the eminence which indicates the attachment of the tibialis
anticus muscle to the inside of the os naviculare. The joint of the os
cuboides and os calcis lies pretty nearly in the same transverse line,
but rather obliquely forwards. The ligaments having been cut, the foot
falls back. The bistoury is then to be put down, and the straight knife
used, with which a flap of the soft parts is to be formed under the
tarsus and metatarsus, long enough to admit of being applied to the
naked bones, so as entirely to cover them. It is to be maintained in
position with three or four straps of adhesive plaster, etc.[37]
Chopart's amputation, after an interval of comparative neglect, was
introduced into this country by Mr. Syme in 1829. His method of
performance is simpler and easier than Chopart's. He thus describes
it:--"The blade of the knife employed should be about six inches long,
and half an inch broad, sharp at the point and blunt on the back. The
tourniquet ought to be applied immediately above the ankle, having
compresses placed over the posterior and anterior tibial arteries. The
surgeon should measure with his eye the middle distance between the
malleolus externus and the head of the metatarsal bone of the little
toe, which is the situation of the articulation between the os cuboides
and os calcis. Placing his forefinger here, he ought to place his thumb
on the other side of the foot directly opposite, which will show him
where the os naviculare and astragalus are connected. An incision (Plate
II. figs. 4 and 5) somewhat curved, with its convexity forward, is then
to be made from one of these points to the other, when, instead of
proceeding to disarticulate, the operator should transfix the sole of
the foot from side to side at the extremities of the first incision, and
carry the knife forwards so as to detach a sufficient flap, which must
extend the whole length of the metatarsus to the balls of the toes. The
disarticulation may finally be completed with great ease, as the shape
of the articular surfaces concerned is very simple, and nearly
transverse."[38] Regarding the method of disarticulating at the
astragalo-calcaneal joint, and removing all the foot except the
astragalus, no detail need be given. Malgaigne advises an internal flap,
thus sacrificing the valuable pad of the heel. Roux, Verneuil, and
others endeavour to save the pad. This operation, however, has now
fallen almost completely into disuse.
SUBASTRAGALOID AMPUTATION has been highly recommended. In it the flap is
made as in Syme's, then anterior bones removed as in Chopart's, and os
calcis grasped by lion forceps and twisted off, its attachment and the
insertion of tendo Achillis being cautiously avoided. If flaps are
scanty, head of astragulus may be cut off with a small saw.--Hancock and
Ashurst.
TRIPIER'S AMPUTATION[39] is a modification of above, the skin incisions
being made as in Chopart's amputation, and then the calcaneum is sawn
through on a level with the sustentaculum tali on a plane at right
angles to the axis of the leg.
AMPUTATION AT THE ANKLE-JOINT, OR SYME'S AMPUTATION.--This operation is
one of much interest and great practical importance. In our cold
variable climate caries of the bones of the tarsus, and strumous disease
of the ankle-joint, are very common and very intractable maladies, and
for both of these, when far advanced, Syme's amputation is the only
justifiable procedure. When properly done, according to the _exact_ plan
of its proposer, it removes the whole of the diseased parts and not an
inch more, is an operation of very slight danger to life, and results
almost invariably in a thoroughly useful comfortable stump. Much of its
success depends on the manner in which it is performed, and as many
surgical manuals are not sufficiently full, some positively in error
regarding this point, and as very many modifications have been devised
diminishing in value and applicability very much in proportion as they
diverge from the original description, I think it advisable to describe
the operation minutely, and point out in detail the parts of it which
seem absolutely essential to success.
_Operation._--The foot being held at a right angle to the leg, the point
of a straight bistoury, with a pretty strong blade, should be entered
just below the centre of the external malleolus (Plate IV. figs. 12,
13), (1.) and then carried right across the integuments of the sole, in
a straight line (or in the case of a prominent heel, slightly
backwards), (2.) to a point at the same level on the opposite side. (3.)
This incision should reach boldly through all the tissues down to the
bone. Holding the heel in the fingers of his left hand, the operator
then inserts his left thumb-nail into the incision, and pushes the flap
downwards, as with the knife kept close to the bone, and cutting on it,
he frees the flap from its attachments. The thumb-nail guards the knife
from in any way scoring the flap. (4.) This process is continued till
the tuberosity of the os calcis is fairly turned, and the tendo Achillis
nearly reached. Shifting his left hand he then extends the foot, and
joins the extremities of the first incision by a transverse one right
across the instep. (5.) Thus he opens the joint between the astragalus
and tibia, (6.) divides the lateral ligaments, disarticulates, and still
keeping close to the bone, removes the foot by the division of the tendo
Achillis.
The lower ends of the tibia and fibula are then to be isolated from the
soft parts, and a thin slice, including both malleoli, to be removed. If
the disease of the joint has affected the lower end of the bone, slice
after slice may be removed, till a healthy surface of cancellated
texture is obtained. The vessels are then secured.
_Dressing of the Stump._--From its peculiar shape and position, the
escape of any blood into the stump is much to be deprecated, for as it
cannot easily get out, on the one hand it gives pain, and may cause
sloughing from its pressure, and on the other it is sure eventually to
cause suppuration, and delay union. To avoid such results care must be
taken to secure every vessel that can be seen; if there is any general
oozing it is best merely to pass the sutures through the edges of the
flaps, but not bring them together, thus leaving the stump open for some
hours; then apply cold, and when the surfaces are fairly glazed over,
remove any clots and bring the flaps together.[40]
Another plan introduced by Mr. Syme was to make a longitudinal slit in
the flap, through which all the ligatures are to be drawn; these give a
dependent drain to any pus that may be formed, and by their presence
greatly expedite the healing of the wound. Again, in cases where from
the amount of disease existing before the operation, and the gelatinous
thickening of the flap and neighbouring parts, much suppuration may be
looked for, probably it will be found best to keep the flaps quite apart
for some days, by stuffing the wound with lint, and aiming only at
secondary union by granulations.
A drainage tube passed through the breadth of the flap, and brought out
at the angles, and retained for a few days, will do admirably.
_Notes._--(1.) If commenced further forward, as in Pirogoff's
modification, it will be found difficult to turn the corner of the
heel; if further back, the nutrition of the flap is endangered.
(2.) This is very important. In several well-known text-books, even
in the last edition of Gross's _Surgery_, the incision is figured
passing obliquely _forwards_. This is a fatal error, for besides
making a flap far too long, it forces the operator to cut fairly
into the hollow of the sole, quite off the prominence of the os
calcis, and he finds that it is utterly impossible to free his flap
without using great force, and inevitably scoring it in all
directions. Sloughing is almost inevitably the result.
(3.) The incision is to stop at least half-an-inch below the
internal malleolus. Most surgical manuals, even when they profess
to describe Mr. Syme's own method of operating, say that the
incision should extend from malleolus to malleolus. If this is
done, the flap becomes unsymmetrical, too long, and also the
posterior tibial artery, on which much of the vascular supply of
the flap depends, is cut. When the incision is properly made, the
vessel is not cut till after its division into the plantar
arteries.
(4.) Scoring the flap. Some may ask, Why do you object to a little
scoring, the tissues are thick enough, and besides, don't you
advise a slit in the flap yourself? Yes. One look at an injected
preparation will show that the vessels supplying this thick flap
come to it from its inner surface, and are inevitably cut across in
any scoring of it, and also, that scoring cuts across the vessels,
and _must_ divide dozens of them; the slit we make is parallel with
their course, and _may_ not divide one.
(5.) Across the instep. Some authors recommend a semilunar anterior
flap; this is quite unnecessary, increases bagging and delays
union. It can be required only in cases where the heel flap has
been destroyed or lessened by disease, or by operators in whose
hands the heel flaps occasionally slough.
(6.) It is not impossible that a careless operator may (by cutting
a little too low) miss the joint and get into the hollow of the
neck of the astragalus, where he may cut away for a long time
without making much progress.
_Advantages._--1. It is wonderfully free of danger to life. It is very
hard to obtain exact statistical information, but my experience is that
the mortality is certainly not more than about 10 per cent., a very
remarkable result when compared with that of amputations through the
leg, the operation which used to be required for those cases which now
require only amputation at the ankle-joint.
In the Statistical Report by the Surgeon-General of the United States,
9705 cases of amputation resulted in death, the proportions being as
follows:--
Amputation of hip, 85 per cent. died.
" thigh, 64 "
" knee, 55 "
" leg, 26 "
Amputation of ankle-joint, 13 per cent. died.
" shoulder, 39 "
" arm, 21 "
" fore-arm, 16 "
2. It is the most perfect stump that can be made, in fact the only one
in the lower extremity which can bear pressure enough to support the
weight of the body; all the others require the weight to be distributed
over the general surface of the limb by means of apparatus. A good
ankle-joint stump can bear the whole weight of the body, as when the
patient hops on it without any artificial aid, or without even the
interposition of a stocking between the stump and a stone floor. More
than this, I have seen a patient who had both his feet amputated at the
ankle-joint run without shoes or stockings on the stone passages,
without even the aid of a stick, and with very great swiftness.
The reason of this may be found in the nature of the flap itself,
originally intended to bear the weight of the body, there being no
cicatrix at the part on which pressure is borne. I have noticed that
perfection in walking on an ankle-joint stump has a certain relation to
the freedom of movement which the pad has over the face of the bone.
This ought to be pretty considerable. It is explained by the new
attachments formed by the tendons, and is under the control of the
patient, being elicited when he is told to move his toes.
It has been objected to this operation that the flap is apt to slough.
When improperly performed, as when the flap is scored transversely in
its separation, and especially when the flap is cut too long (as has
been already noticed), this may occur; but that there is nothing
whatever in the position or condition of the flap itself that at all
necessitates its sloughing, is thoroughly proved by the following
remarkable case, given by Mr. Syme in his volume of _Observations in
Clinical Surgery_. I quote it entire:--
"P.C., aged thirty-three, was admitted into the hospital on the 25th
July 1860, in the following state:--He had been treated in the
Manchester Infirmary for popliteal aneurism by pressure, so decidedly
applied that it had caused an ulcer, of which the cicatrix remained; but
without producing the effect desired. The femoral artery was then tied
with success, in so far as the aneurism was concerned, but with the
unpleasant sequel, some months afterwards, of mortification in the foot,
which was thrown off, with the exception of the astragalus and os calcis
with their integuments, a large raw surface being presented in front
where the bone was bare. Although the patient was extremely weak, and
the parts concerned might be supposed more than usually disposed to
slough, I did not hesitate to perform the operation, with the speedy
result of a most excellent stump and complete restoration to
health."--Pp. 49, 50.
The modifications of Mr. Syme's original operation have been very
various. It will be unnecessary even to name them all. One or two may
require notice. Retaining Mr. Syme's incisions in their integrity, some
operators prefer not to disarticulate the foot, but remove it by sawing
through the tibia and fibula at once, while still in connection with the
foot. That most excellent surgeon and first-rate operator, Dr. Johnston
of Montrose, used to prefer this method.
In cases where the pad of the heel has been destroyed by disease or
accident, so as to be partially or entirely unavailable for the flap,
the late Dr. Richard Mackenzie[41] practised the following operation by
internal flap:--With the foot and ankle projecting from the table with
their internal aspect upwards, he entered the point of the knife (Plate
I. fig. 14) in the mesial line of the posterior aspect of the ankle, on
a level with the articulation, carried it down obliquely across the
tendo Achillis towards the external border of the plantar aspect of the
heel, along which it is continued in a semilunar direction. The incision
is then curved across the sole of the foot, and terminates on the inner
side of the tendon of the tibialis anticus, about an inch in front of
the inner malleolus. The second incision (Plate III. fig. 4) is carried
across the outer aspect of the ankle in a semilunar direction, between
the extremities of the first incisions, the convexity of the incision
downwards, and passing half an inch below the external malleolus.
Precisely the same principle might supply the flap from the outer side
in cases where the internal flap as well as the heel was deficient, but
probably the nutrition of the external flap would be more doubtful.
Neither the one nor the other is nearly so good as the true heel flap,
and they are both only very poor substitutes for it when it cannot be
had.
The modification devised by Dr. Handyside does not seem to have any
advantages over the original operation, and has not been adopted.
The modification invented by Professor Pirogoff involves a much more
important principle than any of the preceding. Instead of dissecting the
flap from the posterior projecting portion of the os calcis, and
removing the tarsus entire, he sawed off the posterior portion of the os
calcis obliquely, leaving it in contact with the pad of skin, which is
retained. Immediately after making the cut which defines the posterior
flap and divides the tissues down to the bone, he opens the joint in
front, disarticulates, and then putting on a narrow saw immediately
behind the astragalus and over the sustentaculum tali, he saws the os
calcis obliquely downwards and forwards till he reaches the first
incision; then removes the ends of the tibia and fibula and brings up
the slice of os calcis into contact with them.
_Advantages._--It is easy of performance, saving the dissection from the
heel, which some find so hard. It leaves a longer limb. It is said to
bear pressure better, and there is certainly not so much chance of
bagging of pus, and the mortality is exceedingly small, Hancock's
collected cases giving only 8.6 per cent.; in cases of injury it is
quite a warrantable operation.
_Disadvantages._--It is contrary to sound principle in cases of disease,
for it wilfully leaves a portion of the tarsus, in which disease is
almost certain to return. It leaves too long a limb, for it is found
that the shortening in Mr Syme's method is just sufficient to admit of a
properly constructed spring being placed in the boot to make up for the
loss of the elastic arch of the foot. It brings the firm pad of the heel
too much forward, thus tending to lean the weight of the body on the
softer tissues behind the heel. It takes much longer to unite and
consolidate.
The author has now, in a large number of cases of Syme's amputation for
disease, found advantage in leaving the periosteum in the heel flap,
_i.e._ he cuts fairly into the os calcis when dividing the skin of heel,
and then using a periosteum scraper instead of the knife, it is quite
easy to remove the whole of the periosteum from the bone; this results
in a large and more rounded pad of great strength and thickness.
In cases where from disease or injury it is impossible to obtain either
a heel flap or a substitute lateral one, the question is, Where should
amputation be performed?
It was for a long time the opinion of nearly all the best surgeons, and
still is the opinion of many, that amputation of the leg should be
performed at what was known as the "seat of election," just below the
knee, even in cases where abundance of soft parts could be obtained for
an amputation much lower down. The rule in surgery, to save as much of
the body as possible in every amputation, was in the leg believed to be
set aside by objections which militated strongly against all the other
operations in the leg except the one performed just below the knee. Very
briefly, these were somewhat as follows:--1. Just above the ankle you
have large bones with nothing to cover them except skin and tendons. 2.
Higher up in the calf you have plenty of muscle, but it is all on one
side, and that the wrong one; it is very heavy, very difficult to dress
and keep in position, and then when you have succeeded with it, the
muscle wastes away and the stump is flabby. 3. And chiefly, as in all
the amputations of the leg, the cicatrices are so much in the way, and
the bones are so ill covered, that the patient can never rest his leg on
the stump itself, but has either to rest his weight on his patella
impinging on the top of a bottle-shaped leg, or just to stick out his
stump behind him and kneel on the top of his wooden leg; therefore it is
no use to have a stump longer than a few inches; in fact, the longer the
stump is the more it is in the way. And more than this, many of the
stumps made near the ankle, or through the calf, are not only useless,
but positively painful. The skin becomes attached to the bones, the
cicatrix never properly firms at all, the patient can hardly bear the
pressure of a stocking, far less can he make use of the limb. For these
reasons, secondary amputations below the knee are of very common
occurrence.
Now, this idea has been much modified, and a few isolated cases in the
past, and series of cases considerably more numerous in the present day,
show that under certain conditions, and as a result of certain
precautions in their performance, such operations are both warrantable
and successful.
In the past, as we find in an erudite note in South's Chelius, Dionis,
White, and Bromfield had each of them many successful cases of
amputation just above the ankle, successful in so far that artificial
limbs could be used which preserved the motion of the knee, and gave
the patient much more command of the limb than is possible with the
short stump below the knee.
A still more important point to be remembered is, that amputation just
above the ankle is a much less fatal amputation than that just below the
knee (Lister in _Holmes's Surgery_, 3d ed. vol. iii. p. 716; Gross, 6th
ed. vol. ii. p. 1113; Ben. Bell, 6th edit. vol. vii. p. 312).
There is little doubt, however, that the principle so much in vogue in
the present day, of one long anterior or posterior flap, instead of two
equal flaps, or of circular amputations, has done very much to make
amputations at the ankle or through the calf justifiable and useful in
bearing the weight of the body.
AMPUTATION JUST ABOVE THE ANKLE.--Cases admitting of this operation must
always be rare, for disease of the tarsus or ankle-joint hardly ever
goes so far as to contra-indicate the performance of Mr. Syme's greatly
preferable operation; and an accident which would require this operation
from injury to the ankle would in most cases require an amputation a
good deal higher up from the splintering of the tibia so apt to occur.
In a suitable case the plan of the operation should be as follows:--A
long anterior flap slightly rounded at the end should be cut (Plate I.
figs. 15, 16)--from the outside, not by transfixion,--and the anterior
muscles dissected up along with it. It should be long enough to fall
down over the face of the bones at the point of section, and easily
cover the point of the posterior flap, which is to be made by cutting
through all the tissues with one bold transverse stroke of the knife.
This operation, which is the plan of Mr. Teale of Leeds very slightly
modified, is equally applicable at any point of the leg, with this
difference only, that the length of the anterior flap must always be
carefully proportioned to the mass of the muscular flap behind it has to
cover in.
This operation provides a skin covering, without any danger of the
cicatrix being pressed on or becoming adherent.
The author has within the last few years operated nine times in
this manner, in cases of accident in which the heel flaps had been
completely destroyed; and seen a tenth case in which Mr. Syme did
so. All ten cases recovered completely and rapidly, and walked on
useful limbs, with the free movement of the knee-joint.
Where from injury in a muscular patient a long anterior flap cannot be
had, recourse should be had at once to the operation at the seat of
election, rather than run the risk of pressure on the cicatrix by using
a double flap operation, or trust that broken reed, the long posterior
flap from the great muscles of the calf.
In June 1865, Mr. Henry Lee described a method of operating which he
hoped would unite the benefits of Mr. Teale's method to the ease of
performance of the old flap from the calf. I append a short account of
his method. From its position, however, it has the great disadvantage of
retaining the discharges, and by its weight straining the stitches and
weighing down the cicatrix:--
LEE'S AMPUTATION _of the Leg by a long rectangular flap from the
Calf_.--The operation described was performed according to Mr. Teale's
method, as far as the external incisions were concerned, but the long
flap was made from the back instead of from the front of the limb (Plate
IV. figs. 14, 15). Two parallel incisions were made along the sides of
the leg, these were met by a third transverse incision behind, which
joined the lower extremities of the first two. These incisions, which
formed the three sides of the square, extended through the skin and
cellular tissue only. A fourth incision was made transversely through
the skin in front of the leg so as to form a flap in this situation,
one-fourth only of the length of the posterior flap. When the skin had
somewhat retracted by its natural elasticity, an incision was made
through the parts situated in front of the bones, which were reflected
upwards to a level with the upper extremities of the first longitudinal
incisions. The deeper structures at the back of the leg were then freely
divided in the situation of the lower transverse incision. The conjoined
gastrocnemius and soleus muscles were separated from the subjacent
parts, and reflected as high as the anterior flap. The deeper layer of
muscles, together with the large vessels and nerves, were divided as
high as the incision would permit, and the bones sawn through in the
usual way. The flaps were then adjusted in the manner recommended by Mr.
Teale.[42]
The patients were able to bear the weight of the body on the end of the
stump.
In cases of chronic disease, where the muscles are atrophied and
condensed, the following posterior flap method may be used with
advantage. It is approved of by Mr. Spence. An incision is made across
the front of the leg from the _posterior edge_ of the fibula to the
_posterior edge_ of the tibia, or _vice versâ_, according to the limb.
The limb is then transfixed behind the bones from the same points, and a
long and gently rounded posterior flap cut. The bones are then cleaned,
and cut through at a little higher level.
AMPUTATION IMMEDIATELY BELOW THE KNEE _at the_ "_true seat of
election_."--The principles on which this operation is founded are--1.
That a muscular flap is not necessary, skin being perfectly sufficient;
2. That as the muscles retract they must be cut at a lower level than
the bones, and as they retract unequally from their varying length, the
cuts must be made with due reference to that inequality; 3. That no more
of the tibia need be retained than what is just sufficient to retain
the attachment of the ligamentum patellæ, and to insure its vitality; 4.
That the head of the fibula must be retained in every case, as in a
certain proportion the tibio-fibular articulation communicates with the
knee-joint.
_Operation._--Two equal semilunar flaps of skin must be cut--from the
outside, not by transfixion,--one anterior and external, the other
posterior and internal, their extremities meeting at points about two
inches below the tuberosity of the tibia on either side (Plate I. figs.
17, 18). These must be reflected up, and with them a further extent of
skin, embracing the whole circumference of the limb, must be dissected
up (as if pulling off the fingers of a glove), so as to expose the bone
one inch below the tuberosity. The anterior muscles being very close to
their origin, and consequently being able to retract very slightly, must
be cut as high as exposed, and the posterior ones about the middle of
their exposed surface.
The bones must then be sawn as high as exposed, with the following
precautions:--1. In order to prevent splintering of the fibula,
endeavour to saw it along with the tibia, so as to finish it first; 2.
To prevent projection of a sharp prominence of the edge of the tibia,
enter the saw obliquely a little higher up than where you intend to
divide the bone, then withdraw it, and enter the saw again at right
angles to the bone, and a line or two lower down. Some surgeons prefer
to make this section afterwards with a finer saw or the bone-pliers.
This operation is very frequently required to remedy painful and
unhealed stumps, the result of amputations lower down, specially those
in which the long posterior flap from the muscles of the calf has been
used. In the above amputation the patient will not be able to rest the
weight of his body on the _face_ of the stump, but by putting the limb
into a well-padded case with soft rounded edges, the weight might be
borne partly on the sides of the stump, and partly on the lower edge of
the patella; and the patient will be able to walk with great comfort,
preserving the use of his knee-joint.
AMPUTATION AT THE KNEE-JOINT.--This "relic of ancient surgery," as Mr.
Skey calls it, has been revived only of late years, and seems in certain
cases to be a justifiable and successful operation.
Practised by Fabricius Hildanus and Guillemeau in the sixteenth and
seventeenth centuries, it had fallen into disuse till revived by Hoin,
Velpeau, and Baudens, on the Continent, Professor Nathan Smith in
America, and Mr. Lane in London.
It is not possible that this operation can be at all frequent, since the
cases in which it is applicable are comparatively rare; for, to be
successful, the following conditions are essential:--1. That there be
abundant skin in front of the knee-joint to make a long anterior flap;
2. That the patella and articular surface of the femur are healthy.
These conditions at once exclude nearly every case of disease or
accident. If the joint is diseased some amputation through the thigh
must be attempted; if injured, and the front of the knee is safe, it may
very likely be possible to amputate below the knee. Hence this operation
may be useful in cases where, for malignant disease, the _whole_ tibia
requires removal, and yet the knee-joint is sound, or for gunshot
injuries, in which the tibia is splintered but the soft tissues
comparatively uninjured.
_Operation._--A long anterior flap should be cut with a semilunar end
(Plate II. figs. 6, 7), extending as far as the insertion of the
ligamentum patellæ. This flap, including the patella, should be thrown
up, the joint cut into, and a short posterior flap made by transfixion.
It is important to retain the patella, if possible, as it fills up the
hollow between the condyles; it sometimes becomes anchylosed, but in
other cases it remains freely mobile, and adds to the value of the
stump.
Professor Pancoast has practised an amputation at the knee-joint by
three flaps, performed entirely by the scalpel, which, he says, results
in a good stump. One flap, the anterior one, is longest and semilunar in
shape, its convexity passing three inches below the tuberosity of the
tibia; the other two are much smaller, and postero-lateral.[43]
_Advantages._--The bone is not cut into at all, there is a free drain
for matter, no tendency to retraction of the flaps, and the weight of
the body is borne on skin previously habituated to pressure.
The statistics seem to be favourable: out of 55 cases, Continental,
American, and English, 21 died, a mortality of 38 per cent., while
in a table of 1055 cases of amputation of the thigh, 464 died,
being a mortality of 44 per cent. In some of the American cases the
articulating extremity of the femur seems to have been removed, as
in the following operation:--
AMPUTATION THROUGH THE CONDYLES OF THE FEMUR.--In the _London and
Edinburgh Journal of Medical Science_ for 1845, Mr. Syme advocated a
method of amputation through the condyles of the femur as specially
suitable in case of diseased knee-joint. Amputation at this spot has
certain advantages:--1. The shaft of the bone being untouched, there is
no injury of the medullary cavity, and hence no fear of inflammation of
its lining membrane. 2. There is less risk of exfoliation, the
cancellated texture of the epiphysis not being liable to it. 3. Being
close to the joint, the muscles are cut through where they are
tendinous, thus very much diminishing the risk of retraction and
consequent protrusion of the bone. 4. A large broad surface of bone is
left to bear the weight of the body, and one which, like the ankle-joint
stump, will round off and afford a comfortable pad over which the skin
of the flap will freely play.
One objection used to be urged against this mode of operating, the fear
lest the thickened, brawny, and often ulcerated textures in the
neighbourhood of a diseased knee-joint, would not make a good covering.
This, however, is no longer a bugbear, as we see in cases of resection,
where the diseased joint alone is taken away, how very soon all swelling
and disease departs, once its cause is removed.
Mr. Syme's original operation was briefly as follows:--With an ordinary
amputating-knife make a lunated incision (Plate I. fig. 19) from one
condyle to the other, across the front of the joint, on a level with the
middle of the patella, divide the tissues down to the bones, and then
draw the flap upwards, then cut the quadriceps extensor immediately
above the patella. The point of the blade should then be pushed in at
one end of the wound, thrust behind the femur, and made to appear at the
other end; it should then be carried downwards (Plate III. fig. 5), so
as to make a flap from the calf of the leg, about six or eight inches in
length, in proportion to the thickness of the limb; the flap should then
be slightly retracted, and the knife carried round the bone a little
above the condyles to clear a way for the saw, which should be applied
so as to leave the section as horizontal as possible.
This method is now hardly ever used, as the following seems a much
better one:--
GRITTI'S[44] AMPUTATION.--In this two flaps are formed--an anterior long
one rectangular and a posterior short one. The condyles of the femur are
divided through their base, and the lower surface of patella is removed
by a small saw, and then the surfaces of bone approximated.
STOKES'S[45] MODIFICATION OF GRITTI'S AMPUTATION.--In this
"supracondyloid" amputation, the femur is sawn just above the condyles,
without going into the medullary canal. The anterior flap is oval, twice
as long as posterior, and the patella is brought up after denudation
against end of femur.
CARDEN'S AMPUTATION AT THE CONDYLES OF THE FEMUR.[46]--The operation
consists in reflecting a rounded or semi-oval flap of skin and fat from
the front of the knee-joint, dividing everything else straight down to
the bone, and sawing the bone slightly above the plane of the muscles,
thus forming a flat-faced stump, with a bonnet of integument to fall
over it.
The operator standing on the right side of the limb, seizes it between
his left forefinger and thumb at the spot selected for the base of the
flap, and enters (Plate II. fig. 8) the point of the knife close to his
finger, bringing it round through skin and fat below the patella to the
spot pressed by his thumb; then turning the edge downwards at a right
angle with the line of the limb, he passes it through to the spot where
it first entered, cutting outwards through everything behind the bone
(Plate IV. fig. 16). The flap is then reflected, and the remainder of
the soft parts divided straight down to the bone; the muscles are then
slightly cleared upwards, and I saw it applied.
I have ventured to make a slight change in the method of performing this
most excellent operation, for having found the posterior flap, as cut in
the method above described, rather scanty in the earlier cases in which
I have had occasion to perform it, after dissecting back the anterior
flap and cutting into the knee-joint, I shape a slightly convex
posterior flap of skin only, at least one and a half inches in length
in adult, and allow it to retract before dividing the muscles by a
circular cut to the bone, and have had every reason to be satisfied with
the change.
AMPUTATION OF THE THIGH.--Amputation of the thigh has been the favourite
battle-ground where flap and circular, antero-posterior and lateral,
long and short flaps, double, triple, and conical incisions, have
striven with each other; so were I to attempt to describe one quarter of
the various methods employed, I should need to rewrite the history of
Amputation.
It will suffice merely to describe the _best_ modes of amputating the
thigh through its lower, middle, and upper thirds respectively, and at
the hip-joint.
In one word, it may be stated that, with the exception of those
amputations performed through the lower third of the bone, the flap
method is to be preferred, and the flaps should in almost every case be
made by transfixion.
In the lower third, however, the flap method, though exceedingly easy,
and capable of very rapid performance, has certain defects; the chief of
these being the tendency which the muscular flaps (the necessary result
of transfixion) have to cause undue retraction, and hence protrusion of
the bone. This is seen specially in the hamstrings, which from the great
distance of their origin, and the purely longitudinal direction of their
fibres, retract to a very great extent, much more than the anterior
muscles can do from the pennate direction of their fibres, and the
manner in which they are mutually bound down to each other and to the
bone.
Even in this one position, the lower third of the thigh, the methods
that may be needed are various, and require separate notice;--for
operations here are extremely frequent from the frequency of strumous
disease of the knee-joint in our variable climate, and from the fact
that compound fractures or dislocations of the knee-joint so very often
necessitate amputation.
In cases where the skin over the patella is uninjured and available, the
operation by long anterior flap (either by Teale's method, or by Mr.
Spence's modification of it, which curiously is almost exactly similar
to the amputation of Benjamin Bell by a single flap) is suitable enough.
But, I believe, preferable to either of these is the operation of Mr.
Carden, already described. In cases where the knee-joint is injured, and
the skin over the patella unavailable, and yet where it is not necessary
to go higher up the limb, the modified circular amputation of Mr. Syme
will be found very suitable.
As it is in this lower third of the thigh that a very large proportion
of the cases requiring a long anterior flap is to be found, it affords
the best opportunity for comparing in their detail the three almost
similar plans of B. Bell, Teale, and Spence--after which Mr. Syme's
modified circular may be described.
BENJAMIN BELL'S FLAP OPERATION ABOVE THE KNEE (reported in his own
words, slightly abbreviated).--"When this operation is to be performed
above the knee, it may be done either with one or two flaps, but it will
commonly succeed best with one. The flap answers best on the fore part
of the thigh, for here there is a sufficiency of the parts for covering
the bones, and the matter passes more freely off than when the flap is
formed behind.... The extreme point of the flap should reach to the end
of the limb, unless the teguments are in any part diseased, in which
case it must terminate where the disease begins, and its base should be
where the bone is to be sawn. This will determine the length of the
flap, and we should be directed with respect to the breadth of it by the
circumference of the limb, for the diameter of a circle being somewhat
less than a third of its circumference, although a limb may not be
exactly circular, yet by attention to this we may ascertain with
sufficient exactness the size of a flap for covering a stump (Plate IV.
fig. 17). Thus a flap of four inches and a quarter in length will reach
completely across a stump whose circumference is twelve inches; but as
some allowance must be made for the quantity of skin and muscles that
may be saved on the opposite side of the limb, by cutting them in the
manner I have directed, and drawing them up before sawing the bone, and
as it is a point of importance to leave the limb as long as possible,
instead of four inches and a quarter, a limb of this size, when the
first incision is managed in this manner, will not require a flap longer
than three inches and a quarter, and so in proportion, according to the
size of the limb. The flap at its base should be as broad as the breadth
of the limb will permit, and should be continued nearly, although not
altogether, of the same breadth till within a little of its termination,
where it should be rounded off so as to correspond as exactly as may be
with the figure of the sore on the back part of the limb. This being
marked out, the surgeon, standing on the outside of the limb, should
push a straight double-edged knife with a sharp point to the depth of
the bone, by entering the point of it at the outside of the base of the
intended flap; and carrying the point close to the bone, it must here be
pushed through the teguments at the mark on the opposite side. The edge
of the knife must now be carried downwards in such a direction as to
form the flap, according to the figure marked out; and as it draws
toward the end, the edge of it should be somewhat raised from the bone,
so as to make the extremity of the flap thinner than the base, by which
it will apply with more neatness to the surface of the sore. The flap
being supported by an assistant, the teguments and muscles of the other
parts of the limb should, by one stroke of the knife, be cut down to
the bone, about an inch beneath where the bone is to be sawn; and the
muscles being separated to this height from the bone with the point of a
knife, the soft parts must all be supported with the leather retractors
till the bone is sawn," etc., arteries tied, and dressings applied.[47]
AMPUTATION OF THIGH BY RECTANGULAR FLAP--(Teale's).--I take the
opportunity here of describing fully, and as far as possible in his own
words, Mr. Teale's method of amputating, this being the situation where
his method is most frequently available. The same principle may be
applied to amputations at almost any other part of the body.
After advising the surgeon to mark out the proposed line of incision
with ink before the operation, he gives the following directions for
fixing the exact size of the flap:--"Supposing the amputation to take
place (Plate II. figs. 9, 10) at the lower part of the middle third of
the thigh, the circumference of the limb is to be measured at the point
where the bone is to be divided.[48] Assuming this to be sixteen inches,
the long flap is to have its length and breadth each equal to half the
circumference, namely, eight inches. Two longitudinal lines of this
extent are then traced on the limb, and are met at their lower points by
a transverse line of the same length. The inner longitudinal line should
be first traced in ink as near as practicable to the femoral vessels,
without including them within the range of the long flap. The outer
longitudinal line, which is somewhat posterior, is next marked eight
inches distant from the former and parallel to it. These two lines are
then joined by a transverse line of the same extent, which falls upon
the upper border of the patella, or upon some lower portion of this
bone. The short flap is indicated by a transverse line passing behind
the thigh, the length of this flap being one-fourth that of the long
one; or, assuming the circumference of the limb to be sixteen inches,
and the length of the long flap eight inches, the length of the short
flap is two inches. The operator begins by making the two lateral
incisions of the long flap through the _integuments only_. The
transverse incision of this flap, supposing it to run along the upper
edge of the patella, is made by a free sweep of the knife through the
skin and tendinous structures down to the femur. Should the lower
transverse line of the flap fall across the middle or lower part of the
patella, the transverse incision can extend through the skin only, which
must be dissected up as far as the upper border of the patella, at which
place the tendinous structures are to be cut direct to the thigh-bone.
The flap is completed by cutting the fleshy structures from below
upwards close to the bone. The posterior short flap, containing the
large vessels and nerves, is made by _one sweep_ of the knife down to
the bone, the soft parts being afterwards separated from the bone close
to the periosteum, as far upwards as the intended place of sawing.... In
adjusting the flaps, the long one is folded over the end of the bone,
and brought, by its transverse line, into union with the short flap, the
two corresponding free angles of each being first united by suture. One
or two additional stitches complete the transverse line of union. Care
is now required in arranging the two lateral lines of union. As the long
flap is folded upon itself so as to form a kind of pouch for the end of
the bone, it is requisite that it should be held in its folded state by
a point of suture on each side. Another stitch on each side secures the
lateral line of the short flap to the corresponding part of the long
one. A longitudinal line of union thus passes at right angles each end
of the transverse line."[49]
Mr. Teale's account of the resulting stumps is too long to quote entire,
but in a few words, we find that by retraction of the short posterior
flap, the cicatrix is drawn up quite behind and out of the way of the
bone, that a soft mass without any large nerves or vessels is the result
of the partial atrophy of the long flap, and that the patient is able to
bear one-half, two-thirds, or even in some cases the entire weight of
his body on the face of the stump. Such a power of support is to be
found in no other flap except in Mr. Syme's amputation at the
ankle-joint.
SPENCE'S AMPUTATION BY A LONG ANTERIOR FLAP.[50]--The method used by Mr.
Spence in amputations just above the knee-joint obtains the advantages
of Teale's method, and avoids many of its disadvantages. He makes two
flaps. The anterior one, which is to fall loosely over and cover in the
posterior segment of the stump, must have a breadth fully equal to
one-half of the circumference of the limb, and must be gently rounded at
its extremity, so as to adjust itself readily to the curve of the cut
margin of the posterior half of the stump. He begins the anterior
incision below, or on a level with, the lower margin of the patella, and
when the skin is retracted to a little above the patella, cuts down
_obliquely_ to the bone, so as to divide the soft parts up to the base
of the flap. For the posterior incision, he begins about two
fingers'-breadth below the base of the anterior flap, and the assistant
retracting the skin, the edge of the knife is carried obliquely up to
the bone (in Alanson's manner) and the posterior soft parts divided, the
bone is sawn through--or immediately above--the condyloid portion. Mr.
Spence does not advise or practise this method high up. The results are
good, for by these means the end of the bone has a thick covering,
including muscular fibres, over it, and the cicatrix is not pressed
upon in walking. The stump remains full, mobile, and fleshy, as in Mr.
Teale's method, without the disadvantage which it has, in requiring the
bone to be divided so far above the seat of injury or disease. This is
an exceedingly good method of operating in the lower third of the thigh,
in muscular patients the very best, and in all cases only equalled in
value by Carden's method.
The next is now hardly ever used here, except in cases where the skin
over the patella is destroyed.
MODIFIED CIRCULAR AT LOWER THIRD OF THIGH (Syme's).--Two equal semilunar
flaps of skin should be cut (Plate I. fig. 20, Plate III. fig. 6), one
anterior, the other posterior, their convexities being towards the knee.
The skin and subcutaneous cellular tissue should be raised from the
fascia, and then retracted to a further distance of at least two inches;
the muscles should then be divided right down to the bone, on a level as
high as they are exposed in front, and as low as they are exposed
behind. This allows for the different amount of retraction at the two
sides of the limb, and leaves the muscles cut on a level; the whole mass
of muscles should then be drawn well up, and the bone exposed, and sawn
through at a level about two inches higher than where it was first
exposed by the anterior incision through the muscles.
In very weak thin flabby limbs this process may be simplified by just at
once including the muscles in the skin flaps, and carefully exposing the
bone higher up. In performing the retraction the assistant should be
cautioned not to overdo it, lest he strip the periosteum from the bone
higher than is necessary. This is very easy to do in the weak limbs of
strumous patients, and may cause exfoliation, and greatly delay cure.
AMPUTATION IN THE MIDDLE THIRD OF THE THIGH.--A very short notice will
suffice here. The exact position, shape, and size of the flaps must in
every case be modified by the nature of the injury for which the
operation is performed, taking the flaps where they can be obtained. As
a general rule, a long anterior flap with a short posterior, on the
principle described above, should be preferred. In cases where the long
anterior cannot be obtained, two equal flaps should be made by
transfixion. The flaps should always be antero-posterior, the lateral
flaps introduced by Vermale, and indorsed by Chelius and Erichsen,
having the great disadvantage of allowing the bone, which is drawn up by
the psoas and iliacus, to project at the upper angle.
Supposing the right thigh is to be amputated, the surgeon, standing on
the inside of the leg, should raise the skin and muscles of the front of
the limb in his left hand, and entering the knife just in front of the
vessels, should transfix the limb, the knife passing in front of the
bone, and including as nearly as possible an exact half of the limb
(Plate IV. fig. 19); having by a sawing motion brought out the knife and
cut a flap of the required length, the knife is re-entered at the same
place, and passing behind the bone, the point must be brought out at the
angle on the other side. Both flaps being then held back by an
assistant, the bone is cleared by a circular turn of the knife, and the
saw applied, the vessels are found cut high up in the inner angle of the
posterior flap.
In muscular patients it is often better to make the incision through the
skin first and allow it to retract before transfixing; this is slower
and not so brilliant looking, but avoids redundancy of muscle.
AMPUTATION AT THE HIP-JOINT.--This operation, exceedingly dangerous from
the amount of the body removed, the great hæmorrhage, and the risk of
pyæmia, is of comparatively modern invention. Though the proportion of
recoveries is at present to that of deaths about one to two or two and a
half, it is still a perfectly justifiable operation in many cases of
disease and injury.
Like amputation at the shoulder, amputation at the hip has given rise to
very many various methods of performance. Under the heads of single
flap, double flap, oval, circular, and mixed flap and circular, at least
twenty distinct methods have been put on record, and, including
modifications, there are thirty-seven or thirty-eight different surgeons
who have each their own plan of operation.
The reason of this fearful complexity in its literature depends on this
fact, that this amputation has generally been performed for cases of
such severe injury of the limb, that no milder amputation was possible,
and thus the flaps had to be taken just where the surgeon could get them
best. And this will have to be the guiding principle in most amputations
at this joint; the surgeon must just cut his coat according to his
cloth--get his flaps where and how he can.
In cases, however, where it is possible to have a choice, and to select
the flaps, the following is, I believe, both the best and quickest
method:--
This is one of the very few operations in which quickness of performance
is a desideratum; the use of anæsthetics has, in most other cases, given
time for elaboration of flaps, and careful dissection; here the risk of
loss of blood, specially from the posterior flap, renders rapid
disarticulation imperative.
_Amputation by double flap, anterior the longer._--In hip-joint
amputations, besides the ordinary sponge-squeezers, two assistants are
necessary, whose duties are exceedingly important.
The first is to check hæmorrhage. Pressing with a firm pad on the
external iliac just as it passes the bone, he must be prepared, the
instant the anterior flap is cut, to follow the knife and seize flap and
artery in his hand, and he is to hold it there till all the vessels in
the posterior flap are first tied.
The second has to manage the limb, and on the manner in which he
performs his duty much of the success and nearly all the celerity of the
operation depend. While the surgeon is transfixing the anterior flap,
this assistant is to support the limb in a slightly flexed position, so
as to relax the muscles; the instant the flap is cut he is to extend the
limb forcibly, and at the same time be careful not to abduct it in the
least, but to turn the toes inward so as to bring the great trochanter
well forwards on a level with the joint; if this precaution is
neglected, the operator in making the posterior flap is almost certain
to lock his knife in the hollow between the head of the bone and the
great trochanter.
If it is the left side, the operator, standing on the outside of the
limb, enters the point of a long straight knife midway between the
anterior superior spinous process of the ilium and the great trochanter,
and passes it as close to the front of the joint as possible, making the
point emerge close to the tuberosity of the ischium (Plate IV. fig.
20-20). With a rapid sawing movement he then cuts a long anterior flap,
avoiding any pointing of it, and endeavouring to make the curve equal.
The fingers of the assistant must be inserted so as to follow the knife
and seize the vessel even before it is divided. The flap being raised
out of the way, the surgeon, without changing his knife (as used to be
advised), opens the joint, divides the ligaments as they start up on the
limb being extended and adducted, the round ligament, and the posterior
part of the capsule; and then getting the knife fairly behind both the
head of the bone and the trochanter, cuts the posterior flap as rapidly
as possible. Instantly on the limb being separated, assistants should
be ready with large dry sponges or pads of dry lint to press against the
surface of the posterior flap, till the large branches, chiefly of the
internal iliac, which are cut in it, are tied one by one.
The lever invented by Mr. Richard Davy, by which the common iliac is
compressed from the rectum, has in many cases proved of great service in
preventing hæmorrhage, but has dangers of its own in cases of abnormal
position of rectum, or even in sudden movements of the patient.
In every case the abdominal tourniquet will be found of great service in
checking hæmorrhage, during the operation of amputation at the
hip-joint. It consists of an arch of steel fitted with a pad behind,
which rests against the vertebral column, and a pad in front playing on
a very fine and long screw, through an opening in the arch. When screwed
down tightly on the aorta just before the incisions are commenced, it
checks hæmorrhage admirably without injuring the viscera. When this is
applied, a method of amputation once practised by Mr. Syme, though not
so rapid as the double-flap method by transfixion, will be found very
easy, and to result in most excellent flaps. He cut an anterior flap in
the usual manner by transfixion, then made a straight incision from its
outer edge down to about two inches below the great trochanter, thus
exposing it fully, and from the lower end of this incision transfixed
again, cutting a posterior flap nearly equal in size to the anterior; a
few strokes of the knife round the joint finished the disarticulation.
The resulting flaps came together with great accuracy, and were not
burdened with the great unequal masses of muscles so often noticed in
the posterior flaps which are made by cutting from within outwards
_after_ disarticulation.
In some cases of amputation where the femur has been badly shattered, it
is a good plan to amputate through the upper third of thigh, tie all the
vessels, and then, aided by an incision at outer side, dissect out the
head of the bone.
Mr. Furneaux Jordan of Birmingham carries out this principle by first
dividing the soft parts in circular direction low down the thigh, and
then dissecting out the head of the bone from the muscles by a long
incision on the outer aspect of the limb.
_Note._--In severe cases of smash when both lower limbs have
required amputation, the author has derived much assistance from
the method of managing the operation detailed below:--
_Double Primary Amputation of (both) Thighs from railway
smash_--_Rapid recovery._--G., a healthy-looking man, aged
twenty-seven, but looking much older, while driving a horse near
Granton, caught his foot on the edge of a rail at a point, fell,
and both his legs were run over by several loaded wagons. A special
engine was procured, his thighs tightly tied up, and he was sent up
to hospital at once.
I was in hospital at the time, so with as little delay as possible
he was placed on the operating table, and the necessity for
amputation being too evident, I obtained his leave to remove both
his legs above the knee; but his pulse was very feeble, and he was
intensely nervous, throwing his arms wildly about, panting for
breath, and looking very ill, cold, and exhausted.
I determined that by great rapidity he might be got off the table
alive, so operated in the following manner:--Fixing the tourniquet
firmly near both groins, I first amputated the right leg by
Carden's method, and tied the femoral only, wrapped up the stump in
a towel wrung out of carbolic solution 1-20, then took off the
other limb by Mr. Spence's method,--it had been injured higher than
the right, so that I could not save the condyles of the
femur,--then tied the femoral there, and fixed it up with another
towel; then returning to the first, I tied one or two large
branches which spouted, and rolled it up again, then back to the
left one, doing the same, and getting the tourniquet off both
limbs. On going back to the right the surface was nearly dry and
glazed, so, asking Dr. Maclaren, who assisted me, to stitch it up
and insert a drainage-tube, I did the same for the left, so rapidly
that the patient was in his bed with his limbs dressed and bandaged
in 24-1/2 minutes from the time he entered the hospital gate.
The strictest antiseptic precautions were observed, two engines
being used to furnish spray. Of course this great rapidity was due
to the fact that everything was ready, the assistants all in
hospital, admirably disciplined, and steam had been up in the spray
engines. Shock was comparatively trivial; his temperature once, and
only once, reached 100°. His stumps healed by first intention, and
he was in the garden on the seventh day after the operation.
I have now in three cases found the benefit of this mode of dealing
with double primary amputation in avoiding shock, lessening the
time needed, and greatly diminishing the number of vessels
requiring to be tied. In a previous case of double amputation for
railway smash at the knees, the patient was almost pulseless, and
had he been kept many minutes more on the table would not have left
it alive. He also rapidly recovered.
The case is interesting also as showing that, when the assistants
know their work, the strictest adherence to antiseptic precautions
need not in itself make either the operation or the dressing
tedious, though it can easily be made an excuse for much fussing
and many delays.[51]
FOOTNOTES:
[24] For details see article "Amputation" in Cooper's _Surgical
Dictionary_, and the short sketch of the history in Mr. Lister's paper
in the third volume of Holmes's _System of Surgery_.
[25] See a most interesting foot-note to Professor Lister's paper on
"Amputation," in Holmes's _System of Surgery_, vol. iii. pp. 52, 53.
[26] _Manuel d'Opérations chirurgicales._
[27] FIG. IV. shows dorsal view of incision. FIG. III. shows face of
completed stump; R, radial; U, ulnar.
[28] As the surgeon will find it most convenient to stand on his own
right side of the limb to be removed, the knife will be entered on the
palmar side of the radius of the right arm, of the ulna of the left.
[29] Teale, _On Amputation by Rectangular Flaps_, pp. 46-48.
[30] Johnson's folio ed., p. 342.
[31] Gross's _Surgery_, 6th ed. vol. ii. p. 1103.
[32] _International Encyclopædia of Surgery_, vol. i. p. 641.
[33] Spence's _Surgery_, pp. 800, 801.
[34] Gross's _Surgery_, 8vo., 6th ed., vol. ii., p. 1106.
[35] _Excision of Scapula_, p. 33.
[36] Hey's _Observations_, 3d ed. pp. 552, 556.
[37] Roux's _Parallel between English and French Surgery_. Translation
abridged from Cooper's _Surgical Dictionary_, p. 106.
[38] Syme's _Principles_, 4th edit. p. 145.
[39] _International Encyclopædia_, vol. 1. p. 655.
[40] _Observations in Clin. Surgery_, p. 48.
[41] _Monthly Journal of Medical Science for 1849_, vol. ix. p. 951.
[42] _Med. Times and Gazette_, June 3, 1865.
[43] _Operative Surgery_, p. 170.
[44] _Annali Universali de Medicina_, Milano, 1857.
[45] _Med. Chir. Transactions of London_, vol. liii., p. 175.
[46] Carden's (of Worcester) Pamphlet, pp. 5, 6; and _British Medical
Journal_, 1864.
[47] B. Bell's _Surgery_, 6th ed. vol. vii. pp. 336-339.
[48] In diagram the amputation is drawn as if for middle third of thigh.
[49] Teale, _op. cit._, pp. 34, 39.
[50] _Edin. Med. Journal_, for April 1863.
[51] _Edin. Medical Journal_, March 1879.
CHAPTER III.
EXCISION OF JOINTS.
_Historical._--Beyond a passage ascribed to Hippocrates, but of very
doubtful authenticity, and slight allusions in the works of Celsus and
Paulus Ægineta, the ancients give us no information whatever on this
subject.
Hippocrates says,--"Complete resections of bones in the neighbourhood of
joints both in the foot, in the hand, in the tibia up to the malleoli,
and in the ulna at its junction with the hand, and in many other places,
are safe operations, if that fatal syncope does not at once occur, and
continued fever does not attack the patient on the fourth day."
Celsus and Ægineta both advise the removal of protruding ends of bone in
compound dislocations, but without giving any cases.
From the days of these classic fathers of Surgery, we have hardly an
indication of any attention whatever having been paid to their hints
till quite within the last hundred years.
The first distinct publication on the subject was by Henry Park of
Liverpool, in a letter to Percival Pott in 1783. He proposed the removal
of the articulating extremities of diseased elbow and knee-joints to
obtain cures. He says he was led to this by its having been the
invariable custom, for more than thirty years, at the Liverpool
Infirmary, to take off the protruded extremities of bones in cases of
compound dislocation.
The chief credit, however, in practically elevating excisions into the
catalogue of recognised surgical operations, is owing, British surgeons
most cordially own, to two provincial surgeons of France, the Moreaus
(father and son) of Bar-sur-Ornain. They took the lead in the most
marked manner, having excised the shoulder in 1786, the wrist and elbow
in 1794, knee and ankle in 1792, and had followed this up so well that,
in 1803, the younger Moreau could boast, "the town has become in some
sort the refuge of the unfortunate afflicted with carious joints, after
they have tried all the means usually recommended by professional men,
or have had recourse to empirical nostrums, or when amputation seemed to
them the last resource."
Moreau's papers and cases, which, between 1786 and 1789, he frequently
read to the French Academy, were, some violently opposed, others utterly
neglected by his compatriots, and many of them lost and buried in the
unpublished papers of that body.
And though diseased joints did not decline in frequency, and though
injured ones were extremely numerous during these long years of European
war, excisions were but rarely performed.
With the exception of the removal of head of humerus after gunshot
injury, hardly any British, and but very few French, limbs were saved by
excision taking the place of amputation.
The limbs that were saved by Percy by excision of the head of the
humerus really owe their recovery and safety to the elder Moreau; for an
operation of his, at which he was assisted by that distinguished
military surgeon, gave the latter the hint, which he followed so
successfully, that by 1795 he had performed it nineteen times, and had
indoctrinated Sabatier, Larrey, and others, and elevated it into a
recognised operation of military surgery.
So far, however, as the application of the great improvement of the
Moreaus to disease went, the French surgeons have little reason to
boast, for it is to English surgery, and especially to one Edinburgh
surgeon, that this class of operations owes nearly all its improvement
in methods and frequency of performance.
For though (as we shall see under the special heads) here and there one
or two cases were performed, it was not till the publication of Mr.
Syme's monograph on the excision of diseased joints, in 1831, that the
importance and value of the discovery were fairly brought before the
profession; and the conservative surgery, of which excision as preferred
to amputation is the great type, must ever be associated with British
surgeons--Syme, Fergusson, Mackenzie, Jones of Jersey, Butcher of
Dublin.
On the Continent--Langenbeck, Stromeyer, Heyfelder, Ollier, Esmarch of
Kiel, specially in the surgical history of the first Schleswig-Holstein
war, have followed up the example set them here.
Before proceeding to describe the operations on the various joints, one
or two questions may be briefly asked and answered by way of
introduction.
In what cases, or sorts of cases, are excisions suitable?
1. In cases of compound injury or dislocation of a large joint, as used
by Filkin, Park, White, and other English surgeons long ago. In hospital
practice, or in private, where there is every advantage of rest, food,
and appliances, such operations will frequently be found suitable where
the joint is alone or chiefly the seat of injury, and where the general
health seems fit to bear a prolonged suppuration. But long and sad
experience has shown that, as a general rule in military practice, with
the difficulties of transport, the generally bad sanitary state of the
hospitals, and the want often of adequate dressings and attention,
excisions are much more fatal than amputations, and, except in elbow and
shoulder (_q.v._), should be as a general rule avoided.
2. Excision for deformity (generally speaking for bony anchylosis) will
require for decision the consideration of many points, _i.e._ the joint
affected, the nature of the disease or injury which has caused the
anchylosis: and in each case--(1.) the state of health of the patient;
and (2.) his occupation, and the consequent position of limb which would
suit him best. As a general rule, I believe, experience will prove that
such operations on the lower extremity are almost absolutely
inadmissible, except under very special urgency on the part of the
patient, and a very high condition of health--while in the upper, the
elbow-joint is the only one which you will ever be likely to be asked to
remedy, or should comply with the request if asked; as the shoulder,
even if anchylosed, will (1.) from its own weight generally become so in
the most favourable position; and (2.) from the extreme mobility which
the scapula can acquire, its anchylosis will not be so much felt.
The elbow, however, from the frequency of fractures of the condyles of
the humerus obliquely into the joint, and from the manner in which these
are so often neither recognised nor properly treated, very often becomes
anchylosed in the most awkward possible position, _i.e._ nearly
straight; and operations undertaken for such deformities are in general
both quite safe and very satisfactory. Mr. Syme had one case (resulting
from a fall, causing a double fracture), in which both arms were thus
firmly anchylosed in such a position that the sufferer could absolutely
perform none of the commonest duties of life without assistance.
Excision of both joints cured him.
The author excised with success for disease the elbow-joint of a patient
whose other arm had required the same operation.
The occupation of the patient must always be taken into consideration
when settling the position of an anchylosis, or the necessity or
advantage of a resection.
Thus, Bryant[52] tells of a painter who wished his arm to be fixed in a
straight position, and of a turner whose knee at his own request was
permitted to stiffen at a right angle, as that position allowed him to
turn his wheel.
3. _Excision for Disease of the Joint._--In our cold climate, so cursed
by scrofula, and specially among the children of the labouring poor,
such joint diseases are very prevalent, and whether the disease
commences in the synovial membrane, the articular cartilages, or the
heads of the bones, it frequently so disorganises the joint as to make
it a question whether something must not be done to preserve the very
life of the patient.
The difficulty of diagnosing the cases in which excisions are suitable
or necessary is often very great; and we must balance its
performance--(1.) against the possibly good results of an expectant
treatment; (2.) against amputation of the limb.
(1.) _Against expectant Treatment._--The patient has youth on his side,
could we give him fresh sea air, good diet, cod oil, etc., we might very
likely obtain anchylosis; true, but he may die while trying for this
anchylosis, and also this anchylosis, when got, may so lame or deform
him that resection may still be required.
These points must all be considered, but as a general rule, I would say
that such attempts at preservation of the limb are much more
justifiable, and longer justifiable in the hip and knee-joints than in
the elbow or shoulder; for the results in the lower limb will probably
be as good, if the patient survive, if not better, than those obtained
by excision, while the danger of the operation is greater; while in the
upper limb, the danger to life in operating is less than that of leaving
the limb on, and the results obtained by a successful operation, with
well-managed after treatment, are far more satisfactory than the best
possible anchylosis.
Another point bearing on this, of very great importance: In children,
the most frequent subjects of such disease, excision of the lower limb
may, by removing the epiphyses, cause to a very considerable degree
disparity in their length, thus rendering them nearly useless, while in
the upper such disparity is neither so extensive nor so injurious to the
usefulness of the limb, which is not required for purposes of
progression.
In the hip-joint especially, all the resources of the art should be
tried in the expectant treatment, for amputation at the hip-joint is
hardly ever admissible for disease of the joint, while excision has
anything but satisfactory statistics.
(2.) _Against Amputation._--Many questions must be considered, chiefly
under the heads of the separate joints:--
1. As to the difficulties and dangers of the operations contrasted.
Such as the following:--
Excisions give the surgeon more trouble, require more manual dexterity;
take longer to perform; are very painful operations. Not valid
objections in these days of chloroform and operative surgery on the dead
body.
Excisions have the special peculiarity and danger of dealing chiefly
with cancellated bone, broadened out, open, with numerous patulous
canals for large veins, tending on any irritation or inflammation to set
up a diffuse suppuration, and to culminate in phlebitis, myelitis, and
other pyæmic conditions.
Excisions are performed through degenerate or disorganised, amputations
through healthy, tissue.
Excisions require extreme care and absolute rest (_i.e._ in lower limb)
for many weeks and months after the operation.
But, on the other hand,--
Amputations remove a portion of the body; excisions a much less one.
Amputations are always necessarily nearer the centre than the
corresponding excisions, and statistics show that the fatality of
operations increases in exact proportion as they approach the centre.
A successful excision, especially in arm, saves a limb nearly perfect;
an amputation at best is only the stump for a wooden one.
On the whole, there is actually very little difference in the mortality
of excisions and amputations.
2. As to the results of the operation on the usefulness of the limb,
depending on joint involved, age of patient, and amount of bone
removed:--
A. _Joint involved._--These must be noticed separately, but one thing is
absolutely certain, that a much higher standard of usefulness, both in
equality of length, amount of anchylosis, and position, is needed in the
lower than in the upper limb. For a leg hanging like a flail, or
shortened by some inches, is not so good for purposes of locomotion as a
wooden leg is, while an arm, even though powerless at the elbow, and
perhaps much shortened, can be so strengthened and supported by slings
and bandages as to give a most useful hand, the complex movements and
uses of the fingers of which no mechanism can at all imitate.
B. _Age of Patient._--It must be remembered that excision in a child
removes the epiphyses by which in great measure the growth of the bone
is to be managed, and the stunted limb, especially in the leg, will
eventually be of little advantage, though after the operation it looked
excellently well, if a few years later it be found to be seven or eight
inches shorter than its neighbour.
C. _Amount of Bone removed._--From an erroneous view of the pathological
changes in the bone affected, far too much was removed by many of the
earlier operators, especially Moreau and Crampton.
The reason that this is often still the case, is well seen in many
preparations. The bones are thickened to a considerable distance, and
covered with irregular warty excrescences. These, which used to be
considered evidences of disease, are only compact new healthy bone,
thrown out like the callus of a fracture in consequence of the
irritation.
In a word, what we require to remove is the following:--
1. All the cartilage, dead or alive, healthy or diseased.
2. Only the bone involving the articular extremities, in thin slices, or
with the occasional use of the gouge, till a healthy bleeding surface is
obtained.
3. The synovial membrane, however gelatinous or thickened looking,
really requires very little care or notice; it will disappear of itself,
partly by sloughing, partly by absorption during the profuse
suppuration.[53]
EXCISION OF THE SHOULDER-JOINT.--Before considering the method of
operating, a word or two is required on the subject of how much is to be
removed, and in what cases the operation should be performed. The
shoulder and hip joints are the only ones in which partial excision is
ever admissible, indeed, in the shoulder excision of the head of the
humerus only is in many cases found to be all that is necessary, while
in all it is much less dangerous to life than when the glenoid cavity
also requires to be interfered with.
It is rarely necessary to remove more of the bone than merely its
articular extremity (when performed for disease of the joint), and if
possible this should be done inside the capsule, _i.e._ through an
incision in the capsule, but without involving its attachment to the
neck of the bone. When the glenoid is also diseased, mere gouging or
scraping the cartilaginous surface will not suffice, but the neck must
be thoroughly exposed, so that the whole cup of the glenoid may be
removed by powerful forceps.
_Cases suitable for Excision._--Cases of chronic disease of the head of
the humerus (generally tubercular), or of chronic ulceration of the
cartilages which has resisted counter-irritation. Cases of gunshot
injury of the joint, or of compound dislocation, or fracture involving
the joint. Cases of limited tumours affecting merely the head and upper
third of the bone, and non-malignant in character. Anchylosis very
rarely requires and would not be much benefited by such an operation.
_Operation._--Though perhaps not the easiest, the following method is
the one followed by the best results. It is suited especially for cases
of caries or other disease of the joint, where the head of the humerus
is either alone or chiefly affected:--
A single straight incision (Plate I. fig. A.) is made from a point just
external to the coracoid process downwards along the humerus for at
least three inches. It corresponds almost exactly to the bicipital
groove, and has the advantage of avoiding the great vessels and nerves.
The long head of the biceps may then be raised from its groove, and
drawn to a side so as to be preserved. This is deemed of importance by
Langenbeck and others. Mr. Syme, however, did not attach much value to
its preservation, as it is often diseased. The capsule, which is often
much altered, perhaps in part destroyed, is then opened, and the tendons
of the muscles which rotate the head of the humerus divided in
succession, while the elbow is rotated first inwards and then outwards
by an assistant so as to put them on the stretch. The arm being then
forced backwards, the head of the bone can be protruded through the
wound, and sawn off at the necessary distance down the shaft. The
glenoid must then be carefully examined, and any diseased bone removed
by the cutting pliers. One or two small branches supplying the anterior
fold of the axilla are the only vessels divided, and may not even
require ligature, unless, indeed, from necrosis, or to remove a tumour,
a larger portion of the humerus than usual has been removed. If the
limit of capsule has been infringed on below, the circumflex vessels may
probably be cut, in which case the bleeding may be considerable.
_N.B._--In cases of fracture of neck of humerus, or of compound gunshot
injury, or where the head has been separated by necrosis from the shaft,
or where, as has happened to Stanley and others, the bone broke in the
endeavour to tilt the head out, the surgeon will require to seize the
detached head with strong forceps, and dissect it out with care.
_Other methods of Resection._--When from great thickening and induration
of the soft parts, enlargement of the head of the bone, or other reason,
the straight incision may be deemed insufficient for the purpose (and we
may remark that there are comparatively few cases in which it is
insufficient), access may be obtained to the joint by raising a flap
from the deltoid (Plate III. fig. A). Its shape--V-shaped, semilunar, or
ovoid--is not of much consequence, for there are no great nerves or
vessels to wound on the outside of the joint, and the surgeon should be
guided, as in all other operations on the joint, very much by the
position of any pre-existing sinuses. This flap being raised upwards
towards its base, very free access is gained to the joint.
In these cases, fortunately comparatively rare, in which there is reason
to believe that the glenoid is chiefly involved in disease, and yet that
the disease can be removed without amputation, access will be gained
most easily by an incision (Plate III. fig. B.) on the posterior surface
of the joint, corresponding in size and direction to the linear incision
in front. This gives a much easier mode of access to the glenoid. I have
seen this practised in one very remarkable case by Mr. Syme, in which
the glenoid cavity and neck of the scapula were extensively diseased,
while the head of the bone was quite sound.
_After-treatment_ is exceedingly simple; for the first day or two the
shoulder is to be supported on a pillow with a simple pad in the axilla,
if there is any tendency for the arm to drag inwards; after this the
patient should be encouraged to sit up and move about with his arm in a
sling, the elbow hanging freely down.
_Results._--Hodge records ninety-six cases in which this excision was
performed for gunshot injury, of which twenty-five proved fatal, and
fifty for disease, of which only eight died,--results which are more
encouraging than those of amputation at the shoulder-joint for disease;
though for injury the mortality is much greater than Larrey's famous
Statistics of Amputation, _q.v._ p. 65.
Spence had thirty-three cases, with three deaths. He generally made a
counter-opening behind to get rid of discharges, and inserted a
drainage-tube.
Gurlt's statistics of excision for gunshot injury give of 1661 cases
1067 recoveries, 27 doubtful results, and 567 deaths, the mortality
being 34.70 per cent.
EXCISION OF THE ELBOW-JOINT--_In what cases should it be performed?_--1.
For disease of the elbow-joint which has resisted ordinary remedies, and
is wearing down the patient's strength, including caries, ulceration of
cartilages, and gelatinous synovial degeneration.
2. For wounds of the elbow penetrating the joint, the prognosis both as
to the patient's life and the usefulness of his arm is much better after
excision than after endeavours to save the joint without excision. This
is especially the case when the wound of the joint is small and
punctured, but if the case is seen early and treated by free drainage,
with antiseptic precautions, excision may not be required.
3. For anchylosis, in cases where after disease or injury the limb has
stiffened in a bad position, especially when, with a straight elbow,
the hand is rendered almost perfectly useless.
_How much should be removed?_--In the elbow-joint, more than any other
joint in the body, complete excision is absolutely necessary; any
portion of the articular surface being left proves a source of
unfavourable result.
The surgeon is apt to err rather in removing too little than too much.
For the removal of too little bone is, on the one hand, apt to result in
long-standing sinuses, on the other, to induce anchylosis.
In making the section of the bones, the saw ought to be applied to the
humerus transversely just at the commencement of its condyloid
projections, and to the radius and ulna, at least at a level with the
base of the coronoid process of the ulna.
But while removing enough, we must not be led into the error of removing
too much. If this is done, as was done by Sir Philip Crampton in his
first case, and as happens occasionally of necessity in cases of
excision for gunshot wounds or other accidents, much of the power of the
arm is lost as a consequence of the shortening and excessive mobility.
A mistaken pathology sometimes deceives in the examination of the state
of the bones, and causes an unnecessary amount to be removed. For in
many cases of disease the bones in the neighbourhood of the joint are
stimulated to an excessive amount of what is in reality Nature's effort
at repair, and while the cartilaginous surfaces are denuded of
cartilage, soft, and porous, the bones close by are roughened with a
stalactitic-looking growth, projecting in knobs and angles. Now, if this
be mistaken for disease and removed, too much will almost certainly be
taken away, and the result will be unsatisfactory.
Much less care need be taken exactly to discriminate and remove the
diseased soft parts; indeed they may be left alone; the synovial
membrane in a state of gelatinous degeneration sometimes presents a
very formidable appearance of disease, but if the bones be properly
removed, all this swelling will soon go down, and a healthy condition of
parts succeed, without any clipping or paring on the surgeon's part.
_Operation._--The back of the joint is of course chosen for the seat of
the incisions, both because the bones are there just under the skin, and
because the great vessels and nerves lie in front of the joint. The form
and number of the incisions vary considerably, and ought to vary
according to the nature of the case and the amount of disease or injury.
Though it is now little used, for historical interest I retain the
description of the H-shaped incision (Plate III. fig. C.), used first by
Moreau, and re-introduced by Mr. Syme, and used by him for most of his
very numerous cases.
The posterior surface of the joint being exposed, the surgeon, with a
strong straight bistoury, makes a transverse incision into the joint
just above the olecranon. It should begin just far enough outside of the
internal condyle to avoid the ulnar nerve, which the surgeon should
protect by the forefinger of his left hand, and should extend
transversely across to the outer condyle. From each end of this incision
the surgeon should next make at a right angle two incisions, each about
one inch and a half or two inches long, right down to the bone, thus
marking out two quadrilateral flaps. These should next be raised from
the bones, up and down, as much of the soft parts being retained in them
as possible, so as to add to their thickness. The olecranon is thus
exposed, and should be removed by saw or pliers by cutting into the
greater sigmoid notch; the lateral ligaments must then be cut, if they
are not already destroyed by the disease, and the humerus protruded, a
proper amount of which is then to be sawn off in a transverse direction.
The head of the radius is then easily removed by the bone-pliers, and
the ulna also protruded, the attachment of the brachialis anticus to the
coronoid process divided, and the bone sawn across just at the base of
that process.
Few vessels, if any, will require ligature, and the arm being bent to
nearly a right angle, the transverse incision must be very carefully
sewed up with silver sutures closely set and deeply placed, as much of
the future success of the joint depends on the completeness of the
primary union of this incision. The external incision may also be
accurately adjusted, the internal one not so completely, to allow free
vent for the discharge, which is aided by the ligatures, if any are
required, being brought out at its lower angle. A figure-of-8 bandage
should be applied over pads of dry lint, and the limb laid on a pillow.
No splint is necessary; in a few days the patient will be able to rise
and walk about.
Passive motion should be begun so soon as the first inflammatory
symptoms have passed off.
If properly performed, in a tolerably healthy subject, the surgeon
should not be satisfied with any results short of almost perfect
restoration of motion in the joint. Flexion and extension to their full
extent, with a very considerable amount of pronation and supination, are
to be expected, with proper care, in a patient of average intelligence.
Numerous cases are now on record where almost perfect performance of all
the duties of life was retained after excision of the elbow-joint.[54]
In most cases it is possible, and in nearly all advisable, to excise the
joint by means of a less complicated incision. Thus one long vertical
incision at the posterior surface, with its centre about midway between
the ulna and the external condyle, with a transverse incision at right
angles to it, and reaching almost to the internal condyle, has been
often practised with a very good result.
By nearly universal consent this single straight incision is now used,
and when it is properly dressed and _drained_ gives admirable results.
A single vertical incision (Plate III. fig. D.) without any transverse
one, as long ago recommended by Chassaignac, is, in most cases, quite
sufficient to give access. It is most suitable in cases of anchylosis,
where there is little deposit of new bone, or in cases of disease of the
joint, accompanied with little swelling or thickening of surrounding
tissues. It has the advantage of avoiding the cicatrix of a transverse
incision, which doubtless may, if at all a broad one, somewhat interfere
with the future flexion of the limb, but, on the other hand, unless care
is taken, it does _not_ give such free egress for the discharge, and
when there is much delay in healing, the vertical incision may leave a
cicatrix nearly as troublesome as the other.
The following modification, suggested and practised by the late Mr.
Maunder, seems to be a step in the right direction when it is
practicable. "After a longitudinal incision crossing the point of
the olecranon I next let the knife sink into the triceps muscle,
and divide it longitudinally into two portions, the inner one of
which is the more firmly attached to the ulna, while the outer
portion is continuous with the anconeus muscle, and sends some
tendinous fibres to blend with the fascia of the fore-arm. It is
these latter fibres that are to be scrupulously preserved.
"Two points have to be remembered: first, the ulnar nerve, often
unseen, must be lifted from its bed, and carried over the internal
condyle to a safe place, and then the outer portion of the triceps
muscle with its tendinous prolongation, the fascia of the fore-arm
and the anconeus muscle must be dissected up, as it were, in one
piece, sufficiently to allow of its being temporarily carried out
over the external condyle of the humerus."[55]
This method aids in retaining the power of _active_ extension of
the elbow-joint.
Excision for osseous anchylosis in the extended position of the joint
may be sometimes rendered very difficult by the density, firmness, and
extensive hypertrophy of the bones, which become fused into one solid
mass. Any attempt to isolate the bones, and remove the anchylosed joint
entire, by incising the bones as if for disease, will both prove very
laborious, and also probably end in doing some damage to the vessels and
nerves in front. But by sawing through the anchylosis about its centre,
as was pointed out many years ago by Mr. Syme, the fore-arm may be
flexed, and the bones as easily displayed, cleaned, and removed, as in
the operation for disease. In this operation, as there is less
thickening of the skin and subjacent textures, and in consequence more
risk of deficiency and even sloughing of the flaps made by the H-shaped
incision, a single straight incision will serve the purpose admirably.
Partial incisions of the elbow-joint are, as a rule, less successful and
more dangerous to life than complete ones, except in cases of excision
for anchylosis. Even in gunshot wounds, where the bones were previously
healthy, and where uninjured portions might have been left with some
hopes of success, this is the case.
Dr. Heron Watson has devised the following operation for cases of
anchylosis the result of injury:--(1.) A linear incision over ulnar
nerve at inner side of olecranon. (2.) The ulnar nerve to be
carefully turned over the inner condyle. (3.) A probe-pointed
bistoury to be introduced into the elbow-joint in front of the
humerus, and then behind and carried upwards, so as to divide the
upper capsular attachments in front and behind. (4.) A pair of
bone-forceps to be next employed to cut off the entire inner
condyle and trochlea of the humerus, and then introduced in the
opposite diagonal direction so as to detach the external condyle
and capitulum of the humerus from the shaft. (5.) The truncated and
angular end of the humerus to be divided, turned out through the
incision, and smoothed across at right angles to the line of the
shaft by means of the saw, whereby (6.) room might be afforded, so
that partly by twisting and partly by dissection the external
condyle and capitulum are removed without any division of the skin
on the outer side of the arm.[56] Six cases have had satisfactory
results.
The mortality from this operation is considerably less than that from
amputation of the arm. Of a series of excisions for disease, injury, and
anchylosis, 22.15 per cent. died, while out of a similar series of
amputations of the arm the mortality was 33.4 per cent.[57] Our
mortality of excision of the elbow here is certainly much less than the
above. All of the cases, between thirty and forty, in which I have done
it have recovered with but one exception, and Mr. Syme lost only one
during the time I was his assistant.
Professor Spence lost only 16 in 189 cases, or 8.3 per cent.
Gurlt's statistics for gunshot injury give a mortality of over 24 per
cent.
Out of 82 cases where the joint was excised for injury in the
Schleswig-Holstein and Crimean campaigns, only 16 died; and out of 115
cases in which the joint was excised for disease, only 15 died.
The period after the injury at which the excision is performed seems to
be important.
Deaths.
Thus of 11 cases within first twenty-four hours, 1 = 1-11
" 20 " between second and fourth days, 4 = 1-5
" 9 " " eighth and thirty-seventh, 1 = 1-9
-- --
40 6
EXCISION OF THE WRIST.--Very various methods have been proposed and
executed for the purpose of excising this joint. These vary much in
difficulty and complexity, in proportion to the endeavours made to save
the tendons from being cut.
The principles which must guide all attempts at operative interference
with this joint are--
1. To remove all the diseased bone, including the cartilage-covered
portions of the radius, ulna, and of the metacarpal bones, as little of
these bones being removed as possible, beyond the cartilage-covered
portions.
2. To disturb the tendons as little as possible, especially to avoid
isolating them from the cellular sheath.
3. To commence passive motion of the fingers very soon after the
operation.
It is rarely possible to remove the carpal bones as a whole, from the
diseased condition which renders the operation necessary, and the
digging out of the various bones piecemeal renders the operation very
tedious, especially if the proximal ends of the metacarpal bones are
involved and require to be removed, hence this operation was practically
impossible till after the discovery of anæsthesia.
In describing the operation elaborated and described by Professor
Lister, the type of the various plans in which the tendons are saved is
given, while a very few words descriptive of the incisions used by
others who cut the tendons will suffice.
LISTER'S OPERATION OF EXCISION OF THE WRIST-JOINT.--Even an abridgment
of Mr. Lister's account of his operation must necessarily be long,
because the operation itself is so complicated and prolonged, and guided
by such precise principles, as to render much abridgment almost
impossible.
A tourniquet is put on, to prevent oozing, which would conceal the state
of the bones; any adhesions of the tendons must be then broken down by
free movement of all the joints.
_The radial incision_ (Plate IV. fig. A.) is then made. It commences at
the middle of the dorsal aspect of the radius, on a level with the
styloid process, passes as if going towards the inner side of the
metacarpo-phalangeal joint of the thumb, in a line parallel to the
extensor secundi internodii, but turns off at an angle as it passes the
radial border of the second metacarpal, and then longitudinally
downwards for half the length of that bone. The extensor carpi radialis
brevior tendon is divided in the incision. The soft parts at the radial
side are to be carefully dissected up, and the tendon of the extensor
carpi radialis longior divided at its insertion. The cut tendons, and
the extensor secundi internodii tendon and the radial artery can thus be
pushed outwards, enabling the trapezium to be separated from the carpus
by cutting-pliers. The extensor tendons being relaxed by bending back
the hand, the soft parts must be cleared from the carpus as far as
possible towards the ulnar side.
[Illustration: FIG. VI.[58]]
_The ulnar incision_ (Plate IV. fig. B.) extends from two inches above
the end of the ulna, in a line between the bone and the flexor carpi
ulnaris, straight down as far as the middle of the palmar aspect of the
fifth metacarpal. The dorsal lip of this incision is then raised, and
the tendon of the extensor carpi ulnaris cut at its insertion, and
reflected up out of its groove in the ulna along with the skin. The
extensor tendons are then raised from the carpus, and the dorsal and
lateral ligaments of the wrist divided, the tendons still being left as
far as possible undisturbed in their relation to the radius. In front
the flexor tendons are cleared from the carpus, the pisiform bone
separated from the others though not removed, and the hook of the
unciform divided by pliers. The knife must not go further down than the
base of the metacarpal bones, in case of dividing the deep palmar arch.
The anterior ligament of the wrist being now divided, the carpus and
metacarpus are to be separated by cutting-pliers, and the carpus
extracted by strong sequestrum forceps. By forcible eversion of the
hand, the ends of radius and ulna can be protruded at the ulnar
incision; as little as possible should be removed, consistent with
removing all the disease. The ulna should be cut obliquely, leaving the
base of the styloid process, and removing all the cartilage-covered
portion. A thin slice of the radius is then to be cut also with the saw,
so thin as to remove only the bevelled ungrooved portion, and leaving
the tendons as far as possible undisturbed in their grooves. The ulnar
articular facet is to be snipped off with bone-pliers. If the bones are
more deeply carious, the diseased parts must at all hazards be removed
with pliers or gouge. The metacarpal bones must then be treated in
precisely the same way, their ends sawn off and their articular facets
snipped off with the bone-pliers longitudinally. The trapezium is then
to be seized by forceps and carefully dissected out, the metacarpal bone
of the thumb pared like the others, the articular surface of the
pisiform removed, the rest of the bone being left if it is sound. The
radial incision is stitched closely throughout, and also the ends of the
ulnar incision, any ligature being brought out through the centre of the
ulnar incision, which is kept open with a piece of lint, which also
gives support to the extensor tendons.
The after-treatment is important, the principal specialities being--(1.)
early and free movement of the fingers; (2.) secure fixing of the wrist
to procure consolidation. (1.) By passive motion of the joints of the
knuckles and fingers, commenced on the second day, and continued daily
after the operation; (2.) By a splint supporting the fore-arm and hand,
the fingers being held in a semiflexed position by a large pad of cork
fastened firmly on to the splint and made to fit the palm; this prevents
the splint from slipping up the arm, and by a turn of a bandage insures
fixation of the wrist-joint. The anterior part of this splint below the
fingers may be gradually shortened, allowing more and more passive
motion of the fingers, but the patient must wear it for months, indeed,
till he finds his wrist as strong without it as with it.
Among the various operations that have been devised, the following
require notice:--Mr. Spence, Dr. Gillespie, Dr. Watson, and the author,
use a single dorsal incision with excellent results, and find it quite
easy to remove all the bones from it. Mr. Spence had sixteen cases
without a death.
POSTERIOR SEMILUNAR FLAP, from carpal attachment of metacarpal of
index finger round to styloid process of ulna; dividing integuments
only, then separating the tendons of the common extensor
longitudinally, and drawing them aside by blunt hooks, the diseased
bones are removed piecemeal by curved parrot-bill forceps.[59]
POSTERIOR CURVED FLAP.--An incision down to the carpal bones,
extended from a point two lines to the ulnar side of the extensor
secundi internodii pollicis, and from a quarter to half an inch
below the radio-carpal articulation, swept in a curvilinear
direction downwards, close to the carpal extremities of the
metacarpal bones, to a point just below the end of the ulna. The
flap thus marked out was dissected up, and consisted of the
integuments, areolar tissue, and extensor tendons of the four
fingers, together with large deposits of fibrine, the products of
repeated and prolonged inflammatory action. The tendon of the
second extensor and its soft parts around were separated from the
bones. The remains of the ligaments were cut, flexion of the hand
protruded the carious ends of radius and ulna. The bones were then
dissected out, leaving the trapezium, which was not diseased, and
hand placed on a splint.[60]
EXCISION OF THE HIP-JOINT.--The question as to the propriety of
performing this operation in any case is still debated by some surgeons,
and the selection of suitable cases for the operation is greatly
modified by the varying opinions of the different schools of surgery.
Enough here to describe the method of operating, and the amount of the
bone which is to be removed.
As in the shoulder-joint, the head of the femur is much more liable to
disease, and, as a rule, much earlier attacked than is the acetabulum,
but unfortunately the acetabulum does eventually become affected also in
probably a much larger proportionate number of cases than the glenoid.
Caries of the head, neck, and trochanters of the femur is a very common
disease in this variable climate, and frequently connected with the
strumous taint. After much suffering, abscesses form and discharge,
giving considerable pain, and often end by carrying off the patient. As
a result of the abscess and destruction of the ligaments, the head of
the bone is apt to be displaced, and under some sudden muscular exertion
or involuntary spasm, consecutive dislocation of the femur (generally on
to the dorsum ilii) very often occurs.
In such a case the operation of excision of the head of the femur is by
no means difficult, and not excessively dangerous, especially in young
children.
_Operation._--It is hardly necessary, or indeed possible, to lay down
exact rules for the performance of this operation, in so far as the
external incisions are concerned, for the sinuses which exist ought in
general to be made use of.
When the surgeon has his choice, a straight incision (Plate II. fig.
A.), parallel with the bone, extending from the top of the great
trochanter downwards for about two inches, and also from the same point
in a curved direction with the concavity forwards, upwards towards the
position of the head of the bone (see diagram), will be found most
convenient. The incisions should be carried boldly down to the bone,
which will often be felt exposed and bathed in pus, any remains of the
ligamentous structures must be cautiously divided with a probe-pointed
bistoury, and then by bringing the knee of the affected side forcibly
across the opposite thigh, with the toes everted, the head of the bone
is forced out of the wound. The head, neck, and great trochanter should
be fully exposed, and the saw applied transversely below the level of
the trochanter, so as to remove it entire. If this is not done, it
prevents discharge, protrudes at the wound, and besides this it is
almost invariably diseased along with the head. Chain saws are quite
unnecessary, it being in most cases easy to apply an ordinary one to the
bone, if it is properly everted.
Great care in the after-treatment is required to prevent undue
shortening of the limb, or in the event of a cure to secure the most
favourable position for the anchylosis. The femur occasionally tends to
protrude at the wound, and hence may require to be counter-extended by
splints. If required at all, the splint should be made with an iron
elbow opposite the wound to admit of its being easily dressed. In most
cases counter-extension may be best managed by a weight and pulley.
Various forms of hammock swings to support the whole body, and slings of
leather or canvas to support the limb only, have been found to aid
recovery, and render the patient much more comfortable.
When the acetabulum is also diseased the prognosis is much more
unfavourable than when it is sound.
The experiments of Heine and Jäger on the dead body, and operations by
Hancock, Erichsen, and Holmes, on patients, have shown that in cases of
extensive disease of the acetabulum it is quite possible by a prolonged
and careful dissection to remove it all without injury of the pelvic
viscera.
The details of incisions for such an operation need scarcely be given,
as they must vary in each case with the amount of bone diseased, and the
position of the already existing sinuses. The amount of bone that _may_
be removed varies much. Erichsen in one case excised "the upper end of
the femur, the acetabulum, the rami of the pubis, and of the ischium, a
portion of the tuber ischii, and part of the dorsum ilii."[61]
A less formidable proceeding may be useful in cases where the acetabulum
is diseased, but not deeply. The moderate use of an ordinary gouge may
succeed in removing the diseased bone.
Experience and the cold evidence of statistics prove, however, that the
prognosis in any case is modified very much for the worse by the
presence of any disease of the acetabulum, more than one-half of the
cases proving fatal in which it is diseased, whether attempts to remove
the disease of the acetabulum be made or not, and that those cases do
best in which the head of the femur has been displaced, and lies outside
the joint almost like a loose sequestrum among the soft parts.
The results of excision of the hip have as yet been very discouraging,
the mortality of the whole series of published cases being, according to
Dr. Hodge's careful table, very little under 1 in every 2 cases, viz., 1
in 2-5/53. Later statistics are however more favourable.
Like all other excisions, the mortality increases very much with the
patient's age.
Thus of 103 completed cases in which the age is given, 53 recovered and
50 died, but dividing the cases at the end of the sixteenth year, we
find that of the children below this age 43 recovered and 29 died, a
mortality of 40.2 per cent.; of the adults, 10 recovered, and 21 died,
or a mortality of 67.6 per cent.
If we remember the marvellous power of recovery from joint diseases we
find in childhood, under the influence of good diet, cod-liver oil, and
fresh air, we cannot shut our eyes to the fact that such results and
such a mortality are by no means encouraging.
From an extensive experience in a special hospital for hip-disease,
where fresh air, abundant nourishment, and very excellent nursing are
provided, the author is learning more and more to trust to the power of
nature in the cure of even very advanced cases of hip-disease in
children, and he believes that operation is rarely necessary, or even
warrantable, except for the removal of sequestra.
Mr. Holmes's[62] statistics are interesting. He has operated on no
fewer than nineteen cases. Of these seven died, one after secondary
amputation at the hip. Another required amputation and recovered.
Two others died of other diseases without having used their limb.
Of the remaining nine, three were perfectly successful, four were
promising cases, and two unpromising.
Professor Spence in 19 cases had 6 deaths, or a mortality of 31.6
per cent.
Culbertson's collection gives out of 426 cases, 192 deaths, or 45
per cent.
Mr. Croft, whose skill and success as an operator are well known,
has recorded 45 cases of excision of hip in his own practice; of
these 16 died, 11 were under treatment, 18 had recovered, of which
16 had moveable joints and useful limb; the other two are
"potentially cured."[63]
Various other incisions have been devised for gaining access to the
joint. The most noticeable are those in which a flap is made
instead of a linear incision. Sedillot makes a semilunar or ovoid
flap, the base of which is just below the great trochanter, and
which includes it, the convexity being upwards and the flap being
turned down. Gross's modification of this is preferable, being
turned the opposite way, the convexity being downwards (Plate III.
fig. E.), and the flap thus being turned up.
_Results in successful cases._--Of fifty-two in Hodge's table,
thirty-one had useful limbs, six indifferent, three decidedly useless,
four died within three years, and of the remaining eight no details are
given.
The shortening is always considerable, a high-heeled shoe being required
in most cases; a stick is indispensable; in many, crutches are
necessary.
Various operations have been devised for the treatment of osseous
anchylosis of the hip-joint when in a bad position. All are more or
less dangerous. Perhaps one of the least dangerous is the plan of
subcutaneous division of the neck of the femur by a narrow saw,
proposed by Mr. Adams of London. It is sometimes a very laborious
operation.
EXCISION OF KNEE-JOINT.--_Removal of Bone._--In every case the excision
of the joint ought to be complete. Some attempts have been made to save
one or other of the articular surfaces, but they have proved failures.
The patella has frequently been left when it was not diseased, as is
often the case, but the results have not been such as to recommend such
a practice.
_Direction of Section of the Bones._--The bones should be cut
transversely, and, as far as possible, be in accurate and complete
apposition. A slight bevelling at the expense of the posterior margin
will produce an anchylosis of the limb in a very slightly flexed
position, which is found to aid the patient in walking.
It has been proposed by some[64] to cut both bones obliquely, so as to
obviate the difficulty of making the transverse surfaces parallel. This
involves a still greater practical difficulty in keeping these oblique
surfaces in position during the after-treatment.
This plan might possibly be valuable in cases where the disease was
limited to one or other edge of the bone.
Among the various incisions recommended, the best seems to be the
_Semilunar Incision_.
_Operation._--The limb being held in an extended position, a single
semilunar incision (Plate I. fig. B.) is made, entering the joint at
once, and dividing the ligamentum patellæ. It should extend from the
inner side of the inner condyle of the femur to a corresponding point
over the outer one, passing in front of the joint midway between the
lower edge of the patella and tuberosity of the tibia. The flap is then
dissected back, the ligaments divided, when by extreme flexion of the
limb the articular surface of the tibia and femur are thoroughly
exposed. The crucial ligaments must then be divided cautiously, and the
articular portion of the femur cleaned anteriorly by the knife,
posteriorly by the operator's finger, so far as possible to avoid injury
of the artery. The whole articular surface of the femur must then be
removed by a transverse cut with the saw as exactly as possible at a
right angle with the axis of the bone. The amount of the femur which
will require removal will in the adult vary from an inch to an inch and
a half or even more. It _must_ involve all the bone normally covered by
cartilage; and this being removed, if the section shows evidence of
disease, slice after slice may require removal till a healthy surface is
obtained. Occasionally, if the diseased portion appears limited, though
deep, the application of a gouge may succeed in removing disease without
involving too great shortening of the limb. Specially in children, it is
of great importance to avoid removing the whole epiphysis. The tibia
must then be exposed in a similar manner, and a thin slice removed; if
the bone be tolerably healthy, even less than half an inch will prove
quite sufficient.
This method has an immense advantage in that it provides an excellent
anterior flap for the amputation, which may be required in cases where
the disease of bone is found too extensive to admit of the excision
being practised.
This method, with slight deviations, is substantially that of Richard
Mackenzie of Edinburgh, Wood of New York, Jones of Jersey.
Hæmorrhage must then be stopped, and that as thoroughly as possible, by
torsion, cold, and pressure, and the flap brought accurately together
with sutures.
In some rare cases, it may be found necessary to divide the hamstring
tendons to rectify spastic contraction of the muscles; but this can
generally be done quite well from the original wound.
Holt makes a dependent opening in the popliteal space for drainage. This
is unnecessary if the incisions are made sufficiently far back, and if
the wound is properly drained. It is unsafe, as approaching so close to
the artery and veins. If much bagging takes place, the use of a
drainage-tube will prove quite sufficient.
_After-treatment._--Wire splints lined with leather and provided with a
foot-piece; special box-splints with moveable sides, as Butcher's;[65]
plaster-of-Paris moulds are used by Dr. P.H. Watson[66] of Edinburgh and
others; this last form of dressing is the best, and allows the limb to
be suspended from a Salter's swing.
H-_shaped incision._--The internal incision should commence at
a point about two inches below the articular surface of the tibia, and
in a line with its inner edge; it should then be carried up along the
femur in a direction parallel to the axis of the extended limb, so as to
pass in front of the saphena vein, and thus avoid it, for a distance of
five inches. The external incision, commencing just below the head of
the fibula, must be carried upwards parallel to the preceding for the
same distance. Both incisions must be made by a heavy scalpel with a
firm hand, so as to divide all the tissues down to the bone. The
vertical incisions are then united by a transverse one passing across
just below the lower angle of the patella. The flaps thus formed must
then be dissected up and down, and the internal and external lateral
ligaments divided, thus thoroughly opening the joint and exposing the
crucial ligaments. These must be divided carefully, remembering the
position of the artery. The bones are then to be cleared and divided, as
in the operation already described. This is the method of Moreau and
Butcher.[67]
_Patella and Ligamentum Patellæ retained._--"A longitudinal incision,
full four inches in extent, was made on each side of the knee-joint,
midway between the vasti and flexors of the leg; these two cuts were
down to the bones, they were connected by a transverse one just over the
prominence of the tubercle of the tibia, _care being taken to avoid
cutting by this incision the ligamentum patellæ_; the flap thus defined
was reflected upwards, the patella and the ligament were then freed and
drawn over the internal condyle, and kept there by means of a broad,
flat, and turned-up spatula; the joint was thus exposed, and after the
synovial capsule had been cut through as far as could be seen, the leg
was forcibly flexed, the crucial ligaments, almost breaking in the act,
only required a slight touch of the knife to divide them completely. The
articular surfaces of the bones were now completely brought to view, and
the diseased portions removed by means of suitable saws, the soft parts
being hold aside by assistants."[68]
Results of Excision of Knee-joint:--Holmes's Table of recent cases from
1873-1878--
245 cases; 25 deaths, and 47 failures.
Spence's--33 cases; 22 recovered, 11 died.
BUCK'S OPERATION FOR ANCHYLOSED KNEE-JOINT.--The principle of this
operation is to remove a triangular portion of bone, which is to include
the surfaces of the femur and tibia, which have anchylosed in an awkward
position, and by this means to set the bones free, and enable the limb
to be straightened. Access to the joint may be obtained by either of
the two methods already described. Sections of the bones are then to be
made with the saw, so as to meet posteriorly a little in front of the
posterior surface of the anchylosed joint, and thus remove a triangular
portion of bone; the portion still remaining, and which still keeps up
the deformity, is then to be broken through as best you can, either by a
chisel, or a saw, or forced flexion. The ends are to be pared off by
bone-pliers, and the surfaces brought into as close apposition as
possible. The operation is a difficult one, a gap being generally left
between the anterior edges of the bones, from the unyielding nature of
the integuments behind, and the difficulty of removing the posterior
projecting edges from their close proximity to the artery. Of twenty
cases on record, eight died, and two required amputation.
_Relation of Age to result in Excision of Knee-Joint from Hodge's
Tables._
Of 182 complete cases:--
68 below 16 years: 50 recovered--18 died; or 26 per cent. died.
114 above 16 years: 55 recovered--59 died; or 51.7 per cent. died.
EXCISION OF THE ANKLE-JOINT.--_In what cases is it to be done, and how
much bone is to be removed?_
In cases of compound dislocation of the ankle-joint, the tibia and
fibula are apt to be protruded either in front or behind. When this
happens it is a dislocation generally very difficult to reduce, and when
reduced to retain in position. In such cases, if there seems to be any
chance of retaining the foot, excision of the articular ends of tibia
and fibula greatly add to the probabilities in its favour. It may be
done without any new wound, and, in general, by an ordinary surgeon's
saw.
When the astragalus does not protrude, it seems to matter little for the
future result whether its articular surface be removed or not. When, on
the other hand, it protrudes, as a result either of the displacement of
the entire foot, or of a dislocation complete or partial of the
astragalus itself, there is no doubt that excision either of its
articular surface or of the entire bone will give very excellent
results. Jäger reports twenty-seven such cases, with only one fatal, and
one doubtful result.
_In cases of disease of the Ankle-joint._--Excision has been performed a
good many times, and should in most cases be complete. A work like this
is not the place to discuss the propriety of operations so much as the
method of performing them, but one remark may be permitted. Few points
of surgical diagnosis are more difficult than it is to tell whether in
any given case disease is confined to the ankle-joint, and whether or
not the bones of the tarsus participate. If they do even to a slight
extent, no operation which attacks the ankle-joint only has any
reasonable chance of success. It may look well for a time, but sinuses
remain, the irritation of the operation only hastens the progress of the
disease of the bone, and the result will almost certainly be
disappointing, amputation being almost the inevitable _dernier ressort_.
_Methods of Operating_:--
_Mr. Hancock_ has been very successful by the following method:--
Commence the incision (Plate II. figs. B.B.) about two inches above and
behind the external malleolus, and carry it across the instep to about
two inches above and behind the internal malleolus. Take care that this
incision merely divides the skin, and does not penetrate beyond the
fascia. Reflect the flap so made, and next cut down upon the external
malleolus, carrying your knife close to the edge of the bone, both
behind and below the process, dislodge the peronei tendons, and divide
the external lateral ligaments of the joint. Having done this, with the
bone-nippers cut through the fibula, about an inch above the malleolus,
remove this piece of bone, dividing the inferior tibio-fibular
ligament, and then turn the leg and foot on the outside. Now carefully
dissect the tendons of the tibialis posticus and flexor communis
digitorum from behind the internal malleolus. Carry your knife close
round the edge of this process, and detach the internal lateral
ligament, then grasping the heel with one hand, and the front of the
foot with the other, forcibly turn the sole of the foot downwards, by
which the lower end of the tibia is dislocated and protruded through the
wound. This done, remove the diseased end of the tibia with the common
amputating saw, and afterwards with a small metacarpal saw placed upon
the back of the upper articulating process of the astragalus, between
that process and the tendo Achillis, remove the former by cutting from
behind forwards. Replace the parts _in situ_; close the wound carefully
on the inner side and front of the ankle; but leave the outside open,
that there may be a free exit for discharge, apply water-dressing, place
the limb on its outer side on a splint, and the operation is completed.
Skin, external, and internal ligaments, and the bones are the only parts
divided, no tendons and no arteries of any size.[69]
_Barwell's_ method by _lateral incisions_ is briefly as follows:--
On the outer side, an incision over the lower three inches of the fibula
turns forward at the malleolus at an angle, and ends about half an inch
above the base of the outer metatarsal. The flap is to be reflected,
fibula divided about two inches from its lower end by the forceps, and
dissected out, leaving peronei tendons uncut. A similar incision on the
inner side terminates over the projection of the internal cuneiform
bone; the sheaths of the tendons under inner angle are then to be
divided, and the artery and nerve avoided; the internal lateral
ligament is then to be divided, the foot twisted outwards, so as to
protrude the astragalus and tibia at the inner wound. The lower end of
the tibia and top of the astragalus are to be sawn off by a
narrow-bladed saw passing from one wound to the other.[70]
Dr. M. Buchanan of Glasgow has described an operation by which the joint
can be excised through a single incision over the external malleolus.
_Results._--So far as can be gathered from cases already published, the
results are very often (at least in one out of every two cases)
unsatisfactory. Sinuses remain, which do not heal, the limbs are
useless, and amputation is in the end necessary.
Langenbeck has performed it sixteen times during the last
Schleswig-Holstein war (in 1864), and the Bohemian war in 1866, with
only three deaths. In these cases the operation was subperiosteal.
EXCISION OF THE SCAPULA.--More or less of the scapula has in many cases
been removed along with the arm, and even with the addition of portion
of the clavicle.
Excision of the entire bone, leaving the arm, has been performed in two
instances by Mr. Syme. The procedure must vary according to the nature
and shape of the tumour on account of which the operation is performed.
Mr. Syme operated as follows:--
In the first case, one of cerebriform tumour of the bone, he "made an
incision from the acromion process transversely to the posterior edge of
the scapula, and another from the centre of this one directly downwards
to the lower margin of the tumour. The flaps thus formed being reflected
without much hæmorrhage, I separated the scapular attachment of the
deltoid, and divided the connections of the acromial extremity of the
clavicle. Then, wishing to command the subscapular artery, I divided
it, with the effect of giving issue to a fearful gush of blood, but
fortunately caught the vessel and tied it without any delay. I next cut
into the joint and round the glenoid cavity, hooked my finger under the
coracoid process, so as to facilitate the division of its muscular and
ligamentous attachments, and then pulling back the bone with all the
force of my left hand, separated its remaining attachments with rapid
sweeps of the knife." (Plate III. fig. G.)
Mr. Syme's second case was also one of tumour of the scapula; the head
of the humerus had been excised two years before.
He removed it by two incisions, one from the clavicle a little to the
sternal side of the coracoid, directed downwards to the lower boundary
of the tumour, another transversely from the shoulder to the posterior
edge of the scapula. The clavicle was divided at the spot where it was
exposed, and the outer portion removed along with the scapula.[71]
The author has in a case of osseous tumour removed the whole body of the
scapula, leaving glenoid, spine, acromion and anterior margin with
excellent result and a useful arm.
Large portions of the shafts of the humerus, radius, and ulna have been
removed for disease or accident, and useful arms have resulted; but as
the operative procedures must vary in every case, according to the
amount of bone to be removed, and the number and position of the
sinuses, no exact directions can be given.
For very interesting cases of such resections reference may be made to
Wagner's treatise on the subject, translated and enlarged by Mr. Holmes,
and to Williamson's _Military Surgery_, p. 227.
EXCISION OF METACARPALS AND PHALANGES.--To _excise_ the metacarpal
implies that the corresponding finger is left. Except in cases of
necrosis, where abundance of new bone has formed in the detached
periosteum, the results of such excisions do not encourage repetition,
the digits which remain being generally very useless. It is quite
different, however, if it is the thumb that is involved; and every
effort should, in every case, be made to retain the thumb, even in the
complete absence of its metacarpal bone. For the good results of a case
in which Mr. Syme excised the whole metacarpal bone for a tumour, see
his _Observations in Clinical Surgery_, p. 38.
The operation is not difficult, and requires merely a straight incision
over the dorsum, extending the whole length of the bone.
In the same way the proximal phalanx of the thumb may be excised, and
yet, if proper care be taken, a very useful limb be left. I quote entire
the following case by Mr. Butcher of Dublin:--
EXCISION OF PROXIMAL PHALANX OF THE THUMB.--
The thumb of the right hand was crushed by the crank of a steam-engine.
The proximal phalanx was completely shivered; its fragments were
removed, the cartilage of the proximal end of the distal phalanx, and
also of the head of the metacarpal bone, were pared off with a strong
knife. The digit was put up on a splint fully extended. In about a month
cure was nearly complete, a firm dense tissue took the place of the
removed phalanx, and the power of flexing the unguinal was nearly
complete.[72]
EXCISION OF THE JOINTS OF THE FINGERS.--These operations may be
performed for compound dislocation, specially when the thumb is injured;
no directions can be given for the incisions.[73]
In cases of disease it is rarely necessary or advisable to attempt to
save a finger, but if the metacarpo-phalangeal joint of the thumb be
affected, excision should be performed with the hope of saving the
thumb. A single free incision on the radial side of the joint will give
sufficient access.
EXCISION OF THE OS CALCIS.--In those comparatively rare cases in which
the os calcis is alone affected, the rest of the tarsus and the
ankle-joint being healthy, a considerable difference of opinion exists
as to the proper course to be followed. By some surgeons it is
considered best merely to gain free access to the diseased bone, and
then remove by a gouge all the softened and altered portions, leaving a
shell of bone all round, of course saving the periosteum and avoiding
interference with the joint. This operation requires no special detailed
instruction. We find many surgeons, among them Fergusson and Hodge,
supporters of this comparatively modest operation. The author has many
times performed this operation with excellent results. Even when nothing
but periosteum is left, the new bone becomes strong and of full size.
Excision of the whole of the diseased bone at its joints, with or
without an attempt to leave some of the periosteum, has been deemed
necessary by others. Holmes, who has had considerable experience,
removes the bone at once by the following incisions, without paying any
reference to the periosteum:--
_Operation._--An incision (Plate III. fig. F.) is commenced at the inner
edge of the tendo Achillis, and drawn horizontally forwards along the
outer side of the foot, somewhat in front of the calcaneo-cuboid joint,
which lies midway between the outer malleolus and the end of the fifth
metatarsal bone. This incision should go down at once upon the bone, so
that the tendon should be felt to snap as the incision is commenced. It
should be as nearly as possible on a level with the upper border of the
os calcis, a point which the surgeon can determine, if the dorsum of the
foot is in a natural state, by feeling the pit in which the extensor
brevis digitorum arises. Another incision is then to be drawn vertically
across the sole, commencing near the anterior end of the former
incision, and terminating at the outer border of the grooved or internal
surface of the os calcis, beyond which point it should not extend, for
fear of wounding the posterior tibial vessels. If more room be required,
this vertical incision may be prolonged a little upwards, so as to form
a crucial incision. The bone being now denuded by throwing back the
flaps, the first point is to find and lay open the calcaneo-cuboid
joint, and then the joints with the astragalus. The close connections
between these two bones constitute the principal difficulty in the
operation on the dead subject; but these joints will frequently be found
to have been destroyed in cases of disease. The calcaneum having been
separated thus from its bony connections by the free use of the knife,
aided, if necessary, by the lever, lion-forceps, etc., the soft parts
are next to be cleaned off its inner side with care, in order to avoid
the vessels, and the bone will then come away.[74]
Attempts may occasionally be made in such an operation to save a portion
of periosteum in attachment to the soft parts, but success or failure in
this seems to have very little effect on the future result.
_Hancock's Method._--A single flap was formed in the sole, with the
convexity looking forwards, by an incision from one malleolus to
the other.
_Greenhow's Method._--Incisions made from the inner and outer
ankles, meeting at the apex of the heel, and then others extending
along the sides of the foot, the flaps being dissected back so as
to expose the bone and its connections.[75]
EXCISION OF ASTRAGALUS.--A curved incision on the dorsum of the foot
extending from one malleolus to the other, and as far forwards as the
front of the scaphoid. The chief caution required is to divide all
ligaments which hold the bone in place, and dissect it clean on all
other parts before meddling with its posterior surface where the groove
exists for the flexor longus pollicis tendon near which the posterior
tibial vessels and nerve lie.[76]
EXCISION OF ASTRAGALUS AND SCAPHOID.--An incision similar to the
anterior one in Syme's amputation at the ankle. The flap was then turned
back from the dorsum of the foot. The joint was then opened, the lateral
ligaments of the ankle-joint divided, the foot dislocated so as to show
the astragalo-calcanean ligaments, and allow them to be divided. The
bones were then grasped with the lion-forceps and pulled forwards, while
the posterior surface of the astragalus was very cautiously cleaned, so
as to avoid the posterior tibial artery.[77]
EXCISION OF METATARSO-PHALANGEAL JOINT OF GREAT TOE.--Butcher performs
it by splitting up the sinuses leading to the carious joint, exposing it
and cutting off with bone-pliers the anterior third of the metatarsal
bone, and the proximal end of the first phalanx. He also cuts
subcutaneously the extensor tendons to prevent them from cocking up the
toe.[78] Pancoast prefers a semilunar incision. A lateral incision is
usually to be preferred.
The author has performed this excision frequently for disease; when the
whole cartilages are removed and the wound is freely drained, an
admirable result is obtained.
In cases of compound dislocation of the head of the metatarsal bone, it
will occasionally be found necessary to excise it either by the
original, or a slightly enlarged wound.
The author lately excised one-half of shaft of metatarsal and the
corresponding half of proximal phalanx of great toe for exostosis, with
antiseptic precautions. The result was a useful toe with a _mobile
joint_.
EXCISION OF METATARSAL BONE OF GREAT TOE.--For this operation a
quadrilateral flap has been recommended, but this is quite unnecessary.
A single straight incision along the inner border of the foot, extending
the whole length of the bone, renders it very easy to remove the whole
bone from joint to joint. This is an operation, however, which is rarely
needed, and which would leave a very useless flail of a toe. The
operation, which is at once more commonly required, and also gives
promise of a more satisfactory result, is the one performed for
cario-necrosis of the shaft only, and in the following manner:--
A straight incision through all the tissues, including the periosteum,
right down to the bone; then with nail or handle of the knife to
separate the periosteum from the bone; then with a pair of bone-pliers
or a fine saw to divide the shaft from both its extremities and remove
it entire.[79]
FOOTNOTES:
[52] _On Diseases and Injuries of Joints_, p. 121.
[53] For a very large amount of most interesting and valuable
information on the whole subject of excisions of joints, I would refer
to Dr. Hodge's most excellent work on this subject--_On Excisions of
Joints_. By Richard M. Hodge, M.D., Boston, Massachusetts.
[54] See Syme's _Observations on Clinical Surgery_, pp. 55, 57; Hodge
_on Excision of Joints_, p. 63.
[55] Maunder's _Operative Surgery_, 2d ed. p. 123.
[56] _Edin. Med. Journal_, May 1873.
[57] Quoted by Mr. Porter. _Dublin Quarterly Journal_ for May 1867, p.
264.
[58] A-A. Deep palmar arch; B. Trapezium; C. Articular surface of ulna;
Dotted lines include the amount removed in Lister's earlier operations;
Unshaded portions are those removed by Lister in cases where the disease
is limited to the carpus. (Reduced from Lister's diagram in _Lancet_,
1865.)
[59] Skey, _Op. Surg._, 2d ed. p. 438.
[60] Abridged from Butcher, _Op. and Con. Surgery_, p. 208.
[61] _Science and Art of Surgery_, 3d ed. p. 745.
[62] _On the Surgical Treatment of Children's Diseases_, pp. 454-6.
[63] _Clinical Society's Transactions_, vol. xiii. p. 71.
[64] Billroth of Vienna and Pelikan of St. Petersburg, quoted from
Heyfelder by Hodge _on Excision of Joints_, p. 161.
[65] _Operative and Conservative Surgery_, pp. 28, 138.
[66] _On Excision of Knee-Joint_, pp. 18, 20.
[67] _Operative and Conservative Surgery_, p. 169.
[68] Mr. Jones of Jersey, _Med. Chir. Trans._, vol. xxxvii. p. 68.
[69] _Lancet_, Oct. 1, 1859.
[70] Barwell _On Diseased Joints_, p. 464.
[71] Syme _On Excision of the Scapula_, pp. 13-26, 1864.
[72] Butcher's _Operative and Conservative Surgery_, p. 225.
[73] For an excellent case, see Annandale on _Diseases of the Finger and
Toes_, p. 261.
[74] Holmes's _Surgery_, 3d edition, vol. iii. p. 771.
[75] _Brit. and Foreign Med. Chir. Review_ for July 1853.
[76] Mr. Holmes in _Lancet_ for February 18, 1856.
[77] _Ibid._ for May 1865.
[78] Butcher, _Operative and Conservative Surgery_, p. 354.
[79] See Butcher, _Operative and Conservative Surgery_, p. 356.
CHAPTER IV.
OPERATIONS ON CRANIUM AND SCALP.
TREPHINING AND TREPANNING are the names given to operations for the
removal of portions of the cranium by circular saws which play on a
centre pivot. When the motion is given to the saw simply by rotation of
the hand of the operator, as is common in this country, it is called
_trephining_; when (as used to be the case in this country, and still is
on the Continent) the motion is given by an instrument like a
carpenter's brace, the operation is called _trepanning_.
The nature of the operation varies according to the nature of the case
for which it is performed. Thus (1.) it may be performed through the
uninjured cranium in the hope of evacuating an abscess of the diploe or
dura mater, or of relieving pressure caused by suppuration in the brain
itself, or by extravasation into the brain or membranes; or (2.) it may
be required in cases of punctured and depressed fracture for the purpose
of removing projecting corners of bone and allowing elevation of the
depressed portions; or (3.) it is sometimes used to remove a circular
portion of bone in cases of epilepsy in which pain or tenderness is felt
at some limited portion of the cranium.
1. _In cases where the cranium and its coverings are entire._--There are
certain positions where, if it is possible, the trephine should _not_ be
applied. These are the longitudinal sinus, the anterior inferior angle
of the parietal bone, where the middle meningeal artery is in the way,
the occipital protuberance, and the various sutures. These being
avoided, a crucial incision is to be made through the skin, and its
flaps reflected. The pericranium should then be raised from the centre,
for a space large enough to hold the crown of the trephine. The
pericranium should never be removed, but carefully raised and preserved,
as its presence will greatly aid in the restoration of bone.[80] The
centre pin should then be projected for about the eighth of an inch and
bored into the bone. On it as a centre the saw is then worked by
semicircular sweeps in both directions alternately, till it forms a
groove for itself. Whenever this groove is deep enough the pin should be
retracted, lest from its projection it pierce the dura mater before the
tables of the skull are cut through. Were the cranium always of the same
thickness, and even of similar consistence, the operation would always
be exceedingly easy; but in both these particulars different skulls vary
much from each other, and thus by a rash use of the instrument the dura
mater may possibly be injured. The tough outer table is more difficult
to cut than the softer and more vascular diploe, and the inner table is
denser than either, but more brittle. In many old skulls, however, the
diploe is wanting altogether, and the two tables are amalgamated, and
often very thin.
Great care must be taken in every case to saw slowly, to remove the
sawdust, and examine the track of the saw by a probe or quill, lest one
part should be cut through quicker than another. The last turns of the
instrument must specially be cautious ones. When the disk of bone does
not at once come away in the trephine, the elevator or the special
forceps for the purpose will easily remove it. If the abscess,
extravasation, or exostosis be then discovered and removed, all that
remains is to remove any sawdust or loose pieces of bone, and possibly
to smooth off any sharp edges of the orifice by an instrument called the
lenticular. This is very seldom required, and now hardly ever used.
2. _In cases of depressed or punctured fracture_ the trephine is
occasionally required (when symptoms of compression are present) for the
purpose of enabling the depressed portion to be elevated. It is unsafe
to apply it to the depressed or fractured bone, lest the additional
pressure of the instrument should cause wound of the dura mater or
brain. It is generally applied on some projecting corner of sound bone
under which the depressed portion is locked, and hence it is rarely
necessary to remove a complete circular portion. In fact very many cases
of such displacement may be remedied more easily by a pair of strong
bone-forceps, or a Hey's saw, applied to remove the projecting portion
of sound bone. The same precautions must be used as in the operation
already described, and the sawing must be done even more cautiously, as
it is rarely more than a semicircle that requires cutting.
In former days trephining was a much more frequent operation than it is
now, and apparently more successful. The reason of the greater apparent
success can easily be found in the fact that it was performed in many
cases merely as a precautionary measure against dreaded inflammation of
the brain, which probably never would have appeared at all, and that the
operation itself is one by no means dangerous. Very numerous
applications of the trephine have been made in the same individual--two,
four, six, and even in one case twenty-seven disks having been removed
from the same skull, and yet the patients have survived.
TUMOURS OF THE SCALP, _Removal of_.--By far the most frequent are the
encysted tumours, or wens. These consist of a thick firm cyst-wall,
which contains soft, curdy, or pultaceous matter, sometimes almost
fluid, at others dry and gritty. They are loosely attached in the
subcutaneous cellular tissue, and unless they have become very large, or
have been much pressed on, are non-adherent to the skin.
The treatment is thus very simple. They should merely be transfixed by a
sharp knife, the contents evacuated, and the cyst seized by strong
dissecting forceps and twisted out.
If they have once become adherent, they must be dissected out in the
usual manner, after the adherent portion of skin has been defined by
elliptical incisions.
In the case of large wens on visible parts of scalp or face, the author
avoids scar, by the following plan:--
Make a small incision, two lines at most, through skin only, then with a
blunt probe separate the cyst from the skin subcutaneously; then,
pulling it to the wound with catch-forceps, empty the cyst and gradually
pull it out, as if taking out an ovarian cyst. No scar but a dimple will
remain.
FOOTNOTES:
[80] See case by the author in the _Edin. Med. Jour._ for June 1868.
CHAPTER V.
OPERATIONS ON EYE.
_Operations on the Eye and its Appendages._
OPERATIONS ON THE LIDS.--
[Illustration: FIG. VII.[81]]
[Illustration: FIG. VIII.[82]]
1. FOR ENTROPIUM OR INVERSION OF THE LIDS, OFTEN COMBINED WITH
TRICHIASIS, IRREGULARITY OF THE CILIÆ.--As in many cases the entropium
seems to depend partly on a too great laxity of the skin of the lid,
combined occasionally with spasm of the orbicularis, the simplest and
most natural plan of operation is (_a_) to remove (Fig. VII. _a_) an
elliptical portion of skin, extending transversely along the whole
length of the affected lid, including the fibres of the orbicularis
lying below it, and then to unite the edges with several points of fine
suture. (_b_) An improvement on this in obstinate cases is proposed by
Mr. Streatfeild (Fig. VIII.) He continues the same incision, but in
addition removes a long narrow wedge-shaped portion of the tarsal
cartilage, grooving it without entirely cutting it through, in such a
manner that the retraction of the skin bends the cartilage backwards,
thus everting to a very considerable extent the previously inverted
ciliæ.[83]
2. ECTROPIUM is the opposite condition from entropium; in it the eyelids
are everted and the palpebral conjunctiva is exposed.
If the result of cicatrix, of a burn, or of disease of bone, the
treatment must be varied according to circumstances, and in many cases,
skin must be transplanted to fill the gap.
In the more usual cases resulting from chronic inflammation the
following simple operations are required:--1. In mild cases the excision
of an elliptical portion of conjunctiva may suffice, the edges must not
be left to contract, but should be brought carefully together. 2. In
more chronic cases, where all the tissues of the lid are very lax, it is
necessary to remove (Fig. VII. _b_) a V-shaped portion of lid and skin,
and then stitch it very carefully up with interrupted sutures.
TUMOURS OF EYELIDS.--1. _Encysted tumours; cysts of the lids; tarsal
tumour._--Under these and similar names are recognised a very frequent
form of disease, chiefly in the upper lid: small tumours which rarely
exceed half a pea in size, convex towards the skin, which is freely
moveable over them; they give no pain, and are annoying only from their
bulk and deformity.
_Operation._--Evert the lid, incise the conjunctiva freely over the
tumour, insert the blunt end of a probe and roughly stir up the contents
of the cyst, thus evacuating it. If the tumour is large and of old
standing it may be requisite to cut out an elliptical or circular
portion of its conjunctival wall. The probe may require to be reapplied
once or twice at intervals of two or three days, and in certain rare
cases it may be necessary as a last resource freely to cauterise the
inside of the cyst with the solid nitrate of silver.
In _no_ case is it ever necessary to excise the tumour from the outside
of the eyelid; when this has been done in error there frequently remains
an awkward and unsightly scar.
2. _Fibrous cysts_, frequently congenital, are met with in one
situation, just over the external angular process of the frontal bone.
These are larger in size than the preceding, ranging from the size of a
barley pickle to that of an almond. Their treatment is excision by a
prolonged and careful dissection from the periosteum, to which they
almost invariably are adherent.
OPERATIONS ON THE LACHRYMAL ORGANS.--In a system of ophthalmic surgery,
various operative procedures might be detailed under this head,
authorised and sanctioned by old custom. Excision of a diseased
lachrymal gland, and removal of stones in the gland or ducts, need no
special directions for their performance, and the operation immediately
to be described, under the head of Mr. Bowman's operation, is applicable
in almost every one of the diseased conditions of the lachrymal canal,
sac, and nasal duct, to the exclusion of all the older methods.
_Mr. Bowman's Operation._--In cases of obstruction of the punctum,
canaliculus, and nasal duct, resulting in watery eye, accumulation of
mucus in the canal, and dryness of the nose, great difficulty used to be
experienced in the treatment. To pass a probe along the punctum was
extremely difficult, in fact, possible only with a very small one, while
the common operation of opening the dilated sac, through the skin, and
then passing probes through this artificial opening, was found quite
useless from the rapid closure of the wound, unless the treatment was
followed up by the insertion and retention of a style in the nasal
duct. This was painful, unsightly, often unsuccessful; and even in some
cases dangerous, from the amount of irritation, suppuration, and even
caries of the nasal bones which is set up.
The principle of Mr. Bowman's most excellent operation is, that the
punctum, canaliculus, and nasal duct resemble in many respects the
urethral passage, and in cases of stricture require to be treated on the
same principle. If, then, it were possible to pass instruments gradually
increasing in size through the seat of stricture, it would be gradually
dilated. It is, however, in the normal state of parts, impossible to
pass any instrument beyond the size of a human hair past the curve which
the canaliculus makes on its entrance to the duct, hence the proper
dilatation cannot be performed. Again, it is found that the puncta,
specially the lower one, are themselves very often to blame, in cases of
watery eye, sometimes because they are inverted or everted, more often
because, sympathising with the lid, they are turgid, angry, and
inflamed, pouting and closed like the orifice of the urethra in a
gonorrhoea.
Mr. Bowman found that by slitting up the inferior punctum and
canaliculus as far as the caruncula, several advantages were
gained:--(1.) The swollen, angry, displaced punctum no longer impeded
the entrance of the tears; (2.) and chiefly when the canaliculus was
slit up, the curve, or rather angle, which impeded the passage of
probes, was done away with, and the nasal duct could be readily and
thoroughly dilated.
_Operation._--The surgeon stands behind the patient, who is seated, and
leans his head on the surgeon's chest. The affected lid is then drawn
gently downwards on the cheek, so as to evert and thoroughly expose the
lower punctum. Into this the surgeon introduces a fine probe of steel
gilt, the first inch of which is very thin, especially at the point, and
deeply grooved on one side, exactly like a small (and straight) Syme's
stricture director.
Keeping the canal relaxed by relaxing his hold on the lid, the surgeon
now gently wriggles the probe along the canaliculus, gradually
stretching it as the probe advances, so as to avoid catching of the
sides of the canal before the point of the instrument, till he is
satisfied that it has fairly entered the nasal duct. He then stretches
the eyelid, brings the handle of the probe out over the cheek so as to
evert the punctum as much as possible, and then with a fine
sharp-pointed knife enters the groove (Fig. IX.), and fairly slits up
the punctum and the canal to the full extent. The incision should be as
straight as possible, and through the upper wall of the canaliculus. A
dexterous turn of the instrument upwards on the forehead will generally
enable it to be passed at once fairly into the nose through the nasal
duct, the usual rule being observed of passing it downwards and slightly
backwards, the handle of the probe passing just over the supraorbital
notch.
[Illustration: FIG. IX.[84]]
For several days after the operation the probe will have to be passed,
both to prevent the wound in the canaliculus from healing up, which it
is too apt to do, and also to gradually dilate the nasal duct if it has
been previously strictured. Probes and directors of various sizes are
required; in fact very much the same instruments (in miniature) as are
required for the treatment of stricture of the urethra.
Mr. Greenslade has invented a very ingenious little instrument, of
which, through his kindness, I am able to show a woodcut (Fig. X.), for
slitting up the canaliculus without having to fit the knife in the
groove.
[Illustration: FIG. X.]
PTERYGIUM, the reddish fleshy triangular growth, with its base at the
inner canthus, and its apex spreading to and often over the cornea,
requires invariably a small operation for its removal. In most cases it
will be found sufficient merely to raise the lax portion over the
sclerotic with forceps, and divide it freely, removing a transverse
portion. If it has encroached upon the cornea, the portion interfering
with vision must be dissected off with great care and removed.
In some cases, however, it has been found that after removal of a large
pterygium, a retraction of the caruncle and the semilunar fold is apt to
take place, which renders the eyeball unpleasantly prominent. To avoid
this the pterygium may be carefully dissected up from its apex to near
its base, and then displaced laterally either upwards or downwards, its
apex and sides being stitched to a previously prepared site of
conjunctiva.
OPERATION FOR CONVERGENT STRABISMUS.--_Division of the internal
rectus._--_Subconjunctival operation._--The spring-wire speculum (C)
separating the lids, the surgeon divides the conjunctiva by a pair of
scissors in a horizontal line (Fig. XI. A A) from the inner margin of
the cornea, a little below its transverse diameter to the caruncle,
then snipping through the sub-conjunctival tissue, he passes a blunt
hook bent at an obtuse angle under the tendon of the internal rectus,
and endeavours by depressing the handle to project the point of the hook
at the wound. Then with successive snips of the scissors he divides the
tendon on the hook, close to its sclerotic margin. Lest it should not be
freely divided, various dips with the hook may be made to catch any
stray fibres left untouched; but very great care should be taken not to
wound the conjunctiva beyond the first horizontal cut in it. The tendon
being divided satisfactorily, the edges of conjunctiva should be
replaced, and the eye closed for a few hours.
[Illustration: FIG. XI.[85]]
The original operation of Dieffenbach, now rarely practised, consisted
in making an incision, B B, across the tendon, then, by cutting the
areolar tissue exposing the insertion of the tendon, and dividing it
freely; after which the sclerotic in the neighbourhood was to be cleaned
and any band of fibres divided. There are risks on the one hand of a
most unseemly exophthalmos with divergent squint, and on the other of a
retraction of the semilunar fold, so that the sub-conjunctival operation
is always preferable.
OPERATIONS FOR DIVERGENT SQUINT.--This very serious deformity is often
the result of the operation for convergent squint, and is associated
with a fixed, leering, and prominent eye, and frequently with most
annoying double vision.
1. In a simple case of primary divergent strabismus (very rare) it is
sufficient simply to divide the external rectus in the manner already
described for division of the internal.
2. If secondary to an operation for convergent squint, the indication is
to restore the cut internal rectus to a position on the sclerotic a
little behind its previous one, as the cause of the divergence is found
in a complete detachment of the internal rectus. This is attempted in
various ways.
(1.) _Jules Guérin_ carefully divided the conjunctiva over it, and
sought for the remains of the internal rectus, freeing it from its
attachments. He then passed a thread through the sclerotic on the
_outer_ side of the globe, and by pulling on it and fixing it across the
nose, rotated the eye inwards, in the hope that the remains of the
internal rectus would secure a new attachment.
(2.) _Graefe's modification_ of this is more certain. Without any minute
dissection he merely separated the internal rectus, along with the
conjunctiva, and fascia over it, so that it can be pulled forwards, then
cut the external rectus, and inverted the eyeball to a sufficient extent
by means of a thread passed through the portion of the tendon of the
external rectus, which remains attached to the sclerotic. The risk of
all these operations, in which both muscles are divided, is protrusion
of the eyeball from the removal of muscular tension.
(3.) _Solomon's operation for the radical cure of extreme divergent
strabismus_,[86] is at first sight a very curious one. Without going
into all the details, the steps are as follows:--
_a._ A square-shaped flap, with its attached base at the nasal side, is
raised, containing the remains of the inner rectus and its adjacent
parts.
_b._ A flap similar in shape and size, but different in the position of
its attached base, is made on the other side of the cornea. It is made
by dividing the external rectus just behind its tendon, and then
reflecting forwards the tendon with its conjunctiva.
_c._ These two flaps are united over the vertical meridian of the cornea
by sutures, three generally being sufficient. This entirely hides the
cornea for a time, but eventually shrivels and contracts, and the
remnants are to be cut off with scissors three weeks after the
operation.
PUNCTURE OF THE CORNEA.--_Paracentesis of the Anterior
Chamber._--_Tapping of the Aqueous Humour._--This very simple operation
is in many cases extremely useful. In cases of corneal ulcer, the result
either of injury or disease, where there is much pain in the bone, and
evidence of tension of the globe, it gives great relief, and when
repeated at short intervals greatly hastens a cure. Sperino of Turin
recommends its frequent use in cases of chronic glaucoma.
_Operation._--The surgeon stands behind the patient, who is seated; the
lids being fixed, the upper by the surgeon's left hand, and the lower by
an assistant, the cornea is punctured a little in front of the sclerotic
margin, either with a broad needle, or, what is as good, a well-worn
Beer's knife. Care must be taken on entering the knife, on the one hand,
not to wound the iris, which is sometimes arched forwards in the cases
of commencing glaucoma, and, on the other, fairly to enter the anterior
chamber, not merely split up the layers of the cornea. On withdrawing
the cataract knife, the aqueous humour gets out by its side, aided by a
slight turn of the knife, sometimes with great force, and in much larger
quantity than usual. If the operation has been done by a needle, a blunt
probe requires to be introduced on the removal of the needle. Once
punctured, the remarkable fact is that the same wound suffices for many
succeeding tappings, which are effected by pressing the probe into the
wound day after day, sometimes several times a day, with great relief
to the symptoms. If the probe is to be used for succeeding evacuations,
the operator must be careful to remember the exact spot at which the
needle or knife was entered. To facilitate remembering it, it is best,
when nothing prevents it, to operate always in the same spot. Sperino
chooses the horizontal meridian of the cornea at the temporal side, at
the junction of the cornea and sclerotic.
CATARACT OPERATIONS.--Here we cannot enter into any discussion of the
pathology of cataract and the varieties of it. Enough for our purpose to
know that the lens is in some cases hard, in others soft, and that thus
in the latter it may be removed piecemeal, and by a small incision,
while in the former, removal must be almost entire, and by a larger
opening.
In cataract, the lens, which should be transparent, has become opaque,
and the object of treatment is to get it out of the line of sight, to
prevent it from obstructing, now that it can no longer assist sight.
The operations used for this end may be classed under three heads:--
1. _Operations for the removal of the lens out of the way without its
removal from the eye._--These used to be extensively practised under the
name couching, and are of two kinds,--_Depression_, where the lens is
simply pushed down from its place by a needle; _Reclination_, in which
it is shoved backwards (turning on its transverse axis) as well as
downwards. These are relics of old surgery, and very rarely practised by
any oculists of eminence, as, though easy to perform, and with very
flattering immediate results, the risks of chronic inflammation of the
whole globe and injury to the retina are very great.
2. _For solution._--THE NEEDLE OPERATION.--Suitable (among other cases)
especially in congenital cataracts in infants, and in cases of diabetic
cataract.
The principle of this operation is that the lens, once the capsule is
freely opened in front and the aqueous humour admitted, is found rapidly
to become absorbed and disappear, if the cataract has been a soft one.
_Operation._--A needle with a lance-shaped head is to be used. It should
be so made that the rounded shaft of the needle is just large enough to
play freely in the wound made by the broader point, and yet not so small
as to allow the aqueous humour to escape rapidly. The pupil has been
dilated, the patient is lying on his back, and the globe is fixed by
forceps attached to the conjunctiva of the inner side of the eye, and
held by an assistant. The surgeon then enters the needle close to the
sclerotic margin of the cornea, carries it fairly on in the anterior
chamber, till the centre of the pupil is reached. He then, by bringing
forward the handle, projects the point backwards against the anterior
capsule, which he freely lacerates with the point and edge in several
directions.
In infants, where processes of repair go on very rapidly, the whole lens
may be freely broken up. In diabetic cataract, or indeed in all cases of
solution, where the patient is adolescent or adult, or the eye at all
weak, only a small portion of the lens should be attacked at one
sitting.
The needle should then be withdrawn gradually and with great care, that
the broad axis of the blade be in exactly the same position in which it
entered, _i.e._ flat and parallel with the iris, lest the iris be
wounded, entangled, or prolapsed.
The eye is then to be closed for twenty-four hours; if there is much
pain, atropia must be freely used.
_Varieties in the Operation._--Some use two needles at once for breaking
up the lens. Some surgeons prefer to enter the needle through the
sclerotic; this complicates the operation and renders it less certain,
as the point of the needle is of course out of sight in its progress
between the iris and the lens.
Even in children this operation requires in most cases to be repeated at
least once, while in adults it may be required at short intervals for
many months.
3. _By Extraction._--In these operations the lens is at once removed
from the eye--
(1.) By linear, or perhaps, more correctly, rectilinear incision. This
method is specially suited for cases of soft cataract.
_Operation._--A fine spear-shaped needle is very cautiously introduced
through the cornea, about a line from its outer margin, and the anterior
capsule lacerated, and the lens broken up, great care being taken not to
injure the posterior capsule. The pupil must then be kept freely
dilated, the wound heals at once, and the aqueous humour reaccumulates.
[Illustration: FIG. XII.]
[Illustration: FIG. XIII.]
From three to six days after this first operation, a linear incision
(Fig. XII.) is made in the outer side of the cornea by a straight stab
from a double-edged knife, or rather spear. The size of the incision
must vary with the size and consistence of the lens, and can be
regulated by the breadth of the knife and the distance to which it is
entered. By careful withdrawal of the knife, in many cases a large
portion of the soft lens can be removed along with it, and then what
remains must be cautiously lifted out by a flat spoon introduced through
the wound, and behind the remains of the lens.
Care must be taken lest any of the lens substance remain in the wound;
with this precaution the incision generally heals rapidly, and with much
less risk of general inflammation of the ball than in the ordinary flap
operation of extraction.
EXTRACTION OF SOFT CATARACT BY SUCTION.--Mr. T. P. Teale, of
Leeds,[87] has invented an instrument by which the removal of soft
cataract is made more easy, through a linear incision by suction,
applied through the medium of a hollow curette furnished with an
india-rubber tube and mouth-piece.
The curette is of the usual size, but is roofed in (instead of
being merely grooved) to within one line of its extremity, thus
forming a tube flattened above, but terminating in a small cup.
This is screwed into an ordinary straight handle, which is hollow
for a short distance, far enough to join with a second tube fixed
at right angles to the handle, and into which the india-rubber pipe
and mouth-piece, through which suction is to be made, is attached.
In many cases it seems to serve its purpose extremely well.
Certain points require attention:--1. That the puncture to admit
the curette is large enough; 2. That its end be sufficiently
rounded; 3. Its open end must be held in the area of the pupil, and
not allowed to pass behind the iris, else there is great risk of
the iris being drawn in. Among other advantages claimed by its
inventor, the chief seems to be a more thorough removal of the lens
than by the ordinary means, and consequently less risk of opaque
deposit in the posterior capsule.
(2.) EXTRACTION BY FLAP.--When properly performed in a suitable subject,
and when free from accident, this operation is one of the most
thoroughly beautiful and satisfactory in the whole domain of surgery;
but it is difficult, and liable to many risks which neither skill nor
caution can completely guard against.
It is required in many cases of hard cataract, which are amenable
neither to solution nor linear extraction.
_Operation_ must be considered in various stages:--
_a._ To make a flap of cornea large enough to permit of the removal of
the entire lens without pressure or bruising. To make it of cornea only,
to prevent the escape of the vitreous, and to avoid injury of the iris.
The great difficulty in making the required section of the cornea is,
that we are debarred from using scissors or any ordinary knife or
scalpel in making it, for this reason, that the sawing movements
required in all ordinary cutting are inadmissible here, as any
withdrawal of the blade, however slight, would permit evacuation of the
aqueous humour, and at once be followed by prolapse of the iris before
the knife. Hence we are compelled to make the requisite flap by one
steady push of a knife, which, too, must be of such a shape as in its
entrance constantly to fill up the wound it makes. Very various shapes
and sizes of knives have been proposed, the one called Beer's knife
being the sort of model or common parent from which all the others are
derived. It is triangular in shape, with a straight back, about 12-10ths
of an inch in length, and 4-10ths broad at the base of the blade,
tapering at a straight edge from its base to its point, and also
diminishing in thickness to the point.
Considerable difference of opinion exists as to the relative merits of
an upper or lower section of the cornea. The general view at present
seems to be that an upper section is to be preferred; but in cases where
the surgeon is not ambidexterous, it is better that he should make the
section which lies easiest to his hand than attempt an upper section in
a less favourable position.
The patient should be placed flat on his back, the lids should be gently
opened, the upper one by the surgeon, the lower one by his assistant,
who is to press the lid downwards against the malar bone without
exercising any pressure on the ball. The eye should be still further
steadied by the conjunctiva and subjacent cellular tissue on the inner
side being seized by a pair of catch-forceps, still with no downward
pressure on the ball. The point of the knife must then be introduced
about a line from the outer sclerotic margin of the transverse diameter
of the cornea (Fig. XIII.), the blade being held parallel with the
fibres of the iris, pushed steadily across the anterior chamber, and
protruded as nearly as possible at the corresponding spot at the inner
side of the cornea. The aqueous humour should not escape till the
section is completed. If it does, the iris is almost certainly projected
forwards and entangled in the blade of the knife, a most annoying
accident, and one which is not easily remedied. The books tell us of
various manoeuvres by pressure or otherwise, by which the iris may be
pushed back. Practically, however, if it has once occurred it is not
easily saved from being cut. If a small portion only is involved, it is
not of much consequence; if a large portion be in danger, it is
sometimes necessary to withdraw the knife before the section is
completed, and finish it with a probe-pointed, curved bistoury.
If, however, the flap is safely finished, the lids should be gently
allowed to close for a few seconds.
On opening them again the surgeon must decide whether the corneal flap
is sufficiently large to allow the lens to come out without force; if
not, he must enlarge it either by the narrow probe-pointed "secondary
knife" or by a pair of sharp scissors. Occasionally the lens, and even a
little vitreous humour, may escape at once on the section being
completed, but this is not to be desired.
_b._ _Laceration of the Capsule of the Lens._--This is performed by
insinuating a sharp curved needle under the corneal flap, avoiding the
iris, and then tearing up the anterior capsule through the dilated
pupil, the chief point to be attended to being that the capsule be
lacerated in its entire length.
_c._ _Removal of the Lens._--This must be done with the most extreme
caution and gentleness, lest the vitreous humour be also evacuated. The
surgeon's object is to tilt the lens so as to turn it slightly on its
transverse axis, and cause the edge nearest the section to rise out of
the capsule and appear at the wound. This is best done by gentle
pressure at the required spot by the back of the needle, or by a common
probe. When the lens begins to protrude the pressure must be very,
gentle, lest it be forced out suddenly and the vitreous follow it.
Soft portions of the lens are apt to remain adherent to the wound in the
cornea. These must be removed by scoop or probe.
_Varieties in the method of Flap Extraction._--Jacobsen of Königsberg in
every case gives chloroform. He always makes his flap in the boundary
line of the cornea and the sclerotic, through a vascular structure, and
he believes that union is on this account more rapid, and after
extraction removes that portion of the iris which appears to have been
most exposed to bruising during the exit of the lens.
The operation of extraction may in many cases be either preceded or
followed by iridectomy, as proposed by Mooren, Von Graefe, and others.
The following operation seems to diminish the risks to a very great
extent:--
_Professor Von Graefe's Operation._--The lids are separated by a
speculum, and the eyeball is drawn down by forceps placed
immediately below the cornea. The point of a small knife, of which
the edge is directed upwards, is inserted at a point fully half a
line from the margin of the cornea near its upper part, so as to
enter the anterior chamber as peripherally as possible. The point
should not be directed at first towards the spot for
counterpuncture; nor till the knife has advanced fully three and a
half lines within the visible portion of the anterior chamber,
should the handle be lowered and the point directed so as to make
a symmetrical counterpuncture, which will give the external wound
a length of four and a half or five lines. As soon as the
resistance to the point is felt to be overcome, showing that the
counterpuncture is effected, the knife must at once be turned
forward, so that its back is directed almost to the centre of the
ideal sphere of the cornea, whether the conjunctiva is transfixed
or not, and the scleral border is divided by boldly pushing the
knife onwards and again drawing it backwards. This portion of the
operation is concluded by the formation of a conjunctival flap a
line and a half or two lines in length. A section thus made is
almost perpendicular to the cornea, a circumstance much
facilitating the passage of the lens, and the line of incision is
nearly straight, so that the wound does not gape. The iris should
be excised to the very end of the wound, and the capsule most
freely opened by a V-shaped laceration. Any lens, even the hardest,
may then be removed without the introduction of an instrument into
the eye, but Von Graefe's experience shows it to be advisable to
assist the evacuation by the hook in about one case in eight. In a
certain number of cases the lens will escape without difficulty
when the operator presses on the posterior lip of the wound,
especially when the back of the spoon is made to glide along the
sclera; should this not occur, Von Graefe uses a peculiar blunt
hook, or occasionally, though rarely, a spoon. A compressing
bandage is applied, and replaced at intervals.[88]
We are recommended to perform it in two sets of cases:--
1. Those in which the eye is known to be unhealthy and liable to
inflammations, specially of iris, retina, or choroid. In cases where the
patient has already lost an eye, Von Graefe thinks iridectomy should
always precede extraction. In the above, then, it is a precautionary
measure, and, if convenient, should be performed three, four, or even
six weeks before the extraction.
2. It is recommended to be performed at the same time as extraction in
all cases in which the operation has presented any special difficulties,
or has not gone smoothly, _e.g._ in cases where the lens has required
much force to expel it, either from the flap of cornea being too small,
or from adhesions between the lens and capsule; or, again, in cases in
which there is a tendency to prolapse of the iris, in which any of the
cortical substance has been necessarily left behind, or in which old
adhesions had existed between the iris and capsule, or between the
cornea and iris.
OPERATIONS FOR ARTIFICIAL PUPIL.--The cases are by no means unfrequent
in which it is necessary to remove or destroy a portion of the iris to
admit light to the retina. In cases of excessive prolapse of the iris
after extraction of the lens, where the iris has formed adhesions to the
wound, and still more frequently in cases where central opacities of the
cornea have fairly occluded the natural pupil, the only chance for
vision is to enlarge the old one, or make a new pupil by removal of the
iris.
Very various operations have been proposed, and exceedingly numerous and
complicated instruments invented for this purpose. We can notice here
only one or two of the most approved procedures:--
1. _Incision_ is the simplest.
This is practicable and effectual only in cases where the iris is so far
healthy as still to retain its contractile power, and so far free from
adhesions as to be able to make use of it. The best example of such a
case is that of a cataract, in which after extraction a prolapse of the
iris has occurred to such an extent as to obliterate the pupil, and
where, at the same time, the only adhesions are to the wound, none to
the cornea.
_Operation._--A double-edged needle is introduced through the cornea
near its margin; on arriving at the place where the pupil ought to be,
one edge is drawn against the iris, and divides it transversely, if
possible, without injuring the lens; the fibres of the iris start back,
contract, so that a sufficiently large central pupil may be obtained.
2. _Excision._--In the far more frequent cases in which there exist
adhesions between iris and cornea, or iris and anterior capsule,
incision is not sufficient, and it is necessary to excise a portion of
the iris.
The simplest and safest operation is the following:--
The patient recumbent, and the lids held apart by a speculum, the
eyeball should be steadied by the forceps of an assistant. A broad
cutting needle should then be introduced at the lower or outer edge of
the corneal margin. This must be very gently withdrawn so as to retain
as much aqueous humour as possible. Into the wound thus made the surgeon
must introduce the blunt hook (known as Tyrrell's) at first with its
point forwards, then, on arriving opposite the edge of the pupil, which
it is intended to enlarge or replace, with its point turned backwards,
so as to hook over the edge of the iris and thus drag on it. Once the
hook has fairly got hold, it must again be rotated forwards, and
withdrawn in the same direction as it was put in. The iris thus pulled
out of the wound is to be cut off with a pair of fine scissors, so as to
remove a sufficient amount to make a new pupil of the required size.
But in those cases in which the whole or greater part of the pupillary
margin is adherent, the blunt hook will not do, because there exists no
edge round which to hook it. One of two plans is generally chosen to
remedy this:--
(1.) A free incision made with a double-edged needle; through this a
pair of canula forceps is introduced, with which a portion of iris is
seized and dragged to the external wound; it can then either be cut off
or tied (see _Iridesis_); or,
(2.) A previous attempt may be made to free a portion to form an edge to
catch hold of, either by incision or by _Corelysis_ (_q.v._)
IRIDESIS.--_Critchett's Operation of Ligature._[89]--Patient being put
under chloroform, the ball is fixed by the wire speculum, and also by a
fold of conjunctiva being seized by forceps. An opening is then made
with a broad needle through the margin of the cornea, _close_ to the
sclerotic, just large enough to admit the canula forceps, with which a
small portion of iris close to its ciliary attachment is seized and
drawn out; a piece of fine floss silk, previously tied in a small loop
round the canula forceps, is slipped down and carefully tightened round
the prolapsed portion. This speedily shrinks, and the loop may generally
be removed about the second day. The chief advantage claimed for this
method is the ease with which the size of the new pupil can be
regulated. It is also suitable in cases of conical cornea, where it is
wished to change the form of the pupil into a narrow slit.
_N.B._--The ends of the ligature must be left sufficiently long to avoid
any risk of their being drawn out of sight into the substance of the
cornea, or even into the ball, by retraction of the fibres of the iris.
CORELYSIS.--_Freeing of the Pupil._--An operative procedure for
separating posterior adhesions of the iris to the lens. In it the
surgeon hopes to act, not on the iris, as in the operations for
artificial pupil, but only on the bands of false membrane which distort
the pupil.
The operation is briefly as follows:--The eye being firmly held by a
wire speculum, and forceps pinching up the conjunctiva, a broad needle
is passed rapidly through the cornea at a point which may give easy
access to the adhesion to be torn through. This point is generally at
the opposite margin of the irregular pupil, so that the needle may pass
through the cornea in front of the one side of the iris, then through
the orifice of the pupil, so as to reach the back of the other side. The
needle is withdrawn gradually, so as to lose as little of the aqueous
humour as possible, and then the spatula hook, called after the inventor
of the operation, Mr. Streatfeild, is introduced. It is used first as a
spatula, that is, with its blunt, though polished edge, to separate the
adhesions, and if this is unsuccessful, as a hook (FIG. XIV.), so as to
catch and tear them. In cases which resist the instrument used in both
of these ways, Mr. Streatfeild has used very fine canula-scissors to cut
the adhesions.[90] Such a further complication of the operation
practically alters its character into an operation for artificial pupil,
_q.v._
[Illustration: FIG. XIV.[91]]
IRIDECTOMY.--In cases of acute glaucoma, irido-choroiditis, and all deep
inflammations of the eye in which the ocular tension is increased, also
in certain cases of flap extraction already alluded to, the operation of
iridectomy as originally proposed by Von Graefe will be found of use.
_Operation._--The patient recumbent, and the eye absolutely fixed by
speculum and forceps, a linear incision, varying in length from
one-sixth to one-fourth of an inch, is made just at the margin of the
cornea. The point of election is the upper pole of the cornea. The lens
must not be wounded. The best instrument for making the section is an
ordinary linear extraction knife, bent at an angle to admit of its being
introduced from above. The iris will protrude through the wound, or, if
adherent, must be drawn out by forceps, and then is to be cut off with
scissors. The operation is rarely successful, unless a third, or at
least a fourth, of the iris be removed.
EXCISION OF A STAPHYLOMATOUS CORNEA.--There are certain cases in which
the whole or greater part of the cornea bulges forward in a great blue
projecting tumour. It is very ugly as it protrudes between the lids and
prevents their closure; besides this, from its exposure it frequently
inflames, even ulcerates, and has a most injurious effect on the other
eye. In the cases suitable for operation vision is completely gone,
without hope of its restoration by any operative procedure.
The best thing for the patient is to have just enough of the staphyloma
removed to enable the remains of the eyeball to form a good stump for an
artificial eye. Various means have been suggested for doing this,
varying in extent and severity from a mere shaving off the apex of the
staphyloma to excision of the whole eyeball.
By far the best method of operating is the one proposed and practised by
Mr. Critchett.
[Illustration: FIG. XV.[92]]
[Illustration: FIG. XVI.[93]]
The object of it is to remove an elliptical portion of the front of the
staphyloma, or the whole staphyloma, when it is possible, and at the
same time to prevent as far as possible the escape of the vitreous.
_Operation._--Three, four, or five small curved needles armed with
thread are passed through the staphyloma from above downwards, being
each entered a little above the line of the intended upper incision, and
brought out a little below the line of the intended lower one (Fig. XV.)
To remove the included elliptical portion, Mr. Critchett pierces the
sclerotic with a Beer's knife, just in front of the tendinous insertion
of the external rectus. Through this incision a pair of probe-pointed
scissors is introduced, and the piece cut just within the points of the
needles. On the removal, the needles, which have retained the vitreous
by their pressure, are drawn through and the threads cautiously tied.
Union by first intention very often occurs, and an excellent stump is
left with a narrow depressed transverse cicatrix[94] (Fig. XVI.)
EXTIRPATION OF THE EYEBALL.--1. _Of the Eyeball only._--A circular
incision should be made with curved scissors through the conjunctiva, a
little beyond the corneal margin, then, beginning with the external
rectus, muscle after muscle should be raised with the forceps, and
divided, after which the optic nerve is cut through with the scissors. A
slight preliminary extension outwards of the optic commissure will
facilitate the dissection, and must be secured with metallic sutures;
any vessels should be tied, and the orbit filled up with a light
compress of charpie secured with a bandage.
2. _Of the contents of the Orbit._--This may be required for malignant
disease, but with a very poor prognosis. The optic commissure should be
freely divided, and then, by bold strokes of curved scissors, or curved
probe-pointed bistoury, the orbit may be fairly emptied by scooping out
its contents. Even the periosteum may require to be scraped off, and the
optic nerve divided as far back as possible. The hæmorrhage may be
pretty smart, but can generally be easily checked by compresses; if
necessary, these can be soaked in the solution of the perchloride of
iron.
The author has done this operation many times, in cases extensive and of
old standing, for malignant disease, melanotic and encephaloid. All have
recovered, and in no instance has there been any trouble in stopping the
bleeding.
FOOTNOTES:
[81] _a._ Elliptical incision for entropium; _b._ wedge-shaped incision
for ectropium.
[82] Fig. VIII. illustrates Streatfeild's operation for entropium.--_a._
section of skin; _b._ section of levator palpebrae; _c._ section of
cartilage of lid; _d._ section of conjunctiva; _e._ wedge-shaped portion
excised.
[83] _Ophthalmic Hospital Reports_, vol. i. p. 121.
[84] Rough diagram of Bowman's operation, showing the grooved director
in the punctum, and the knife in the groove just before it slits up the
canaliculus.
[85] Diagram of operations for convergent squint--A A, line of
sub-conjunctival incision; B B, line of Dieffenbach's operation; C, wire
speculum.
[86] _The Radical Cure of Extreme Divergent Strabismus._ J. Vose
Solomon, F.R.C.S., 1864.
[87] _Ophthalmic Hospital Reports_, vol. iv. part ii. p. 197.
[88] _Biennial Retrospect_ for 1865-66. Syd. Soc. pp. 363-4. For a
thorough discussion of the merits of this operation, see papers by Von
Graefe in _Brit. Med. Jour._ for 1867, vol. i. pp. 379, 446, 499, 657,
765.
[89] _Ophthalmic Hospital Reports_, vol. i. p. 224.
[90] Streatfeild on Corelysis. _Ophthalmic Hospital Reports_, vol. ii.
p. 309.
[91] _a_ iris; _b_ lens; _c_ cornea. The hook is seen applied to the
adhesion between lens and iris.
[92] The staphyloma with the needles inserted, the lids held asunder by
a spring speculum. The elliptical dotted line shows the amount to be
removed; the vertical one, the position of the preliminary incision with
the Beer's knife.
[93] Resulting stump after the stitches are inserted.
[94] _Ophthalmic Hospital Reports_, vol. iv. part 1.
CHAPTER VI.
OPERATIONS ON THE NOSE AND LIPS.
RHINOPLASTIC OPERATIONS.--The operations for the restoration or repair
of lost or mutilated noses are so various, and the minuteness of detail
necessary for full description of them so great, that a complete account
in a manual such as this is impossible; a brief notice of some of the
most important varieties of the operation is all that can be given.
_Principles._--1. It is necessary in every case that a suitable edge be
prepared on which to fix the flap of skin, however obtained. To be
suitable, this edge, should be (_a_) made in healthy skin, not in old or
weak cicatrices; hence no trace of the original disease should be left;
(_b_) it should be made thoroughly raw, by the removal of an appreciable
amount of its edge; it should be pared, not merely scraped.
2. It is useless to attempt to restore a nose unless the patient is in
good general health, well nourished, and perfectly free from all remains
of disease in the nose or its neighbourhood. The flaps which are to form
the new nose may be obtained either from (1.) the cheeks; (2.) the
forehead; (3.) a distant part either of the patient or of another
person.
(1.) _From the Cheeks._--When the cheeks are healthy, and specially if
they are tolerably full and lax, the flaps from the cheeks produce much
the most satisfactory result. As performed by Mr. Syme, the operation
consists in the shaping of two equal flaps (A, A) from the skin of the
cheek at each side, having the attachment above. A site for each flap is
formed by the careful paring away of the whole thickness of the edge of
the cavity of the lost organ (see Fig. XVII.)
[Illustration: FIG. XVII.[95]]
The flaps are then raised from their attachments to the upper jaw-bone,
and approximated in the middle line by several points of metallic suture
and the outer edges stitched to the raw surface on each side at a proper
distance from the nasal orifice. If any septum remains of the old nose,
it may be made very useful as a fixed point, a straight needle being
thrust through one flap close to its outer lower edge, then through the
septum, and out at a corresponding point of the other flap. The edges of
the wound left in the cheek at each side can generally be, to a certain
extent, approximated by silver stitches (B, B) and the triangular
portion (C, C), which is necessarily left to heal by granulation, proves
an advantage, as by its depression it enhances the apparent height and
prominence of the new organ. The cavity should be very gently distended
with lint, and may be supported by the blades of a small pair of
forceps, applied so as to embrace the nose.
(2.) _From the Forehead._--The Indian operation may be used as a last
resource, in cases where, from disease, the cheeks also have suffered,
and are not to be trusted to for flaps.
_Operation._--1. It should be decided as to the shape and size of the
portion of skin necessary, by fitting on pieces of soft leather or
moulding wax. To allow for shrinking, the flap should be made at least
one-third larger than is at first apparently necessary. The exact
boundaries of the flap to be raised should then be marked out on the
forehead by lightly pencilling it with nitrate of silver, the mark from
which is not effaced by blood, as is sure to be the case with an ink
line. Various shapes have been proposed for the flap varying in length
of neck, in the shape of the angles, and especially in the arrangements
made for the formation of a columna. Some (as Liston) prefer afterwards
to provide for the columns separately, by a flap raised from the upper
lip in a subsequent operation. The flap is then to be raised from the
forehead, care being taken not to injure the periosteum. The incision is
to be carried lower down on the side (generally the left), to which the
flap is to be twisted. The flap is then to be brought round (Fig.
XVIII.) and carefully fitted on to the edges previously prepared for its
reception. The neck must be left as lax as possible, lest by tight
twisting the supply of blood be cut off, and the flaps thus deprived of
nourishment. Both silk and metallic sutures are recommended. Hamilton of
Dublin,[96] after a large experience of both, prefers the former.
[Illustration: FIG. XVIII.[97]]
There are various risks; sloughing of the whole flap at once, shrinking
of it after weeks or even months; certain inevitable drawbacks, as the
cicatrix on the forehead, the very various and ludicrous changes of
colour to which the new organ is subject,--these cannot be remedied by
further operation. Two points generally require a second use of the
knife a few weeks after:--(1.) The neck of the flap is sure to be
redundant and prominent, but can be pared. (2.) The columna almost
always requires improving, and, in Liston's method, to be made. He pared
the inner surface of the apex of the nose, and then raised a central
flap of the lip in the middle line, about a quarter of an inch broad,
and extending from the remains of the old septum to the free border,
raising it from the gum, and stitched the free end of it to the prepared
apex, bringing together the two divided portions of the lip by ordinary
harelip sutures. Tho columna, if redundant, could be shaved down, and it
was found that the mucous surface very quickly became like skin on
exposure.
For other points with regard to the operation, reference may be made to
the works of Liston and Skey, and Hamilton's monograph, referred to
above.
_Note._--The tongue and groove suture proposed by Professor Pancoast,
and recommended by Professor Gross, is said to be specially suitable for
such plastic operations. It is very complicated, as it requires one edge
to be bevelled to a wedge shape, the other being grooved to include the
wedge, thus opposing four raw surfaces, which are retained in contact by
being transfixed by fine silk sutures.
(3.) There are certain cases in which neither cheeks nor forehead are
available for flaps, and yet the patients press very much for some
operation. If they have patience and determination, the Taliacotian or
Italian operation may be attempted.
Without going into detail, the principle of it is as follows:--1. A
piece of skin of suitable size was marked out over the left biceps, and
defined by two longitudinal incisions, and raised from the subcutaneous
cellular tissue, thus being left attached by its two ends only; a piece
of linen was pulled below it. 2. After a few days the upper end was also
divided, and the flap thus contracted. In a few days more the sides of
the old nose were made raw, and the upper free surface of the flap also
made raw and stitched to them, the arm being fastened up by a most
elaborate series of bandages. 3. After a fortnight in this position, the
last attachment of the flap to the arm was severed, and the new nose
could then be modelled at pleasure.
The literature of the subject is exceedingly curious, especially the
cases in which the new material was obtained from an accommodating
friend or servant.
OPERATIVE TREATMENT OF LUPUS.--We may here notice a mode of treatment
which has admirable results. The patient being put deeply under an
anæsthetic, the surgeon with a sharp spoon carefully pares away all the
diseased tissues, and then destroys the base either by nitric acid or a
strong solution of chloride of zinc. The author has done this in a great
number of cases with excellent effect.
NASAL POLYPI, _Removal of._--Of these there are different kinds.
1. ORDINARY MUCOUS POLYPI.--These grow from the spongy bones, generally
the superior one, are non-malignant in their character, soft and
vascular, often fill up the whole of both nasal cavities, and frequently
hang down behind into the pharynx. The practical point to remember is
that, however large and numerous they may be, they _invariably_ have
their origin from a comparatively limited spot, the edge of the spongy
bone, and _always_ hang from a narrow neck. Hence the treatment is easy
and satisfactory, if the neck be attacked, and not the body of the
tumour.
Slightly curved, narrow-bladed forceps should be passed along by the
side of the superior spongy bone, with their blades open, till the neck
of the polypus is seized. Holding it firmly, the forceps should then be
slowly twisted round till the neck is destroyed and the polypus
detached. This should be repeated till the patient can blow freely
through both nostrils. If attempts are made to seize the body of the
polypus, it will break down under the forceps, bleed, and give much
trouble.
2. THE FIBROUS POLYPUS.--This form is fortunately much more rare than
the other. It is almost invariably single, is attached to the posterior
margin of the nares by a narrow but very strong root, is extremely firm
in consistence, may grow to a large size so as to obstruct both
nostrils, generally gives rise to severe and frequent hæmorrhages. The
hæmorrhage _during_ any attempt to remove it is generally of the most
severe character, but ceases _immediately_ on its complete detachment.
We owe nearly all that we do know about the treatment of this form of
polypus to Mr. Syme. His method is--By the ordinary polypus forceps
described already, he seized the tumour through the nostril, and then
with the fore and middle fingers of the left hand introduced behind the
soft palate, he attacked the point of attachment, and by his nails,
aided by the forceps, detached it from its narrow base.[98]
3. MALIGNANT POLYPI should not be meddled with unless it is absolutely
certain that the whole of the bone from which they grow can be removed
also. This is very rarely the case. (See _Excision of Superior
Maxilla_.)
OPERATIONS ON THE LIPS.--1. Epithelial cancers of the lower lip are very
frequent, and require removal.
If the tumour or ulcer is small, and involves a considerable thickness
of the lip, it is most easily removed by a V-shaped incision (Fig. XIX.
A B A). Its shape permits the most accurate apposition of the cut
surfaces; and if the lips are full and the tumour small, very slight
trace of the operation will remain.
[Illustration: FIG. XIX.[99]]
Again, if the tumour be more extensive, involving a large portion of the
prolabium, and yet not extending deeply into the substance of the lip,
it may be very easily removed by a pair of curved scissors, applied in
the direction shown in the diagram (Fig. XX. A B). The skin must then be
stitched to the mucous membrane by numerous points of interrupted
suture.
[Illustration: FIG. XX.[100]]
But if the tumour be at once extensive and deep, mere removal is not
sufficient, but some provision must be made for supplying the blank left
by the operation.
In cases where a third, or even a half, of the lower lip has thus been
removed, it may be found sufficient freely to dissect what is left of
the lip from the gums, and thus approximate the cut surfaces in the
middle line.
This alone, however, would so much diminish the buccal orifice, and
twist its corners, as to cause great deformity. The addition of an
incision horizontally outwards, at one or both angles of the mouth,
will do away with such risk, and allow the surfaces to come together
without puckering; while by stitching the skin and mucous membrane
together in the course of these horizontal incisions, we can increase
the size of the buccal orifice almost _ad libitum_.
Lastly, when the lower lip has been entirely removed, it is still
possible to supply its place in the following manner, which was devised
by Mr. Syme: The tumour being fairly isolated by a V-shaped incision
(Fig. XXI.) C A C including the whole thickness of the lip, each of the
incisions should be prolonged downwards and outwards, as shown by the
dotted lines A D, A D. The flaps thus marked out must be separated from
the bone, brought upwards, and approximated in the middle line. Possibly
it may be necessary still further to enlarge the buccal orifice by short
lateral incisions, C C. Whether these are required or not, silk
stitches are to be introduced to unite the skin and mucous membrane
along the lines A C. The gap left between D B D must be left to
granulate, but in most cases may be very much diminished in size by
additional sutures at its outer corners, near D. The granulating surface
E E very rapidly heals up, leaving a dimple on each side, which rather
improves the appearance, by adding to the prominence of the chin, B.
[Illustration: FIG. XXI.[101]]
[Illustration: FIG. XXII.[102]]
THE OPERATIONS FOR HARELIP, though all conducted on the same general
principles, vary considerably in extent required according to the
position and size of the fissure or fissures to be remedied.
1. _For Single Harelip._--Where the fissure extends only from the
prolabium up to the attachment of the lip to the gums: this is very
easily remedied, the chief risk being lest the surgeon should not remove
enough of the edges of the fissure.
_Operation._--Bleeding being controlled by an assistant, the surgeon
fixes a pair of spring artery forceps into the mucous membrane and skin
at the salient angle at each side of the fissure. Taking one of these in
his left hand, he puts the edge to be pared on the stretch, and then
with a sharp narrow straight bistoury he transfixes the lip at the point
just beyond the upper angle of the fissure, and cuts outwards, being
careful to remove the whole thinner part of the lip, and to leave the
edge rather concave than convex. If left convex, or even quite straight,
there is a risk that, after union has taken place, an angle remain
showing the position of the cleft. The same is then to be done on the
other side. The bleeding is then to be controlled by twisting the larger
vessels, and if oozing still continues from the smaller ones, a pad of
lint should be placed in the wound, and a few minutes' delay given, as,
to facilitate immediate union, it is of the greatest importance that all
hæmorrhage should have ceased before the edges are brought together.
When the bleeding has ceased, the edges should be approximated by two or
more points of interrupted metallic suture inserted very deeply through
the tissues, and taking a good hold of the edges of the wound. If the
edges do not fit accurately, one or two horse-hair sutures will help.
Some surgeons still prefer the old harelip needles secured by a
figure-of-eight suture. A silk suture inserted through the prolabium is
of great advantage, as it keeps the inner surface of the wound closed,
which without it is very apt to be kept open by the pressure of the
teeth or gums, and in infants by the movements of the tip of the tongue.
Various methods have been devised to utilise, if possible, the
portion of the edge of the lip which is separated during the
operation of refreshing the edges, for the purpose of filling up
the sort of cleft or gap which is apt to be noticed at the edge of
the prolabium. The most ingenious and simplest of these is that
proposed by M. Nelaton, for use in cases where the fissure does not
extend so far up as the nose. It consists in leaving the two
portions which are pared off (Fig. XXIII.) the sides of the cleft
attached to each other as well as to the free edge of the lip, then
pulling them down, so as to bring their bleeding surfaces into
apposition, and make a diamond-shaped wound instead of a triangular
cleft (Fig. XXIV.) When brought together by sutures a projection is
left at the edge of the lip; this, in most cases, disappears; if it
does not, it can easily be pared down.
[Illustration: FIG. XXIII.[103]]
[Illustration: FIG. XXIV.[104]]
2. When the fissure, though single, extends upwards into the nose, the
operation is more difficult, and the result frequently less
satisfactory. The first thing to be done is to separate the lips from
the gums, so as to make them more freely mobile. The whole edges of the
cleft require refreshing.
3. _Double Harelip_, without bony deformity, and where the intervening
portion of the skin is vertical, does not project, and can be made
useful for the new lip. Such cases are not very common, but when they do
occur the question arises, How are they to be managed--in two separate
operations or at once? I believe, in every case, at once. The central
wedge-shaped portion is not large enough to extend downwards as far as
the prolabium, but still should not be removed altogether, as it may be
of great use, especially in bearing the columna nasi, and allowing its
full development. The edges should be pared in the same way, and to the
same extent as in single harelip, with the addition that the intervening
portion should have its edges completely removed, and be left in the
form of a wedge, with its apex downwards. The highest suture should be
passed through first one side, then the base of the wedge, and then the
other side; the second one through both, and the apex of the wedge; and
a third should unite the prolabium, not including the wedge.
[Illustration: FIG. XXV.[105]]
4. _Double Harelip_ combined with fissures of the hard palate, and
projection of a central bone. This is the analogue of the
inter-maxillary bone in the lower animals, and bears the two middle
incisor teeth, and projects very variously in different cases. In some
it projects horizontally forwards in the most hideous manner, in others
it lies at an angle more or less oblique; in very few does it maintain
its proper position; when projecting forwards, and as the teeth also
share in its projection, it entirely prevents approximation of the edges
of the fissures by operation, so it must first be dealt with in one of
two ways, either--
[Illustration: FIG. XXVI.[106]]
(1.) It may be at once removed with bone-pliers, the piece of skin over
it being saved. This is the best that can be done in cases of old
standing after the first year or two, though attempts have been made to
break the neck of the projecting portion, and thus permit of its being
shoved back.
(2.) By gradual pressure by a spring truss, strapping, or a bandage, it
may be forced back. This is possible only in cases where the deformity
has been comparatively slight, and the patient has been seen early. The
edges must then be pared and approximated as directed above.
One or two points about the operation for harelip require a special
notice:--
1. _When to operate._--Great differences in opinion exist. Some say not
before two or three years, others within two or three days, or even
_hours_, after birth.
Probably the safest time is not much earlier than the second month in
very strong children, the fifth in weakly ones, up to the commencement
of the first dentition; and when once dentition has commenced it is not
so safe to operate till it is over.
Prior to dentition the operation is attended with rather more risk, but
again, if delayed, there is great risk that the teeth do not come in
properly.
2. With regard to the most delicate part of the operation, _the
management of the prolabium_.--Some are satisfied, and I believe
rightly, with careful apposition by a silk suture after a _sufficient_
amount of the edges has been removed; others have proposed various plans
to obviate any risk of an angle remaining.
Malgaigne proposes to retain a small portion of the parings of the edge
to make small flap at each side; Lloyd a single one from the long half
of the lip, and brings it up under the opposite one, securing it with a
stitch.
FOOTNOTES:
[95] Operation for formation of a new nose from the cheeks; A A, flaps
approximated in middle line; B B, outer part of bed of flaps stitched
up; C C, triangle at each side left to granulate.
[96] _The Restoration of a Lost Nose by Operation_, p. 57; an excellent
monograph on the subject.
[97] Operation for formation of a new nose from the forehead:--_a_,
prominence of flap which is to be used as septum; _b_, left-hand corner
of flap, which is twisted and fastened at _c_; _d_, one of the tubes or
quills over which the nose is moulded.--(_Modified from Bernard and
Huette._)
[98] Syme's _Observations in Clinical Surgery_, p. 132.
[99] Diagram of V-shaped incision; A B A, dots showing points for
sutures.
[100] Diagram of incision for scooping out a shallow tumour by scissors.
[101] Diagram of incisions:--C A C, outline of incision for removal; C A
D, outline of flap on each side; B, prominence of chin; C C, dotted
lines, showing incisions to enlarge mouth, if required.
[102] Diagram of flaps in position:--A A, corners of flaps brought up
and approximated by _silver_ sutures; C C, new lip got by lateral
incisions, skin and mucous membrane being united by _silk_ threads; E E,
gap left to granulate.
[103] Fig. XXIII. shows the incision bounding the cleft.
[104] Fig. XXIV. shows the diamond-shaped wound before the sutures are
applied.
[105] Diagram of operation for double harelip:--_a_, stitch through both
sides and wedge-shaped portion, which also aids the septum; _b_, other
stitches approximating edges.
[106] Diagram of double harelip, with projecting bone:--_a_, central
piece of lip, dotted lines showing incision; _b_, projecting bone
bearing teeth, which are generally small and stunted.
CHAPTER VII.
OPERATIONS ON THE JAWS.
1. EXCISION OF THE UPPER JAW.--With regard to the morbid conditions for
which this operation is undertaken, it may be sufficient here to
observe, that in no case can the operation be called justifiable in
which the disease extends beyond the upper jaw-bone and the
corresponding palate-bone, for unless the morbid growth be entirely
removed, recurrence is inevitable, and no advantage is gained by the
operation. It is undertaken for the removal of tumours of the antrum and
of the alveolar margins, in all which cases the section for its removal
must be made through healthy bone, and wide of the disease, so as to
insure that the whole is removed. There are other cases in which the
whole or part of the upper jaw has been removed for the purpose of
giving access to disease behind, for example, to naso-pharyngeal polypi
with extensive attachments.
In describing the operation for the excision of the entire upper jaw, we
have to consider--(1.) what incisions through the soft parts will expose
the tumour best, and with least deformity; (2.) what bony processes
require to be divided, and where. Very various incisions have been
recommended by various authors; some describing three, in various
directions, forming flaps of different sizes, while others, again, are
satisfied with a very small division of the upper lip into the nose, or
even attempt removal of the bone without any incision through the skin
at all. These discrepancies depend in great measure on different views
of what constitutes excision of the upper jaw, the more complicated ones
contemplating removal of the whole bone anatomically so called,
including the floor of the orbit, while the less complicated ones are
suitable for cases in which a much less extensive removal is required.
To remove the whole bone, an incision (Fig. XXVII. A) of the skin must
extend from the angle of the mouth upwards and outwards in a slightly
curved direction with its convexity downwards, as far on the malar bone
as half an inch outside of the outer angle of the eye. The flaps must
then be raised in both directions, the inner one specially dissected off
the bones, so as to expose thoroughly the nasal cavity. It is of great
importance thoroughly to display the floor of the orbit, so that the
attachment of the orbital fascia may be accurately cut through, the
inferior oblique muscle divided at its origin, and the eye and the fat
of the orbit cautiously raised from its floor.
[Illustration: FIG. XXVII.[107]]
Three processes of bone then require attention and division.
(1.) The articulation with the opposite bone in the hard palate. To
divide this, one incisor tooth at least must be drawn, the soft palate
divided by a knife to prevent laceration, and the thick alveolar portion
sawn through in a longitudinal direction from before backwards.
(2.) The articulation with the malar bone at the upper angle of the
incision through the skin. This must be notched with a small saw in a
direction corresponding to the articulation, and then wrenched asunder
by a pair of strong bone-pliers.
(3.) The nasal process of the upper jaw must now be divided by the
pliers, one limb of which is cautiously inserted into the orbit, the
other into the nose. If the disease extends high up in this process, it
may be necessary partially to separate the corresponding nasal bone, and
thus reach the suture between the nasal process and the frontal bone.
The pliers must now be inserted into the groove already made by the saw
on the hard palate, and the separation continued to the full extent
backwards. A comparatively slight force exerted on the tumour either by
the hand, or (when the tumour is small) by a pair of strong claw
forceps, will suffice to break down the posterior attachments of the
bone and remove it entire. The necessary laceration of the soft parts
behind is so far an advantage, as it lessens the risk of hæmorrhage from
the posterior palatine vessels.
The hæmorrhage from this operation was at one time much dreaded, but is
rarely excessive; very few vessels require ligature, except those
divided in the early stages in making the skin flaps; the hollow left
should be stuffed with lint, which may be soaked in the perchloride of
iron should there be any oozing.
The incisions recommended for this operation have been very various, and
a knowledge of some of them may occasionally be useful, on account of
specialities in the shape and size of the tumour. Liston "entered the
bistoury over the external angular process of the frontal bone, and
carried it down through the cheek to the corner of the mouth. Then the
knife is to be pushed through the integument to the nasal process of the
maxilla, the cartilage of the ala is detached from the bone, and lip cut
through in the mesial line; the flap thus formed is to be dissected up
and the bones divided."[108] Dieffenbach made an incision through the
upper lip and along the back or prominent part of the nose, up towards
the inner canthus, from whence he carried the knife along the lower
eyelid, at a right angle to the first incision as far as the malar bone.
In cases where the tumour is of moderate size, Sir W. Fergusson
found[109] it sufficient to divide the upper lip by a single incision
exactly in the middle line, this incision to be continued into one or
both nostrils, if required. The ala of the nose is so easily raised, and
the tip so moveable as to give great facilities to the operator for
clearing the bone even to the floor of the orbit.
In cases where the tumour is larger, or the bones more extensively
affected, Sir W. Fergusson preferred an extension of the foregoing
incision (Fig. XXVII. B) upwards along the edge of the nose almost to
the angle of the eye, and thence at a right angle along the lower
eyelid, as far as may be necessary, even to the zygoma. The advantages
claimed for such procedures are that the deformity is less and the
vessels are divided at their terminal extremities.
2. EXCISION OF THE LOWER JAW.--Removal of portions, greater or smaller,
of the lower jaw, for tumours, simple or malignant, are now operations
of very frequent occurrence, while in some few cases the whole bone has
been removed at both its articulations.
The operative procedures vary much, according to the amount of bone
requiring removal, and also the position of the portion to be excised.
(1.) _Of a portion only of one side of the body of the bone._--This is
perhaps the simplest form of operation, and is frequently required for
tumours, specially for epulis.
_Incision._--If the parts are tolerably lax and the tumour small, a
single incision just at the lower edge of the bone, of a length rather
greater than the piece of bone to be removed, will suffice; this will
divide the facial artery, which must be tied or compressed,[110] while
the surgeon, dissecting on the tumour, separates the flaps in front,
cutting upwards into the mouth, and then detaches the mylohyoid below,
and clears the bone freely from mucous membrane. He then, with a narrow
saw, notches the bone beyond the tumour at each side, and, introducing
strong bone-pliers into the notches, is enabled to separate the required
portion. The wound is then stitched up, and a very rapid cure generally
results with very little deformity, as the cicatrix is in shadow. If
from the size of the tumour more room is needed, it can easily be got by
an additional incision from the angle of the mouth joining the former.
To prevent deformity, which is apt to result from the centre of the chin
crossing the middle line, it is often a wise precaution to have a silver
plate prepared fitting the molar teeth of both jaws on the sound side,
and thus acting as a splint. Such a precaution may be required in any
operation in which the lower jaw is sawn through.
_N.B._--There are certain cases in which the epulis is small and
confined to the alveolar margin, in which an attempt may be made to
retain the base of the jaw entire, and remove the tumour without any
incision of the skin. The mucous membrane on both sides being carefully
dissected from the affected part, the bone may be sawn as before, but
only through the alveolar portion, the groves of the saw converging as
they penetrate, then by a pair of strong curved bone-pliers, the
affected alveolar portion is to be scooped out without injuring the
base. This proceeding, which has been practised by Syme, Fergusson,
Pollock, the author in many cases, and others, leaves no deformity, but,
it must be owned, is much more liable to the risk of recurrence of the
disease, and for this reason is strongly condemned by Gross.
_Note._--In this, as in all other operations on the jaws, the very first
thing to be done is to draw the teeth at the spots at which the saw is
to be applied.
(2.) _Excision of a portion involving the Symphysis._--Free access is of
importance. The best incision is probably one which (Fig. XXVII. C)
commences at the angle of the mouth opposite the healthy portion of jaw,
extends down to the place at which the saw is to be applied and then
along the base of the jaw past the middle line to the other point of
section. The flap is to be thrown up and the bone cleared. The next
point to be noticed is, that when, in clearing the bone behind, the
muscles attached to the symphysis are divided, the tongue loses its
support, and unless watched may tend to fall backwards, embarrassing
respiration and even perhaps choking the patient. The tongue, being
confided to a special assistant, must be drawn well forwards. Various
plans have been devised for keeping it in position, as stitching it to
the point of the patient's nose; putting a ligature into its apex, and
fastening it to the cheek by a piece of strapping, and transfixing its
roots with a harelip needle, used to stitch up a central incision in the
chin. The tendency to retraction very soon ceases, new attachments are
formed by the muscles, and after the first five or six days there is
very little risk of the tongue giving rise to any untoward consequences
by its displacement.
(3.) _Disarticulation of one, or both Joints._--When the portion of bone
implicated involves disarticulation for its complete removal, the
difficulty of the operation is much increased. The remarkably strong
attachments of the joint, especially the relation of the temporal muscle
to the coronoid process, and the close proximity of large arteries and
nerves, especially the internal maxillary artery and the lingual nerve,
render this disarticulation very difficult.
The chief points to be attended to seem to be (1.) that the incision
through the skin should extend quite up to the level of the
articulation; (2.) that the bone should be sawn through at the other
side of the tumour, and freely cleared from all its attachments, before
any attempt be made at disarticulation, for by means of the tumour great
leverage can be attained, so as to put the muscles on the stretch, and
allow them to be safely divided; (3.) that the articulation should
always be entered from the front, not from behind, and the inner side of
the condyle should be very carefully cleaned, the surgeon cutting on the
bone so as to avoid, if possible, the internal maxillary artery; (4.)
free and early division of the attachment of the temporal muscle to the
coronoid process.
Disarticulation of the entire bone has been very rarely performed.[111]
If necessary, it can be performed without any incision into the mouth,
by one semilunar sweep from one articulation to the other, passing along
the lower margin of each side of the body, and just below the symphysis
of the chin.
_Disarticulation of the Ramus without opening into the cavity of the
Mouth._--That this operation is possible, though it may not be often
required, is shown by the following case by Mr. Syme. It was a tumour of
the ramus, extending only as far forwards as the wisdom-tooth:--
"An incision was made from the zygomatic arch down along the posterior
margin of the ramus, slightly curved with its convexity towards the
ear, to a little way beyond the base of the jaw. The parotid gland and
masseter muscle being dissected off the jaw, it was divided by
cutting-pliers immediately behind the wisdom-tooth, after being notched
with a saw. The ramus was then seized by a strong pair of tooth-forceps,
and notwithstanding strong posterior attachments, was drawn outwards,
its muscular connections divided and turned out entire. There was thus
no wound of the mucous membrane of the mouth, the masseter and pterygoid
muscles were not completely divided, and the facial artery was
intact."[112]
Fergusson[113] holds that even the very largest tumours of the lower jaw
may be successfully removed without opening into the orifice of the
mouth at all by division of the lips. A large lunated incision below the
lower margin of the bone, with its ends extending upwards to within half
an inch of the lips, will give free access, and yet avoid both
hæmorrhage and deformity, as the labial artery and vein are not cut, and
there is no trouble in readjusting the lips. Some tumours of lower jaw
can be removed without any wound of skin.
FOOTNOTES:
[107] Diagram of operations on the jaws:--A, incision for removal of the
whole upper jaw; B, incision for removal of alveolar portion and antrum;
C, incision for removing the larger half of lower jaw; the opposite side
is the one supposed to be operated on, and the incision is crossing the
symphysis and turning up at a right angle.
[108] _Operative Surgery_, p. 265.
[109] _Lancet_, July 1, 1865.
[110] Temporary compression of the facial can be easily managed, in
cases where it is of much importance to avoid loss of blood, by passing
a needle from the outside through the skin above the vessel, then under
the vessel, and out again through the skin below. A figure-of-eight
suture can then be thrown round both ends of the needle, and the artery
thus thoroughly compressed.
[111] Syme, _Contributions to the Path. and Practice of Surgery_, p. 21;
Carnochan of New York, _Cases in Surgery_.
[112] _Contributions to the Path. and Prac. of Surgery_, pp. 23, 24.
[113] _Lancet_, July 1, 1865.
CHAPTER VIII.
OPERATIONS ON MOUTH AND THROAT.
SALIVARY FISTULA, _Operation for._--After a wound or abscess of the
cheek, in which the parotid duct is implicated, a salivary fistula is
very apt to remain. The saliva thus discharges in the cheek, giving rise
to considerable annoyance, as well as injury to the digestion. It is by
no means easy to cure this. Perhaps the best operation is the one of
which a rude diagram is given (Fig. XXVIII.). The duct (C) communicates
with the fistula (D). One end of a thread, either silken or metallic,
should be passed through the fistula, and then as far backwards as
convenient through the cheek into the mouth; the needle should then be
withdrawn, the thread being left in. The other end being threaded should
then be re-inserted at the fistula, and carried forwards in a similar
manner; the needle should be again unthreaded in the mouth and
withdrawn; the two ends should then be tied pretty tightly inside, and
allowed to make their way by ulceration into the cavity of the mouth. A
passage will thus be obtained for the saliva into the mouth, and every
possible precaution should be taken to enable the external wound to
close.
[Illustration: FIG. XXVIII.[114]]
EXCISION OF THE TONGUE, for malignant disease of the organ, may be
either complete or partial. Complete excision affords a hope of
permanent and complete relief from the disease, but it is an operation
of extreme difficulty and danger. It may be performed in either of the
following methods. The first is the only one in which absolute
completeness of removal is insured.
1. _Syme's method of excision._--The patient being seated on a chair,
chloroform was not administered, so that the blood might escape
forwards, and not pass into the pharynx. The operation is thus
described:[115]--
"Having extracted one of the front incisors, I cut through the middle of
the lip and continued the incision down to the os hyoides, then sawed
through the jaw in the same line, and insinuating my finger under the
tongue as a guide to the knife, divided the mucous lining of the mouth,
together with the attachment of the genio-hyoglossi. While the two
halves of the bone were held apart, I dissected backwards, and cut
through the hyoglossi, along with the mucous membrane covering them, so
as to allow the tongue to be pulled forward, and bring into view the
situation of the lingual arteries, which were cut and tied, first on one
side, and then on the other. The process might now have been at once
completed, had I not feared that the epiglottis might be implicated in
the disease, which extended beyond the reach of my finger, and thus
suffer injury from the knife if used without a guide. I therefore cut
away about two-thirds of the tongue, and then being able to reach the os
hyoides with my finger, retained it there while the remaining
attachments were divided by the knife in my other hand close to the
bone. Some small arterial branches having been tied, the edges of the
wound were brought together and retained by silver sutures, except at
the lowest part, where the ligatures were allowed to maintain a drain
for the discharge of fluids from the cavity." The patient was able to
swallow from a drinking-cup with a spout on the day following the
operation, and was able to travel upwards of 200 miles within four weeks
of the operation.
2. _By the Écraseur._--Nunneley of Leeds has recorded cases in which he
made a small incision through the skin, and mylohyoid and geniohyoid
muscles, and through this passed a curved needle bearing the chain of
the écraseur completely round the base of the tongue. In one case the
chain was unsatisfactory, but strong whipcord was introduced as it was
withdrawn, and tied with all possible force. The organ eventually
sloughed away, with a cure which lasted at least for some months.
Sir James Paget operates as follows:--
The patient is placed under the influence of chloroform, and the mouth
held widely open. The tongue is then drawn forwards, the mucous membrane
and soft parts of the floor of the mouth, including the attachment of
the genio-hyoglossi to the symphysis being divided close to the bone.
The steel wire of an écraseur is then passed round its root as low down
as possible, slowly tightened, and the tongue thus divided through its
whole thickness in a very few minutes. The bleeding is slight, being
almost entirely from the parts cut with the knife. Recovery has been
rapid in the recorded cases.[116]
To Dr. George Buchanan of Glasgow the credit is due of the invention of
the operation of removal of the half of the tongue in the median line.
In at least one instance the cure after five years is still permanent.
Partial excisions of the tongue are as unsatisfactory in their results
as they are unsound in principle, yet many cases present themselves, in
which, while the patient urges some operative measure for his relief,
the tumour is so limited as not to warrant the exceedingly dangerous
operation of complete excision.
Portions may be removed in various ways:--
1. By the knife. If in the apex, by a V-shaped incision; if in the
lateral regions, by a bold free incision with a probe-pointed bistoury
round the tumour.
2. By ligature, drawn as tightly as possible, and, if the portion
included be large, in successive portions.
3. By the écraseur.
Mr. Furneaux Jordan has removed the whole tongue with success by means
of two écraseurs worked at the same time.[117]
4. By the galvano-caustic wire.
5. The author has in nine cases removed the affected half of the tongue
by means of the thermo-cautery, first splitting it in the middle line
and then cutting through the base with a curved platinum knife at a low
red heat. In one only was there any trouble from hæmorrhage, and all
made good recoveries.
Mr. Barwell has recorded (_Lancet_, 1879, vol. i.) an easy, safe, and
comparatively painless mode of removing the tongue by écraseurs.
Mr. Walter Whitehead,[118] of Manchester, has had a very large
experience of an operation devised by himself, in which, after pulling
the tongue well forward by a string previously introduced near its apex,
and the mouth being held open by a gag, he detaches the organ from jaw
and fauces by successive short snips with scissors, and then in same
manner divides the muscles, tying or twisting the vessels as they bleed.
His success has been very great by this method, though others who have
tried it have sometimes found bleeding troublesome.
It is comparatively seldom now necessary to split the jaw and perform
Syme's operation, and in all operations on the tongue the thermocautory
(Paquelin's) is of great use.
Regnoli's method[119] may deserve a brief notice. A semilunar incision
along the base of the jaw, from one angle to the other, detaches the
muscles and soft structures, and is thrown down; the tongue is then
drawn through the opening, and can be freely dealt with either by knife
or ligature. After removal the flap is replaced.
FISSURES IN THE PALATE.--The operations requisite for the cure of
fissures in the soft and hard palates are so complicated in their
details, that a small treatise would be required thoroughly to describe
the various procedures.
Different cases vary so much in the nature and amount of their
deformity, that at least five different sets of cases have been
described. It is sufficient here merely to describe the absolutely
essential principles of the operations for the cure of fissures of the
hard and soft palate respectively.
In all operations on the palate, two conditions used to be considered
requisite for success:--1. That the patient should have arrived at years
of discretion, at twelve or fourteen years at least; that he be
possessed of considerable firmness, and be extremely anxious for a cure,
so as to give full and intelligent co-operation. 2. That for some days
or weeks prior to the operation the mouth and palate should have been
trained to open widely and to bear manipulation, without reflex action
being excited. Professor Billroth of Vienna,[120] and Mr. Thomas
Smith[121] of London, have had cases which prove the possibility of
performing this operation in childhood, under chloroform, with the
assistance, in the English cases, of a suitable gag, invented by Mr.
Smith. The effect of the operation on the voice of the child has been
very encouraging, as much more improvement takes place than in cases
where the operation is performed late in life.
_Fissure in the soft palate only_ appears as a triangular cleft, the
apex of which is above, the base being a line between the points of the
bifid uvula, which are widely separated. To cure this it is required--
1. That the edges of the fissure should be brought together without
strain or tightness. In small fissures this can generally be done easily
enough; but where the fissure is extensive, some means must be used to
relieve tension. For this, Sir William Fergusson long ago proposed the
division of the palatal muscles, the levator, tensor, and
palato-pharyngeus muscle of each side. The incisions in the palate for
this purpose certainly aid apposition, but many surgeons entertain
doubts whether the division of the muscles has much to do with the good
result, and believe that the simple incisions in the mucous membrane, in
a proper direction, are all that is required (see Fig. XXIX.).
[Illustration: FIG. XXIX.[122]]
2. That the edges of the fissure be made raw, so as to afford surfaces
which will readily unite. Complicated instruments, such as knives of
various strange shapes, have been devised for this purpose; an ordinary
cataract knife, very sharp, and set on a long handle is perhaps the
best. It greatly facilitates the section if the parts are tense, so the
point of the uvula should be seized by an ordinary pair of spring
forceps, and drawn across the roof of the mouth, while the knife should
enter in the middle line, a little above the apex of the fissure, and
make the cut downwards as in harelip.
3. That sutures should be inserted to keep the edges in apposition, yet
not so tightly as to cause ulceration. They may be either of metal,
silver being preferable, or of fine silk well waxed. The metallic
sutures are now generally preferred. Some dexterity is required in their
introduction, and various instruments have been devised; the best seems
to be a needle with a short curve fixed on a long handle, which should
be entered on the (patient's) left side of the fissure in front, and
brought out on the right side.
If silk sutures be used, the chief difficulty, that of passing the
thread through the second side from behind forwards, can be avoided in
the following manner.[123] A curved needle is passed through one side of
the fissure, and then towards the middle line, till its point is seen
through the cleft. One of the ends of the thread is then seized by a
long pair of forceps, and drawn through the cleft; the needle is then
withdrawn, leaving the thread through the palate, and both ends are
brought outside at the angle of the mouth. Another needle is then passed
through a corresponding point at the opposite side of the palate, till
its point again appears at the cleft; this time a double loop of the
thread is also brought out through the cleft by the forceps into the
mouth. If then the single thread of the first ligature which is in the
cleft be passed through the loop of the second one also in the cleft, it
is easy, by withdrawing the loop through the palate, to finish the
stitch (see Fig. XXIX.). All the stitches should be passed and their
position approved before any one be tied, and it is most convenient to
secure them from above downwards. To prevent confusion, each pair of
threads after being inserted should be left very long, and brought up
to a coronet fixed on the brow, which is fitted with several pairs of
hooks numbered for easy reference. This will prevent twisting of the
threads or any mistake in tying.
FISSURE OF THE HARD PALATE.--This may vary in extent from a very slight
cleft in the middle line behind, up to a complete separation of the two
halves of the jaw, including even the alveolar process in front, and
sometimes complicated with harelip.
To close such fissures by operation is difficult, as the breadth of the
cleft is so great as to prevent the apposition of the edges when
prepared, without such extreme tension as quite prevents any hope of
union. Through the researches of Avery, Warren, Langenbeck, and others,
a method has been discovered of closing such fissures by operation,
which, though certainly not easy, is, when properly performed, generally
successful.
_Operation._--In addition to the usual paring of the edges of the cleft,
an incision is made on each side of the palate, extending "from the
canine tooth in front to the last molar behind,"[124] along the alveolar
ridge (Fig. XXX.). The whole flap between the cleft and this incision on
each side is then to be raised from the bone by a blunt rounded
instrument slightly curved. With this the whole mucous membrane and as
much of the periosteum as possible should be completely raised from the
bone, attachments for nourishment of the flap being left in front and
behind where the vessels enter.
[Illustration: FIG. XXX.[125]]
The flaps thus raised will be found to come together in the middle line,
sometimes even to overlap, and, when united by suture, form a new
palate at a lower level than the fissure, experience having shown that
in cases of fissure the arch of the palate is always much higher than
usual. The flaps do not slough, being well supplied with blood, unless
they have been injured in their separation.
The edges must be carefully united by various points of metallic suture,
and the fissure of the soft palate closed at the same sitting, unless
the patient has lost much blood, or is very much exhausted with the
pain. The stitches may be left in for a week, or even ten days, unless
they are exciting much irritation. The patient must exercise great
self-control and caution in the character of his food and his manner of
eating for ten days or a fortnight after the operation.
EXCISION OF TONSILS.--To remove the whole tonsil is of course impossible
in the living body, the operation to which the name of excision is given
being only the shaving off of a redundant and projecting portion. When
properly performed it is a very safe, and in adults a very easy
operation, but in children it is sometimes rendered exceedingly
difficult by their struggles, combined with the movements of the tongue
and the insufficient access through the small mouth. Many instruments
have been devised for the purpose of at once transfixing and excising
the projecting portion; some of them are very ingenious and complicated.
By far the best and safest method of removing the redundant portion is
to seize it with a volsellum, and then cut it off by a single stroke of
a probe-pointed curved bistoury; cutting from above downwards, and being
careful to cut parallel with the great vessels.
The ordinary volsellum is much improved for this purpose by the addition
of a third hook in each tonsil placed between the others, with a shorter
curve, and slightly shorter; this ensures the safe holding of the
fragment removed, and prevents the risk of its falling down the throat
of the patient.
If both tonsils are enlarged they should both be operated on at the same
sitting, and the pain is so slight that even children frequently make
little objection to the second operation. Bleeding is rarely troublesome
if the portion be at once fairly removed, but if in the patient's
struggles the hook should slip before the cut is complete, the partially
detached portion will irritate the fauces, cause coughing and attempts
to vomit, and sometimes a troublesome hæmorrhage.
The plentiful use of cold water will generally be sufficient to stop the
bleeding, though cases are on record in which the use of styptics, or
even the temporary closure of a bleeding point by pressure, has been
necessary.
M. Guersant has operated on more than one thousand children, with only
three cases of any trouble from hæmorrhage, while four or five out of
fifteen adults required either the actual cautery or the sesqui-chloride
of iron.[126]
FOOTNOTES:
[114] Rough diagram of operation for salivary fistula:--A, section of
cheek close to buccal orifice; B, section of zygoma, muscles, etc.; C,
the duct of the parotid; D, the fistulous opening of the cheek; E E, the
thread knotted inside the mouth; F, the palate.
[115] _Lancet_, Feb. 4, 1865.
[116] _Med. Times and Gazette_ for Feb. 10, 1866.
[117] _Lancet_, April 20, 1872.
[118] _Transactions International Medical Congress_, 1881, vol. ii. p.
460.
[119] Gross's _Surgery_, vol. ii. p. 472.
[120] Langenbeck, _Archiv_, ii. p. 657.
[121] _Med. Chir. Trans._ for 1867-8.
[122] Diagram of staphyloraphy, chiefly to illustrate the passing of the
threads:--_a_, the first thread; _b_, the second. The dotted line at
edge of fissure shows amount to be removed; the other dotted lines
showing size and position of the incision through the mucous membrane
above.
[123] Holmes's _Surgery_, vol. ii. pp. 504-513.
[124] _Edinburgh Medical Journal_ for Jan. 1865, Mr. Annandale's
instructive paper on "Cleft Palate."
[125] Diagram of fissure of hard palate:--_a_, anterior palatine
foramina; _b_, posterior palatine foramina with groove for artery; _c_,
incisions requisite to free the soft structures.
[126] Holmes's _Diseases of Children_, p. 555.
CHAPTER IX.
OPERATIONS ON AIR PASSAGES.
OPERATIONS ON THE LARYNX AND TRACHEA.--The great air passage may be
opened at three different situations, and to the operations at these
different places the following names have been given:--
_Laryngotomy_, when the opening is made in the interval between the
cricoid and thyroid cartilages, through the crico-thyroid membrane.
_Laryngo-tracheotomy_, when the cricoid cartilage and the upper ring of
the trachea are divided.
_Tracheotomy_, when the trachea itself is opened by the division of two,
three, or more rings.
Of these the last, _tracheotomy_, is by far the most frequent,
important, difficult, and dangerous, and requires a very detailed
description. Chassaignac[127] says "the only really rational operation
for the opening of the air passages by the surgeon is tracheotomy."
TRACHEOTOMY.--_Anatomy._--Between the cricoid cartilage and the level of
the upper border of the sternum, the middle line of the neck is occupied
by the upper portion of the trachea. Its depth from the surface varies,
gradually increasing as the trachea descends, and varying very much
according to the fatness, muscularity, and length of the neck. It is,
however, almost subcutaneous at the commencement below the cricoid, and
on the level of the sternum it is in most cases at least an inch from
the surface, in many much deeper. Again, its length varies, even in the
adult, from two and a half to three, or even four inches. This is
important, as affecting the simplicity of the operation, which, as a
rule, is easier the longer the neck is.
The trachea has most important and complicated anatomical
relations--some constant, others irregular.
1. The carotid arteries and jugular veins lie at either side, but, where
these are regular in their distribution, do not practically interfere in
a well-conducted operation.
2. The thyroid gland lies in close relation to the trachea, one lobe
being at each side (Fig. XXXI. B B), and the isthmus of the thyroid
crosses the trachea just over the second and third cartilaginous rings.
In fat vascular necks, or where the thyroid is enlarged it may occupy a
much larger portion of the trachea. The position of the isthmus
practically divides the trachea into two portions in which it is
possible to perform tracheotomy. Both have their advocates, but the
balance of authority tends to support the operation below the thyroid. A
separate notice of each will be required immediately.
[Illustration: FIG. XXXI.[128]]
3. The _muscles_ in relation to the trachea are the sterno-hyoid and
sterno-thyroid of each side. The latter are the broadest, are in close
contact across the trachea by the inner edges below, but gradually
diverge as they ascend the neck. In thick-set, muscular necks, however,
they are in close contact for a considerable distance, and require to
be separated to give access to the trachea.
The _arteries_ are in most cases unimportant; no named branch of any
size ought to be divided in the operation. However, occasionally very
free bleeding may result from the division of an abnormal _thyroidea
ima_ running up the trachea to the thyroid body from the innominate, or
even from the aorta itself.
The _veins_ are very numerous and irregularly distributed. There is
generally a large transverse communicating branch between the superior
thyroid veins just above the isthmus. The isthmus itself has a large
venous plexus over it. Below the isthmus the veins converge into one
trunk (or sometimes two parallel ones) lying right in front of the
trachea.
4. The last anatomical point which may give trouble in normal necks is
the thymus, which is present in children below the age of two, and
covers the lower end of the trachea just above the level of the sternum.
Where this is not only not diminished, but enlarged, as it sometimes is
in unhealthy children, it may give a very great deal of trouble, rolling
out at the wound and greatly embarrassing proceedings.
Abnormalities are very various and sometimes very dangerous: vessels
crossing the trachea, as the innominate did in Macilwain's case,[129] or
where two brachiocephalic trunks are present, as recorded by
Chassaignac.[130] One of the most frequent dangers to be guarded against
is a possible dilatation of the aorta or aneurism of the arch. This may
very possibly, as happened in one case to the author, give rise to
suffocative paroxysms from its pressure on the recurrent laryngeal
nerves. Tracheotomy may be deemed necessary, and there is a great risk,
unless proper precautions be taken, of wounding the aorta, where it
passes upwards in the jugular fossa. In the author's case the vessel had
actually to be pushed downwards by the pulp of the forefinger while the
trachea was opened, the knife being guided on the back of the nail of
the same finger.
THE OPERATION.--In a work of this kind it would be utterly impossible to
go at all into the subject of what diseases, injuries, etc., warrant or
require the operation. It is enough to describe the various methods of
operating, their dangers and difficulties.
1. _The operation above the isthmus of the thyroid._--A spot about a
quarter or half of an inch in vertical diameter between the cricoid
cartilage (Fig. XXXI.) and thyroid isthmus.
_Advantages._--It is near the surface, the vessels are few and
comparatively small. It is most suitable in cases of aneurism.
Professor Spence[131] gives his sanction to the high operation in adults
with thick short necks when the operation is performed for ulceration or
papilloma of larynx or for spasm from aneurism, the low operation being
still best in cases of croup or diphtheria.
_Disadvantages._--The space is too small, requires very considerable
disturbance of the thyroid isthmus, or actual division of it. It is too
near the point where the disease is; so much so, that in most cases of
croup or diphtheria it would be perfectly useless. However, if required,
or if the operation lower down be contra-indicated, this may be
performed easily enough. A straight incision being made in the middle
line about one inch and a half in length, expose the upper ring by
careful dissection, if possible draw aside the veins, and depress the
thyroid isthmus, divide the rings thus exposed, and introduce the tube.
_The operation below the isthmus._--This, though more difficult in its
performance, is a much more scientific and satisfactory operation.
Considerable coolness and a thorough knowledge of the anatomy of the
part are absolutely required.
The patient being in the recumbent posture, the shoulders should be well
raised, and the head held back so as to extend the windpipe, and thus
bring it as near as possible to the surface. A pillow, or the arm of an
assistant, behind the neck will be of service.
_N.B._--Be careful lest too great extension by an anxious assistant,
accompanied by closure of the mouth, should choke the patient (whose
breathing is of course already much embarrassed) before the operation be
begun.
Chloroform may occasionally be given, and, if well borne, renders the
operation very much easier than it would otherwise be. An incision must
then be made exactly in the median line of the neck, from a little below
the cricoid cartilage, almost to the upper edge of the sternum; at first
it should be through skin only, then the veins will be seen, probably
turgid with dark blood; the larger ones should be drawn aside, if
necessary divided, the bleeding stopped by gentle pressure. The deep
fascia must then be cautiously divided, great care being taken to keep
exactly in the middle line, and the contiguous edges of sterno-thyroid
muscles separated from each other by the handle of the knife. A quantity
of loose connective tissue, containing numerous small veins, must now be
pushed aside, the thyroid isthmus pressed upwards, still with the handle
of the knife. The forefinger must then be used to distinguish the rings
of the trachea. If there is much convulsive movement of the larynx and
trachea, they should be fixed by the insertion of a small sharp hook
with a short curve, just below the cricoid cartilage, and this should be
confided to an assistant. The surgeon should then, with the forefinger
of his left hand, fix the trachea, and open it by a straight
sharp-pointed scalpel, boldly thrusting it through the rings with a jerk
or stab, the back of the knife being below, and divide two or three of
the rings from below upwards. Any attempt to enter the trachea slowly
with a blunt knife or trocar will probably be unsuccessful, as the
rings, especially in children, give way before the knife, which merely
approximates the sides of the trachea without opening it.
_Question of Hæmorrhage._--It is often a question of some importance,
and one which sometimes it is not easy to settle, how far attempts
should be made completely to arrest the venous hæmorrhage before opening
the trachea.
_On the one hand_, if not arrested, besides the risk of weakening the
patient, we have to dread the much more serious complication of the
admission of blood into the wound. And this is very serious in a patient
whose respiration has already been much impeded, whose lungs are
probably engorged, and who has certainly, by the mere existence of a
wound in his trachea, lost the power of coughing properly; it must never
be forgotten that a quantity of blood so trifling as to be at once
ejected by a single cough in the case of a healthy chest, may be a fatal
obstacle to respiration in one already weakened by disease. Thus any
well-marked arterial hæmorrhage from cut branches, or from the isthmus
of the thyroid, must certainly be arrested prior to opening the trachea.
Besides this, blood once having entered the bronchi is apt to extend
into their smaller ramifications and prove a cause of death, by acting
as a local irritation, and setting up intra-lobular suppurative
pneumonia. The author has found this to be the case both after
tracheotomy and still more frequently in suicide by cut throat.
But, _on the other hand_, it is equally true that there is almost always
a considerable amount of oozing from small venous radicles divided
during the operation, which depends simply on the great venous
engorgement resulting from the obstruction to the respiration, so that
while to attempt to tie every point would be simply endless, we may be
almost certain that the oozing will cease whenever the trachea is
opened, and respiration fairly improved. Slight pressure on the wound is
generally sufficient to stop the bleeding till the venous engorgement
has disappeared.
Of late years many tracheotomies have been done bloodlessly by use of
the thermo-cautery, for division of the soft parts, but the subsequent
sloughing of the wound is a great objection to this method.
In cases of extreme urgency, all such minor considerations as
suppression of venous oozing must be ignored, and the trachea simply
opened as rapidly as possible. I had once to perform the operation after
respiration had entirely ceased, and no pulse could be felt at the
wrist, with no assistance except that of a female attendant. Merely
feeling that no large arterial branch was in the way, I cut straight
through all the tissues, opened the trachea, and commenced artificial
respiration. The patient eventually recovered.
_Question of Tubes, etc._--Once the trachea is opened, the next question
is, How is the opening to be kept pervious? For the moment the handle of
the scalpel is to be inserted in the wound, so as to stretch it
transversely; this will probably suffice to allow of the escape of any
foreign body. But where, to admit air, the wound is to be _kept_ open,
how is this to be done? It used to be advised that an elliptical portion
of the wall of the trachea be removed; this, though succeeding well
enough for a time, was unscientific, as the wound always tended to
cicatrise, and ended of course in permanent narrowing of the canal of
the trachea. It may be necessary thus to excise a portion of the
trachea, in cases where it is very intolerant of the presence of a
tube. Such a case is recorded by Sir J. Fayrer of Calcutta.[132] Not
much better is the proposal to insert a silk ligature in each side of
the wound, and by pulling these apart thus mechanically to open the
wound. This also is evidently a merely temporary expedient.
Various canulæ and tubes have been proposed. The ones recommended by the
older surgeons had all one great fault; they were much too small, and
were many of them straight, and thus liable to displacement. The
smallness of their bore was their greatest objection, and Mr. Liston
conferred a great benefit on surgery by his insisting upon the
introduction of tubes with a larger bore, and with a proper curve, so as
thoroughly to enter the trachea. The tube ought to be large enough to
admit all the air required by the lungs, without hurrying the
respiration in the least.
There is a mistake made in the construction of many of the tubes even of
the present day; the outer opening is large and full, while for
convenience of insertion the tube tapers down to an inner opening,
admitting perhaps not one-half as much air as the outer one does.
It must be remembered that for some days there is great risk of the tube
becoming occluded, by frothy blood or mucus, especially in cases of
croup, and in children. To prevent this a double canula will be found of
great service, providing only that it be remembered that the inner
canula, not the outer merely, is to be made large enough to breathe
through, and that the inner should project slightly beyond the outer
one.
The inner one can thus be removed at intervals and cleansed, by the
nurse, without any risk of exciting spasm or dyspnoea by its absence
and reintroduction.
_After-treatment._--The after-treatment of a case in which tracheotomy
has been performed demands great care and many precautions. For the
first day or two the constant presence of an experienced nurse or
student is always necessary to insure the patency of the tube. The
temperature of the room should be equable and high, and it seems of
importance that the air should be kept moist as well as warm by the use
of abundance of steam.
A piece of thin gauze, or other light protective material, should be
placed over the mouth of the tube, to prevent the entrance of foreign
bodies.
In cases where the operation has been performed for some temporary
inflammatory closure of the air passage, retention of the tube for a few
days may suffice. It may then be removed, but it must be remembered that
the wound will generally close with great rapidity, so that it is as
well to be quite sure of the patency of the natural passage before the
artificial one is allowed to close by the removal of the tube.
In cases where from long-standing disease or severe accident the larynx
is rendered totally unfit for work, and the tube has to be worn during
the rest of the patient's life, care must be taken (1.) lest the tube do
not fit accurately, in which case it may ulcerate in various directions,
even into the great vessels;[133] (2.) lest the tube become worn, and
lest the part within the windpipe fall into the trachea and suffocate
the patient.[134]
LARYNGOTOMY.--As a temporary expedient in cases of great urgency, where
proper instruments and assistants are not at hand, laryngotomy is
occasionally useful, though from the want of space without encroaching
on the cartilages of the larynx, and from its close proximity to the
disease, laryngotomy is by no means a suitable or permanently successful
operation.
In the adult, especially in males with long spare necks, the operation
itself is exceedingly easy to perform. The crico-thyroid space (Fig.
XXXI. A) is so distinctly shown by the prominence of the thyroid
cartilage, and is so superficial that it is quite easy to open it in the
middle line with a common penknife, there being merely the skin and the
crico-thyroid membrane to be cut through, with very rarely any vessel of
any size. The opening can then be kept patent by a quill or a small
piece of flat wood. This simple operation has in many cases, where a
foreign body has filled up the box of the larynx, succeeded in saving
life, and even in cases of disease I have known it useful in giving time
for the subsequent performance of tracheotomy.
Easy as it appears and really is, cases are on record in which the
thyro-hyoid space has been opened instead of the crico-thyroid, such
operations being of course perfectly useless.
The incision is best made transversely.
LARYNGO-TRACHEOTOMY.--This modification consists in opening the air
passage by the division of the cricoid cartilage vertically in the
middle line, along with one or two of the upper rings of the trachea.
It seems to combine all the dangers with none of the advantages of the
other methods of operating. It is close to the disease, involves cutting
a cartilage of the larynx, and almost certain wounding of the isthmus of
the thyroid; and it is not easy to see what corresponding advantages it
has over tracheotomy in the usual position.
THYROTOMY is an operation by which the larynx is opened in the middle
line by a vertical incision, and its halves separated, while any morbid
growths are excised from the cords or ventricles. The merits and dangers
of this operation have been discussed at length by Mr. Durham[135] and
Dr. Morell Mackenzie.[136]
LARYNGECTOMY OR EXCISION OF THE LARYNX, first performed by Dr. Heron
Watson in 1866, has been lately frequently performed for carcinoma and
sarcoma. Each case presents its own difficulties, which vary according
to the amount and extent of the disease for which it is done.
The trachea must be divided and tamponed by a Trendelenburg canula,
after which the larynx must be carefully dissected out. The immediate
mortality, _i.e._ in first ten days, is fifty per cent., and Dr. Gross
holds that life has not been prolonged by the operation.[137]
OESOPHAGOTOMY.--This operation is very rarely required, and has as yet
been performed only for the removal of foreign bodies impacted in the
oesophagus, and interfering with respiration and deglutition. To cut
upon the flaccid empty oesophagus in the living body would be an
extremely difficult and dangerous operation, from the manner in which it
lies concealed behind the larynx, and in close contact with the great
vessels. When it is distended by a foreign body, and specially if the
foreign body has well-marked angles, the operation is not nearly so
difficult. It has now been performed in forty-three cases at least, of
which eight or nine have proved fatal. Seven, along with another in
which he himself performed it with success, were recorded by Mr. Cock of
Guy's Hospital.[138] Three others were performed by Mr. Syme, with a
successful result. Of the seven cases collected by Mr. Cock only two
died, one of pneumonia, the other of gangrene of the pharynx.
_Operation._--Unless there is a very decided projection of the foreign
body on the right, the left side of the neck should be chosen, as the
oesophagus normally lies rather on the left of the middle line. An
incision similar to that required for ligature of the carotid above the
omohyoid should be made over the inner edge of the sterno-mastoid
muscle; with it as a guide, the omohyoid may be sought and drawn
downwards and inwards, the sheath of the vessels exposed and drawn
outwards, the larynx slightly pushed across to the right, the thyroid
gland drawn out of the way by a blunt hook, the superior thyroid either
avoided or tied. The oesophagus is then exposed, and if the foreign
body is large, it is easily recognised; if the foreign body be small, a
large probang with a globular ivory head should then be passed from the
fauces down to the obstruction; this will distend the walls of the
oesophagus, and make it a much more easy and safe business to divide
them to the required extent. The wound in the oesophagus should be
longitudinal, and at first not larger than is required to admit the
finger, on which as a guide the forceps may be introduced to remove the
foreign body, or, if necessary, a probe-pointed bistoury still further
to dilate the wound.
For some days or even weeks the patient must be fed through an elastic
catheter introduced through the nose and retained, or by an ordinary
stomach-tube through the mouth. In introducing the latter there is
always a risk of opening the wound. No special sutures for the wound in
the oesophagus are required, nor is it advisable too closely to sew up
the external wound.
FOOTNOTES:
[127] _Leçons sur la Trachéotomie_, p. 10.
[128] Rough diagram of larynx and trachea:--A, crico-thyroid space,
_laryngotomy_; B B, dotted outline of thyroid isthmus and lobes, defines
the upper and lower positions for _tracheotomy_; C, thyroid--D, cricoid
cartilages; E, dotted outline of thymus gland in child of two years; F
F, outline of clavicles and jugular fossa.
[129] _Surgical Observations_, p. 335. See also Harrison _On the
Arteries_, vol. i. p. 16.
[130] _Leçons sur la Trachéotomie_, p. 9.
[131] _Lectures on Surgery_, 3d ed., vol. ii. p. 900.
[132] _Clinical Surgery in India_ (1866), p. 143.
[133] Mr. John Wood, _Path. Soc. Trans._, vol. xi. p. 20.
[134] South's _Chelius_, vol. ii. p. 400; and case recorded by Spence,
in _Ed. Med. Journal_, for August 1862.
[135] _Med. Chir. Transactions of London_, 1872.
[136] _British Med. Journal_ (Nos. 643, 644), 1873.
[137] Gross's _Surgery_, 6th ed., vol. ii. p. 342.
[138] _Guy's Hospital Reports_ for 1858.
CHAPTER X.
OPERATIONS ON THORAX.
EXCISION OF MAMMA.--When the whole breast is to be removed, two
incisions, inclosing an elliptical portion of skin along with the
nipple, must be made in the direction of the fibres of the pectoralis
muscle. The distance between the incisions at their broadest must depend
upon the nature of the disease for which the operation is performed, and
the extent to which the skin is involved; in every case the whole nipple
should be removed. The incisions should, if possible, be parallel with
the fibres of the pectoralis major, and extend across the full diameter
of the breast. During the operation the arm should be extended so as to
stretch both skin and muscle. The lower flap should be first raised and
dissected downwards, with care that the cuts are made in the
subcutaneous fat, and wide of the disease; the upper flap is then thrown
open, and the edge of the gland raised, so that the fibres of the
pectoralis are exposed below it. These should be cleanly dissected, so
as to insure removal of the whole gland.
Any bleeding during the operation can easily be checked by the fingers
of an assistant, and if the arteries entering the gland from the axilla
be divided last, they can be at once secured. If there are many bleeding
points, the application of cold for a few hours before the wound is
finally closed is a wise precaution.
The requisite stitches may be inserted while the patient is under
chloroform, but not tightened. The arm should then be brought down to
the side, and a folded towel laid over the wound after it is finally
closed. Great benefit results from the free use of drainage-tubes in
most cases; for this purpose a dependent opening in the lower flap is
often made.
Surgeons now operate even when the axillary glands are diseased, and by
a very free dissection and removal, even in hopeless-looking cases, life
may be prolonged. To insure the removal of the lymphatic vessels as well
as the glands, it is best not to separate the breast at its axillary
margin, but keep it attached by the tail of lymphatics surrounded by
fat, which will lead up to the glands. Section of the great pectoral
muscle will aid the dissection.
When the tumour is very large, and the skin has been much stretched
and undermined, more complicated incisions may be necessary; these
must be governed a good deal by the presence and positions of
adhesions or ulcerations of the skin. The best direction, when the
surgeon has his choice, that these incisions can take, is that of
radii from the nipple, bisecting the flaps made by the original
elliptical incision.
_N.B._--In operating for malignant disease, the one paramount
consideration is that _all_ the disease be excised, however curious,
inconvenient, or awkward, even insufficient, the flaps may look. Partial
excisions are worse than useless.
PARACENTESIS THORACIS, for the relief of pleurisy, acute and chronic,
and empyema, is an operation of extreme simplicity.
The proper selection of cases, the settling of the suitable position for
the tapping, and the choosing of the suitable time for it, are more
difficult, and not within the scope of the present work. On these
subjects much information may be obtained from the papers of Dr.
Bowditch of Boston, of Dr. Hughes and Mr. Cock,[139] and an exceedingly
interesting and valuable paper by Dr. Warburton Begbie.[140]
_Where_ is it to be performed? Not _above_ the sixth rib, else the
opening is not sufficiently dependent; very rarely _below_ the eighth on
the right side, and the ninth on the left. The intercostal space
generally bulges outwards if fluid is present, and this bulging acts as
an aid to diagnosis. As the intercostal artery lies under the lower edge
of the upper rib in each space, the trocar should be entered not higher
than the middle of the space; and because the artery is largest near the
spine, and also the space is there deeply covered with muscle, the
tapping should never be _behind_ the angle of the rib. In most of the
manuals we are told to select a spot midway between the sternum and
spine for the puncture; but Bowditch, Cock, and Begbie, who have had
large experience, prefer, and I believe rightly, a position considerably
behind this, _an inch_ or two below the angle of the scapula, between
the seventh and eighth, or between the eighth and ninth ribs.
The operation may be performed with a simple trocar and canula, round,
about an eighth of an inch in diameter, and at least two inches in
length. The point must be sharp, and it must be pushed in with
considerable quickness, so as to penetrate, not merely push forwards,
the pleura, which may be tough, and thicker than usual. Once the skin is
pierced, the instrument must be directed obliquely upwards, so as to
make the opening and position of the trocar dependent. When the trocar
is withdrawn the fluid may be allowed to flow so long as it keeps in a
full equable stream; whenever it becomes jerky and spasmodic, the canula
should be removed _before_ the sucking noise of air entering the chest
is heard.
In more chronic cases, where the quantity of fluid is large, and
especially if it is thick and curdy, the exhausting syringe of Mr.
Bowditch is an improvement on the simple trocar and canula.
It consists of a powerful syringe, which fits accurately to the trocar
with which the puncture is made. There is a stop-cock between the trocar
and syringe, and another at right angles to the syringe. The trocar
being introduced, it is held firmly in position by an assistant, by
means of a strong cross handle; the first stop-cock is then opened, and
the syringe worked slowly till it is filled with fluid through the
trocar, the other delivery stop-cock being closed. The first is then
closed, and the second opened; the syringe is then emptied through the
second into a basin. By a repetition of this process, the fluid can be
removed at pleasure, without any risk of the entrance of air.
Dieulafoy's aspirateur, which the author has now used in a very
large number of cases, will be found the best method yet devised of
safely removing the fluid in cases of serous effusion. But in
severe cases of empyema the pus is sure to be reproduced in the
great majority, and then a free incision, with strict antiseptic
precautions, will be needed, and subsequent free drainage.
The author has used with great benefit silver tubes, like long
narrow trachea-tubes, with broad shields, to insure free drain.
FOOTNOTES:
[139] Both in _Guy's Hospital Reports_, second series, vol. ii.
[140] _Edinburgh Medical Journal_ for June 1866.
CHAPTER XI.
OPERATIONS ON ABDOMEN.
PARACENTESIS ABDOMINIS.--To withdraw fluid from the abdominal cavity is
an exceedingly simple operation in itself, though certain precautions
are necessary to render it safe.
_Trocar._--The usual instrument used to be a simple round canula with a
trocar, the point of which should be very sharp, and in the shape of a
three-sided pyramid. It should be about three inches in length, and a
quarter of an inch in diameter. It may for convenience have an
india-rubber tube fixed to its side or end, for the purpose of conveying
the fluid to the pail or basin, but any other additions or alterations
have not been improvements. Lately surgeons have been diminishing the
size of the tube so as to withdraw the fluid more slowly, and taking
many precautions to insure the wound being kept aseptic.
_Where to tap._--In the linea alba, midway between the umbilicus and
pubes, or rather nearer the umbilicus. Here, there are no muscles nor
vessels, the opening is a dependent one, and the bladder is quite out of
the way of injury.
_N.B._--It is a wise precaution, in every case where there is a
possibility of doubt as to the state of the bladder, to pass a catheter.
I have myself known at least one case in which a surgeon was asked to
tap an over-distended bladder, as a case of ascites.
_The Operation._--As there is great risk of syncope coming on during the
operation, from the sudden relief to the pressure on the organs, a broad
flannel bandage should be applied to the belly, the ends of which are
split into three at each side, and crossed and interlaced behind. An
assistant should stand at each side to make gradual pressure by pulling
on the ends of the bandage, thus assisting the flow, and maintaining the
pressure. A hole should be cut in the bandage at the spot where the
puncture is to be made, and the trocar inserted by one firm push,
without any preliminary incision, unless the patient is inordinately
fat. As the trocar is withdrawn, the canula should be pushed still
further in. The surgeon should be ready at once to close the canula with
his thumb, if the flow begins to cease, lest air should be admitted. If
the flow ceases from any cause before all the fluid seems to be
evacuated, the trocar should _not_ be re-introduced, lest the intestines
be wounded, but a blunt-headed perforated instrument fitting the canula
should be inserted.
When all the fluid that can be easily obtained is evacuated, the canula
may be withdrawn, and a pad of lint secured over the wound by strapping.
GASTROTOMY.--Cutting into the stomach for the extraction of a foreign
body has now been performed at least ten times, and all but one
recovered. A typical example is that by Dr. Bell of Davenport, who
removed a bar of lead one pound in weight and ten inches in length, by
an incision four inches in length from the umbilicus to the false ribs.
The opening into the stomach was as small as possible, and required no
sutures.
GASTROSTOMY has within the last few years been practised very
frequently. Gross has collected 79 cases, 57 of which were for carcinoma
of oesophagus, all of which died within a few weeks, except eight who
survived for periods varying from three to seven months. The results in
cases of cicatricial and syphilitic strictures are more
favourable.--Howse's method seems the best, consisting of two stages.
1. A curved incision is made through the parietes parallel with, and a
finger-breadth below, the lower margin of chest wall on left side, the
peritoneum should be opened at the linea semilunaris, the stomach sought
for, and then attached to the abdominal wall by an outer ring of sutures
and to the edge of the wound by an inner ring. It should then be dressed
with carbolised lint and supported by a bandage.
2. A small opening should be made four or five days after the first
stage and the patient should be fed through this opening.
For full details, see Mr. Durham's paper in vol. i. of Holmes's Surgery,
edition of 1883, pp. 801-4.
GASTRECTOMY.--Excision of whole or part of the stomach is one of the
latest developments of operative daring, first done as a regular
operation by Pean in 1879, it has now been repeated sixteen times; four
cases have survived the operation for more than ten days. The chief
points to be attended to are prevention of death from shock and
hæmorrhage, and very careful stitching up of the wound. Considering the
difficulty of the diagnosis, the danger of the operation, and the almost
certain recurrence of the disease, the propriety of such operation seems
very doubtful.
OVARIOTOMY.--For the pathology of ovarian disease we must refer to Sir
Spencer Wells's work on the subject, and to the smaller Monograph on
Ovarian Pathology, by the late lamented Dr. Charles Ritchie, junior.
Even the modifications in the method of operating which have been
devised are so various and numerous, that if collected from the medical
journals of the last ten years they would fill a large volume. Besides
this, the operation of ovariotomy is one attended by so many
complications, that individual cases vary from each other as much as do
individual cases of hernia and tracheotomy; and as the specialities of
each case require to be met by specialities of treatment, there is
hardly any operation in surgery which requires greater readiness of
invention, or more individual sagacity in the operator.
To lay open the abdominal cavity from the sternum to the pubes, and
rapidly dissect out of this cavity an enormous tumour with a narrow
neck, the operator's only embarrassment being the peristaltic movements
of the bowels, and his only care being to tie the neck of the tumour
firmly with strong string, sew up the wound, and trust to nature, was an
operation very easy to perform, and requiring free cutting rather than
dexterity, and rashness more than true surgical insight.
Such were the ovariotomies prior to 1857.
An ovariotomy in 1883 is a very different business, varying in certain
important particulars.
(1.) Instead of the incision extending from sternum to pubes, it is now
made as short as possible.
(2.) Instead of being removed entire, the cyst is now emptied with the
greatest possible care (prior to its removal), and none of the contents
allowed to enter the peritoneal cavity.
(3.) The pedicle is brought to the surface, and in every case where it
is possible is secured outside the wound.
Besides these three important and cardinal points, there are other minor
matters almost equally essential; these are--(1.) The proper management
of the adhesions and the thorough prevention of all hæmorrhage from
them; (2.) the stitching up of the external wound, including the
peritoneum; (3.) the treatment of the patient during the first few days
of convalescence.
_Operation_ in a typical case, after the method of Sir Spencer Wells and
Dr. Thomas Keith.--The patient having had her bowels gently opened on
the previous day, and being as far as possible in her usual state of
health, should be warmly clad in flannel, both in body and limb, and
laid on an operating table of convenient height, in or near the room she
is to occupy. No carrying from ward to operating theatre and back again
is admissible. It will be found both cleanly and convenient to have a
large india-rubber cloth over the whole abdomen, cut out in the centre
so as to expose so much of the tumour as is necessary, but gummed on or
otherwise secured to the sides of the abdomen, and thus protecting the
clothes, and hanging down over the edge of the table; this will prevent
all wetting of the clothes and unnecessary exposure of the patient's
person, and can be easily removed after the operation. Chloroform being
administered, the bladder is evacuated by means of a catheter, and the
patient's head and shoulders are elevated on pillows. An incision is
then made in the linea alba, between the umbilicus and pubes, for about
four inches in length at first, so as to be large enough to admit the
hand, through all the tissues down to and through the peritoneum. Care
is necessary in dividing the peritoneum, on the one hand, not to divide
too much, in which case the cyst-wall will be penetrated, and the
contents effused into the peritoneal cavity; or, on the other hand, too
little, in which case the peritoneum may be mistaken for the cyst, and
separated from the transversalis fascia under the idea that adhesions
exist. Once the peritoneal cavity is opened, the incision through the
peritoneum must be extended to the full length of the external wound by
a probe-pointed bistoury.
The operator's hand must now be passed into the abdomen, and the tumour
isolated from its connections as far as possible. When no adhesions
exist it is extremely easy to pass the hand quite round the tumour,
ascertain its relations to the uterus and Fallopian tubes, and the
length and thickness of its pedicle. The presence of adhesions adds very
seriously to the danger and duration of the operation. We will suppose
at present that none exist in this typical case, and that the pedicle is
found of a satisfactory size and shape. The surgeon now protrudes the
anterior portion of the cyst-wall through the wound, and pierces it with
a large trocar,[141] to which is attached an india-rubber tube, by means
of which the effused fluid can be easily got rid of in any direction.
During the escape of the fluid from the cyst a special assistant keeps
up the tension by careful pressure on the abdomen. In cases where the
cyst is multilocular, and thus only a portion of the contents of the
tumour is at first evaluated, the operator should, by partially
withdrawing the trocar, without removing it entirely from the cyst,
endeavour to pierce and evacuate the other cysts, still through the
original opening in the first one.
While doing this, great care must be taken lest he pierce the external
wall of the tumour, and let any of the contents escape into the
abdominal cavity; to guard against this, the punctures should be made
by the right hand, while the left, re-inserted into the abdomen,
supports the cyst-wall.
The tumour having been as far as possible emptied of its fluid contents,
must now be dragged out of the wound, care being still taken lest any of
its fluid contents escape into the peritoneal cavity. In favourable
cases the pedicle is now brought easily into view. This may vary very
much in length and thickness. It is sometimes entirely absent, the
tumour being sessile on the broad ligament of the uterus; sometimes it
is thick and strong, sometimes long and slender. The manner in which it
is to be managed depends on its length and thickness. Varieties in
treatment will be noticed immediately. We will suppose that it is four
inches in length and one or two fingers in breadth. This is quite a
suitable case for the use of the clamp, the principle involved in the
use of which is, that the pedicle should be brought quite out of the
abdomen through the wound and secured on the surface. The best form
seems to be one made like a carpenter's callipers, with long but
removable handles, and a very powerful fixing-screw.
The blades of this clamp being protected by pads of lint should be made
to embrace the pedicle close to the cyst, in a direction at right angles
to the abdominal wound, and lying across it, the handles should then be
removed, and pads of lint placed below the clamp to protect the skin.
The cyst may now be cut away at some little distance above the clamp,
enough being left to prevent all danger of its slipping. Further to
avoid this danger, the pedicle may be transfixed by one or two needles
above the clamp.
The wound is now to be sewed up by several points of interrupted suture,
some inserted very deeply through all the tissues, including even the
peritoneum, others in the intervals of the first, including little more
than the skin. They may be either of iron, silver, platinum,
telegraph-wire (Mr. Clover's copper, coated with gutta-percha), or silk.
It seems of very little consequence which is used. Sir Spencer Wells,
after many trials, uses silk, as being removed with least pain to the
patient, and really causing no more suppuration than the metallic ones
do, if only removed early enough, viz., about the second or third day,
by which time the union of the wound should be firm.
The after-treatment should be very simple. Except under special
circumstances, stimulants are rarely necessary, and indeed, to avoid
vomiting, as little as possible should be given by the mouth during the
first twenty-four hours. The patient should be allowed to suck a little
ice to allay thirst, and opiate and nutritive enemata will be found
quite sufficient to keep up the strength in ordinary cases. The urine
should be drawn off by the catheter every six hours. The room should be
kept quiet, and the temperature equable, so long as there is no
interference with a plentiful supply of fresh air.
Some of the specialities and abnormalities involving special risks may
now be briefly noticed:--
1. _Adhesions._--These vary much in amount, in position, in
organisation, and danger.
_a._ _In amount._--In certain cases no adhesions exist, while in others,
omentum, intestines, tumour, uterus, and abdominal wall may be all
matted together in one common mass.
_b._ _In organisation._--Occasionally they are so soft and friable as to
break down under the finger with ease, and so slightly organised as not
to bleed at all in the process, while again they may be so firm and
close as to require a careful and prolonged dissection, and so vascular
as to require many points of ligature to be applied to large active
vessels.
_c._ There are special _dangers_ connected with the presence of these
adhesions, and varying much in different cases. Thus adhesions to the
intestines can generally be separated with comparative ease, and seem,
as a rule, to require the application of fewer ligatures than those
which unite the tumour to the abdominal wall. Adhesions to the wall are
sometimes so firm as to be quite inseparable, and thus to necessitate
some of the cyst-wall being left adherent. In Sir Spencer Wells's cases,
adhesions to the liver and gall-bladder occasionally occurred, requiring
careful dissection to separate them, and yet the patients all survived,
while pelvic adhesions, especially to the bladder and uterus, on more
than one occasion prevented the completion of the operation.
Vascular adhesions to the wall which require many ligatures certainly
add to the dangers of the case, while adhesions to the anterior wall of
the abdomen render the operation, especially its first stages, much more
difficult, preventing the cyst from being recognised.
2. _The condition of the pedicle_ is of great importance. If it is too
short, it prevents the use of the clamp, as if applied it is apt either
to pull the uterus up, or, pulling the clamp down, to make undue
traction on the wound, and rupture any adhesions. This is especially the
case where much flatus is generated, or where the patient is naturally
stout.
_Treatment._--Where the pedicle is just long enough to allow the clamp
to be applied, and yet too short to leave room for any distension of the
abdomen without undue tension, the best plan is to transfix it with a
stout double thread just below the clamp, tie it in two halves, and
bring the threads out past the clamp, so that, if tension does occur,
the clamp may be removed, the part beyond it cut off, and the rest
allowed to slip back into the pelvis, the ligatures being kept out at
the mouth of the wound.
Or again, it is sometimes possible, after applying one clamp firmly as
near the tumour as possible, to apply another above it when the greater
part of the tumour has been cut away; when the second is firmly fixed
it may then be safe to remove the first, and thus an artificially
elongated pedicle is obtained.
When still shorter, two plans remain for selection--(1.) to transfix the
pedicle in one or more points, then, securing it in two, three, or more
portions, cut it off above the ligatures and return it, leaving the
ligatures at the lower end of the wound. This gives a free drain for
pus, but theoretically the sloughing pedicle might be expected to set up
peritonitis; (2.) to transfix and tie the pedicle with one or more loops
of stout string, cut the ends off short, and return the whole affair,
closing the external wound at once. Theoretically there are grave
objections to this plan, but it has proved very successful, especially
in the hands of Dr. Tyler Smith.
Another ingenious modification, sometimes useful in a short narrow
pedicle, is to tie it as close to the cyst as possible, bring the
ligature out at the wound, and then with a strong harelip needle
transfix the pedicle, along with both sides of the wound, just below the
ligature.
When the pedicle is excessively broad and stout, it should be transfixed
by strong needles and double threads in various places, and thus tied in
several portions. Absence of the pedicle greatly adds to the danger in
any given case. Various plans have been tried, as cutting the attachment
through slowly by the écraseur, ligature of each vessel separately, so
many as twelve being sometimes required, and cauterising the stump. The
latter, as used by Mr. Baker Brown, has met with a large measure of
success, and is much used now.[142]
Dr. Keith for a time operated with antiseptic precautions, but has now
(1883) entirely given up the use of the spray, which he believes has
especial dangers in abdominal surgery.
OPERATION FOR STRANGULATED INGUINAL HERNIA.--The great rule to be
remembered with regard to this, as well as all other operations for
hernia, is, that the earlier it is performed the better chance the
patient has. Once a fair trial has been given to the taxis, aided by
proper position of the patient, the warm bath, and specially chloroform,
the operation should be performed.
The patient should be placed on his back with his shoulders elevated,
and the knee of the affected side slightly bent. The groin should then
be shaved, and the shape and size of the tumour, with the position of
the inguinal canal, carefully studied. The surgeon should then lift up a
fold of skin and cellular tissue, in a direction at right angles to the
long axis of the tumour, and holding one side of this raised fold in his
own left hand, commit the other to an assistant. He then transfixes this
fold with a sharp straight bistoury, with its back towards the sac, and
cuts outwards, thus at once making an incision along the axis of the
hernia without any risk of wounding the sac or bowel. Any vessel that
bleeds may now be tied. This incision will be found sufficiently large
for most cases; if not, however, it can easily be prolonged either
upwards or downwards. The surgeon must now devote his attention to
exposing the neck of the sac, and in so doing, defining the external
inguinal ring. The safest method of doing so is carefully to pinch up,
with dissecting forceps, layer after layer of connective tissue,
dividing each separately by the knife held with its flat side, not its
edge, on the sac, and then by means of the finger or forceps raising
each layer in succession and dividing it to the full extent of the
external incision. It is not always an easy matter to recognise the
sac, especially as the number of layers above it, which are described in
the anatomical text-books, are often not at all distinct.
The thickness of the connective tissue of the part varies immensely;
sometimes six layers or even more can be separately dissected, while,
again, one only may be found before the sac is exposed.
If small and recent, the sac may be recognised by its bluish colour, and
by the fact that it is possible to pinch up a portion of it between the
finger and thumb, and thus to rub its opposed surfaces against each
other.
If large and of old standing, it is sometimes so thin as not to be
recognisable, or again so enormously thickened, and so adherent, as to
be defined with great difficulty.
If it is small, _i.e._ when the whole tumour is under the size of an
egg, it ought to be thoroughly isolated, and its boundaries everywhere
defined. If large, and specially if adherent, the neck alone should be
cleared.
The sac thus being reached, the external abdominal ring should be
clearly defined, and the finger passed into it so as if possible to
determine the presence or absence of any constriction in it. If it feels
tight, the internal pillar of the ring should then be cautiously divided
on the finger by a probe-pointed narrow bistoury, in a direction
parallel to the linea alba.
At this stage the question comes to be considered as to whether the sac
should or should not be opened. Much has been said and written on both
sides.
Not to open the sac avoids the risk of peritonitis, and of injury to the
bowel; but, on the other hand, exposes the patient to the danger of the
hernia being returned unreduced; for in many cases the stricture is to
be found in the sac itself, and adhesions very rapidly form between
coils of intestine in the sac and the inner wall. Again, not to open the
sac prevents us from discovering the condition in which the bowl is; it
may possibly be gangrenous, in which case such a return _en masse_ would
be almost necessarily fatal.
A general rule or two may be given here:--
1. The sac should be opened in every case where there is any reason for
doubt about the condition of the bowel, where there has been
long-continued vomiting, or much tenderness on pressure.
2. Even in cases in which there is every reason to believe the bowel is
perfectly sound, the sac should be opened, unless the whole contents can
be easily and completely reduced out of the sac into the belly, as in
cases where this cannot be done there probably exist either a stricture
in the neck of the sac itself, or adhesions of the bowel to the sac. We
should endeavour to avoid opening the sac in cases of old scrotal hernia
of large size, where the symptoms have not been urgent, especially in
large unhealthy hospitals, as the risk of peritonitis is so great.
Antiseptic precautions seem considerably to diminish the risk of opening
the sac.
If the sac then is not to be opened, the rest of the operation is very
simple. Endeavour to reduce the bowel out of the sac, and then return
the sac itself, unless the hernia is of old standing, and adhesions
prevent its reduction. A few silver stitches to close the wound and a
carefully adjusted pad are now all that is requisite.
If the sac is to be opened, how can it be done with least danger to the
bowel?
If the hernia is small, and it is possible to define it all, the sac
should be opened at its lower end, as _there_ a small quantity of serous
fluid which intervenes between the sac and the bowel will be found.
Where this is present, there is no danger of wounding the bowel, as the
sac can be easily pinched up; but this is by no means invariably the
case, so great care should always be taken. A small portion of the wall
being thus pinched up should be divided in the same manner as the
layers of cellular tissue were divided in exposing the sac. A few drops
of serum will then escape, and the glistening surface of the bowel be
exposed; the finger should then be introduced at the opening, and the
incision enlarged by a probe-pointed bistoury. If the hernia is small
the sac should be slit up to its full extent; if large, only a
sufficient portion of the neck should be opened. As soon as the opening
in the sac is large enough to admit the point of the operator's
forefinger, it should be inserted so as to protect the intestines, and
the remainder of the sac slit up on it as a guide.
The sac thus opened, the next step is to divide the constriction,
wherever it be. It is most likely to be found at the neck of the sac,
just where it protrudes through the internal ring in an oblique hernia,
or through the tendons of the transversalis and internal oblique, where
the hernia is direct. Now, this constriction might be divided in any
direction were it not for the risk of wounding the epigastric artery,
and also of injuring the spermatic cord, which is in close relation to
the neck of the sac of an oblique hernia.
Wound of the epigastric artery is the chief danger, for in _all_ cases
it is close to the neck of the sac. Were its position in relation to the
neck of the sac constant, it might be easily avoided by an incision in
the opposite direction; but as this relation varies according to the
nature of the hernia, an element of danger is introduced. Thus, in
oblique inguinal ruptures, where the sac passes out through the internal
ring (Fig. XXXII. IR), the artery will always be found to the inside of
the neck of the sac; while in direct herniæ, where the bowel has made
its escape through the triangle of Hesselbach (Fig. XXXII. +), and
passed through the conjoint tendon straight to the external ring, the
epigastric artery will be found on the outside of the neck of the sac.
In recent herniæ the differential diagnosis is comparatively easy, but
in those of old standing and large size, in which the obliquity of the
canal has been much diminished, it is almost impossible to tell of what
kind the hernia originally was, and consequently to determine in which
direction it is safe to incise the neck of the sac.
Such being the case, the best rule is to incise the neck of the sac
directly upwards, _i.e._ in a line parallel with the linea alba, and
also to cut it very cautiously bit by bit, in every case, if possible,
with the finger inserted as a guide to the position of a vessel and a
protection to the gut.
The spermatic vessels lie sometimes behind, sometimes on either side of
the sac, and in very old herniæ may be separated from each other so as
really to surround the sac. The cut directly upwards is also the safest
for them.
All constrictions being overcome, it is not sufficient merely to push
back the gut into the belly. Its condition must be carefully examined,
and it must be decided whether the constriction has caused gangrene or
not. To examine this properly, it is generally best to pull down an inch
or two more of the gut, so as thoroughly to bring into view the
constricted portion, as _it_ is most likely to be fatally nipped.
It is not always easy to decide as to the condition of the bowel.
Certain points must be observed:--
(1.) _Colour._--There may be very great alteration in the colour of the
bowel from congestion, and yet no gangrene. It may be dark red, claret,
purple, or even have a brownish tint, and yet recover; where it is
black, or a deep brown, the prognosis is unfavourable.
(2.) _Glistening._--So long as the proper glistening appearance of the
bowel remains, there is hope for it, even when the colour is bad; if it
has lost it, and especially if, instead of being tense and shining, it
is dull and flaccid and in wrinkles, the bowel is almost certainly
gangrenous.
(3.) _Thickness._--If much thickened, and especially if rough on the
surface, the bowel has probably been forming adhesions to the sac, or to
contiguous coils, and the prognosis is less favourable.
(4.) _Smell._--The peculiar gangrenous odour on opening the sac is very
characteristic. In cases where ulceration and perforation have occurred,
the odour is fæcal.
1. If, then, the bowel is tolerably healthy-looking, though discoloured,
it should be returned gradually, not _en masse_, into the abdomen, the
wound sewed up, and a pad of lint put on, with a bandage.
2. If there are adhesions of bowel to sac or to a neighbouring coil, or
of omentum to sac, the stricture should be freely divided, the
protruding coils of intestine should be emptied of their contents, but
no rash attempt made to force their return. Especially is this rule to
be observed with protruded, swollen, or adherent omentum, for
considerable risks attend any attempt at excision of the protruded
portion--risks of hæmorrhage, peritonitis, and ulceration of the
contiguous bowel.
If the bowel be returned, or even the continuity of the canal restored
by the cutting of the stricture, though the bowel be not returned, no
great risks accrue from the retention of a piece of omentum in the sac,
in a position which it may possibly have already occupied for years.
3. If the bowel is absolutely gangrenous, even in a very small portion
of its length, no reduction should be attempted, but the gangrenous
portion should be kept outside, with the hope that adhesive inflammation
may be set up, so as to glue the bowel to the abdominal wall, prevent
fæcal extravasation, and form a temporary artificial anus. If the
gangrenous portion be very full of fæces or flatus, incisions may be
made into it. This should be avoided in cases where the patient is
already much prostrated, as I have seen cases in which the opening of
the bowel seemed to inflict a fatal shock.
Enterectomy or excision of the gangrenous portion has recently been
recommended and performed by some surgeons. The very high authority of
the late Professor Spence is against such procedure.[143]
Cases of gangrene of even large portions of bowel are by no means
necessarily fatal. They may recover with an artificial anus, the remedy
of which by surgical means we must notice in its proper place.
OPERATION FOR STRANGULATED FEMORAL HERNIA.--While the general principles
guiding treatment and ruling the conduct of the operation are the same
as in inguinal, there are some differences in points of detail which
render a brief separate description necessary.
A single word on the anatomy. Tracing a femoral rupture from within
outwards, we find that its first stage is to push its way through
the weak point of the arch formed by Poupart's ligament, that is,
the spot called the crural arch, bounded on its outer side by the
sheath of fascia which surrounds the femoral vein; above by
Poupart's ligament; on its inner side by the curved fibres of
Poupart's ligament, which, curving backwards, are inserted into the
ilio-pectineal line, have a sharp falciform edge, and have been
dignified by the special name of Gimbernat's ligament (Fig. XXXII.
G); and below by the os pubis itself. This arch or ring thus
bounded is, in the normal state of parts, filled by a layer of
fibrous texture, a little fat, and occasionally a small gland.
These parts are pushed forwards in the descent of the hernia, and
in a small recent one may be said to form a sort of inner covering;
in a larger and older one they are split by the hernia, and, while
forming a constriction round its neck, leave the fundus of the sac,
so far as they are concerned, quite uncovered.
A femoral hernia may stop there, satisfied with merely coming
through the ring, and, if sudden and recent in a healthy, well-knit
subject, such a rupture is exceedingly dangerous, the constriction
being very severe, and the consequent gangrene of the bowel very
rapid if unrelieved. In most cases, however, it makes its way still
further out, and the next covering it gains is from the cribriform
fascia. This is the layer of fibres, pierced (as its name implies)
with orifices for the passage of veins and lymphatics, which
stretches between the two curved edges of the saphenous opening. It
varies much in strength; when the rupture has been slow and
gradual, it will certainly add a covering of greater or less
thickness, but where the hernia is large and old we must not expect
to find many traces of the cribriform fascia, at least over the
fundus of the tumour.
The ordinary superficial fascia of the part, with its fat, nerves,
veins, and lymphatics, and the thin skin of the groin, are the only
remaining coverings. It is very remarkable how exceedingly thin all
the so-called coats become in large femoral herniæ of long
standing, especially in thin old people.
_Operation._--Various incisions are recommended. The one which gives
freest access and exposes the sac best, is shaped like a T, the
horizontal limb of which is oblique, the direction of the obliquity
varying on the two sides. The horizontal incision should be made just
over Poupart's ligament, and parallel to it, the centre of the incision
corresponding to the neck of the sac, and its length varying according
to the size of the tumour and the depth of the parts; the other should
extend downwards from the centre of the former, as far as is necessary
to display the whole sac. The first should be made by pinching up and
transfixing the skin, the second by ordinary incision, to the same depth
as the first. The small flaps thus made must now be thrown back; any
vessels that have been divided are to be tied. Now, with great care and
caution the surgeon is to pinch up and divide any layers of condensed
cellular tissue which may still cover the sac, till it is thoroughly
exposed to its full extent, and remove any glands which may intervene.
The neck of the sac being exposed, it may be possible in some very
exceptional cases to give the patient the benefit of the minor
operation, which consists in leaving the sac unopened. In such a case
(to be described immediately), the surgeon passes his finger along the
neck of the sac as far as possible into the ring, and then with a
probe-pointed bistoury very cautiously nicks the upper edge of
Gimbernat's ligament, in one or more places, being careful to feel for
any pulsation before dividing a single fibre. He may then be able to
empty the sac of its contents, and return the bowel and omentum, still
retaining the sac outside.
On the other hand, where it is determined to open the sac, the pinching
up of the sac must be managed with great care, to avoid injury of the
bowel. There is generally a little fluid to be found at the fundus,
which will protect the bowel. In one case in which Liston operated, he
tells us, "there was no possibility of pinching up the sac, either with
the fingers or forceps; it contained no fluid, and was impacted most
firmly with bowel; very luckily the membrane was thin; and, observing a
pelleton of fat underneath, I scratched very cautiously with the point
of the knife in the unsupported hand, until a trifling puncture was
made, sufficient to admit the blunt point of a narrow bistoury."[144] If
the sac contains bowel and omentum, it is safer to open it over the
omentum than over the bowel. When a small opening is made, an escape of
the contained fluid takes place, and then the sac should be slit up as
far as its neck by a probe-pointed bistoury, guided by the finger,
introduced to protect the bowel, whenever the opening is sufficiently
large. The forefinger must now be cautiously insinuated into the neck of
the sac, the nail being directed to the bowel, the pulp to the
crescentic margin of Gimbernat's ligament, and any constriction very
cautiously divided. The bowel should then be drawn down a little, the
constricted point carefully examined, and then returned or not,
according to its condition.
Two points require a brief separate notice:--
1. In what direction is the crural arch to be divided? Not outwards
certainly, on account of the vein, nor downwards, as the bone prevents
that direction. Is it to be upwards or inwards? Not upwards, for such
an incision would endanger the spermatic cord or round ligament, besides
greatly weakening the abdominal wall by the division, partial or
complete, of Poupart's ligament. Inwards then it must be; and little
more need be said about it, were it not for the occasional existence of
an abnormal course and distribution of the obturator artery.
[Illustration: FIG. XXXII.[145]]
The usual origin of this vessel is from the internal iliac, in which
case (Fig. XXXII. N O) it never comes near the sac at all. In certain
cases (1 in 3-1/2) it rises from the epigastric, and in a very few (1 in
72) from the external iliac. If rising from either of the two last, it
most commonly passes downwards at the outer side of the hernia, in which
case (Fig. XXXII. S O) no harm can possibly result; but in a few rare
cases, perhaps 1 in every 60 of those operated on, the vessel winds
round the hernia (Fig. XXXII. O), crossing at its inner side, and thus
may be (and has actually been) divided by a rash incision. With due
care, however, and by cutting a very little at a time, even this danger
may be avoided.
2. Under what circumstances is it possible or justifiable to reduce a
femoral hernia, without previously opening the sac? Only in certain very
select cases, where the hernia is recent, the constricting parts lax,
the general symptoms very mild, and where there is reason to believe the
bowel has completely escaped injury by compression or the taxis. There
are both difficulties and dangers in this so-called minor operation:--1.
_Difficulties_, For it is not easy to divide the constriction without
the assistance of the finger in the sac, and it is not easy to reduce
the contents with the sac unopened, except through a much freer opening
than is necessary when the bowel has been fairly exposed. 2. _Dangers_,
Of reducing sac and viscera, together with the strangulation still kept
up by tightness in the neck of the sac; or of supposing the sac is
emptied while a knuckle of bowel still remains in it, and is
strangulated; or, lastly, of reducing the intestine which has already
become gangrenous. It is very remarkable how very soon gangrene may come
on, in a case of a small recent femoral hernia, in which the fibrous
tissues constricting the neck of the sac are tense and undilatable. A
protrusion for eight hours has been sufficient to destroy the life of a
knuckle of bowel.
A note here on a certain condition very frequent in femoral herniæ,
which may occasionally give a good deal of trouble. Symptoms of
strangulation have been well marked, yet when the sac is opened
nothing is to be seen except a mass of omentum, perhaps tolerably
healthy-looking. To reduce this _en masse_ would be very unsafe;
it is necessary carefully to unravel it, and disengage the knuckle
of bowel which is almost certainly included in it, and which has
given rise to the symptoms of strangulation.
OPERATION FOR STRANGULATED UMBILICAL HERNIA.--The operation is
practically the same, whether the hernia is a true umbilical one, or one
which with more strict accuracy might be called ventral. True umbilical
hernia is a disease of infancy and childhood, being almost always
congenital, and the viscera protrude through the umbilical aperture.
This rarely requires operation, as it may generally be returned with
ease, and even cured by a proper bandage and compress. Ventral hernia,
commonly called _umbilical_, is generally a protrusion of viscera
through a new preternatural aperture in the fibrous tissues close to the
navel, may often attain a large size, is liable to strangulation, and is
not easily palliated or cured.
In either case the operation requires a very brief description. If the
hernia is small, under the size of a hen's egg, a crucial incision
through the thin skin which covers it will thoroughly expose the sac
when the flaps are dissected back. The forefinger should then be
inserted in the round opening, and the edges cautiously incised in
several directions, each incision however being very small.
If the rupture is large, a single linear, or a T-shaped incision,
exposing the base of the tumour, will be sufficient to allow the
requisite dilatation of the opening to be made. It is not at all
necessary in every case to open the sac of the peritoneum. If required,
it must be done with great caution, as the sac is generally very thin.
In cases where the hernia is chiefly omental, the sac should be opened,
lest a knuckle of bowel be inclosed and strangulated in the omentum.
OBTURATOR HERNIA is an extremely rare lesion, and a large proportion of
the recorded cases were discovered only after death. When diagnosed
during life and strangulated, some have been reduced by taxis, and only
a very few cases have been operated on, some with success. It is not
likely that a diagnosis could be made, except in very emaciated
patients, in whom pain at the obturator foramen was a prominent symptom,
and in whom it could be ascertained positively that the crural ring was
empty. An incision over the tumour, sufficient to allow the pectineus
muscle to be exposed and divided, is necessary. The hernia may then be
reduced without opening the sac, if recent; if of long standing, the sac
must be opened. One case is recorded by Dr. Lorinzer, in which, after
strangulation for eleven days, he opened the sac and found the bowel
gangrenous. The patient had a fæcal fistula; but survived the operation
for eleven months. Nuttel, Obrè, and Bransby Cooper have each diagnosed
and treated such cases.[146]
Other forms of hernia are so rare, and the treatment of each case must
necessarily vary so much in its circumstances, as not to require or
admit of any detailed account of the operations requisite for their
relief.
OPERATIONS FOR THE RADICAL CURE OF HERNIA.--The inconveniences and
discomfort caused by even the best-adjusted trusses or bandages, the
unsatisfactory support they afford, and the risk of their slipping and
allowing the hernia to escape, have given rise to many attempts to cure
hernia by operation.
Even to enumerate these would be quite beyond the limits of the present
volume; suffice it to classify a few of the most important of them
according to the principle involved in each, and then give a very brief
account of the method of operating which seems to be at once the most
scientific, least dangerous, and most permanently useful.
The question at issue is briefly this. We have, in a hernia, the
following condition:--The walls of a great cavity are at one or more
points specially weak, the contained viscera have protruded, either by
extension and stretching of a natural opening, or by the formation of a
new breach in the walls, and, in protruding, they have brought with them
as a covering a serous membrane, extremely extensible, highly sensitive
to injury, and, when injured, certain to resent it by severe, spreading,
and dangerous inflammation.
Do we desire to remedy this protrusion, we may act--
1. On the intestines themselves; but for all surgical purposes, they are
out of our reach. We cannot do more than, by diminishing their contents,
diminish their volume, and by position and rest reduce to the utmost
their tendency to protrude. This includes the medical and prophylactic
treatment of hernia, or rather of the tendency to hernia.
2. We may try what can be done with the _sac_ which the intestines have
pushed down before them. Can it be obliterated? If it can, perhaps the
intestines may be retained in their cavity. Very many plans of dealing
with the sac have been tried.
To cause obliteration of its cavity many methods have been proposed:--by
ligature of it along with the spermatic cord, involving loss of the
testicle, either by gradual separation, by sloughing, or by immediate
removal;--by cutting into it, and then stitching it up;--by constricting
it with wire, as in the _punctum aureum_; by pinching sac and coverings
up, by passing needles under them as they emerge from the external ring,
as Bonnet of Lyons did; by constricting sac alone with a double wire, by
subcutaneous puncture, as Dr. Morton of Glasgow has done;--by severe
pressure from the outside with a strong tight truss and a pad of wood,
as proposed by Richter; by setons of threads or candlewicks, as proposed
by Schuh of Vienna;--by injection of tincture of iodine or cantharides,
as by Velpeau and Pancoast;--by the introduction into the sac of thin
bladders of goldbeaters' skin, which were then filled with air, and were
intended to excite inflammation, as in the radical cure of hydrocele; or
by the still more severe method of Langenbeck, consisting in exposing
the sac by a free incision at the superficial ring, separating it from
the cord, and passing a ligature round the sac alone, leaving the
ligatured portion in the scrotum either to become obliterated or to
slough out. Schmucker of Berlin varied this, by cutting away the
constricted portion below the ligature.
The objections to these methods are various: the more gentle are
uncertain and inefficient; of the more severe, some involve mutilation,
by the loss or removal of the testicle; others, as those of Langenbeck
and Schmucker, are very dangerous and fatal, by the inflammation
spreading to the peritoneal cavity (20 to 30 per cent. died); while all
of these methods afford at best only temporary relief. And this is only
what might have been expected, for the sac was only a _result_ of the
protrusion, not a _cause_; and so long as the weakness and insufficiency
of the parietes of the abdomen remain, so long will the extensible
loosely-attached peritoneum continue to furnish new sacs for visceral
protrusions.
3. We have now only the canal left to act upon; and the operations on
the canal may be divided into two great classes:--
(_a._) Those in which the operator attempts to plug up the dilated
canal. (_b._) Those in which he tries to constrict it, by reuniting its
separated sides.
(_a._) Attempts to plug the canal have, in most cases, been made by
invagination of the skin of the scrotum and its fascia. These have been
very numerous and various in their adaptation of mechanical appliances,
but have all been designed with the same object. Dzondi of Halle, and
Jameson of Baltimore, incised lancet-shaped flaps of skin, and
endeavoured to fix them by displacement over the ring. Gerdy invaginated
a portion of scrotum and fascia into the enlarged canal, by the
forefinger pushed it up, and secured it in its place by a thread passed
from the point of his finger first through the invaginated skin, then
through the abdominal walls, endeavouring to include the walls of the
inguinal canal, causing the point of the needle to project some lines
above the inguinal ring; the same process being effected with the other
end of the thread on the other side of the finger, and the two ends
which have been brought out near each other on the abdominal wall, being
tied tightly over a cylinder of plaster. The ensheathed sac was then
painted with caustic ammonia to excite inflammation, and a pad put on
over all.
Signoroni modified this by fixing the invaginated skin by a piece of
female catheter, retained in its place by transfixion by three harelip
needles, tied by twisted sutures.
Wützer of Bonn, again, modified this, by substituting a complicated
instrument, consisting of a stout plug in the inguinal canal, held in
position by needles which are passed through the anterior wall of the
canal in the groin. Compression between plug and compress, with the
intention of causing adhesion between skin, fascia, and sac, is then
managed by means of a screw. The plug is retained for about seven days.
Modifications of this method have been tried by Wells, Rothmund, and
Redfern Davies, all aiming in the direction of simplicity; but by far
the most simple and efficacious method on the Wützer principle yet
devised is that of Professor Syme, which he described in the pages of
the _Edinburgh Medical Journal_ for May 1861, in which the invagination
of integument is both simply and securely managed by strong threads, as
in Gerdy's method, while a piece of bougie or gutta-percha, to which
the threads are fixed, replaces Wützer's expensive and complicated
apparatus. Sir J. Fayrer of Calcutta has had a very large experience of
Wützer's method, and also of a plan of his own. Out of 102 cases by the
latter method, 77 were cured, 9 relieved, 14 failed, and 2 died.[147]
Mr. Pritchard of Bristol has proposed an additional step in operations
on the invagination principle, consisting in the stripping of a thin
slip of skin from the orifice of the cutaneous canal, and then putting a
pin through the parts to get them to unite, and thus close the aperture
completely.
Now, what results follow these operations? At first they are almost
invariably successful, but the complaint is that, in most cases, the
rupture recurs. The principle is to plug up the passage by the
mechanical presence of the invaginated skin, the plug being retained in
position by adhesive inflammation between it and the edges of the
dilated ring. But the ring is left dilated, or, indeed, generally its
dilatation is increased; and as, on continued pressure from within, the
new adhesions give way, or, as often happens, a new protrusion takes
place in the circular _cul-de-sac_ necessarily left all round the apex
of the invagination, the still lax ring and canal offer no resistance to
the protrusion.
(_b._) The principle of constriction of the canal by reuniting its
separated sides. This is the principle of the various methods introduced
by Mr. Wood of King's College, and described by him in his most able and
exhaustive work.[148]
He applies sutures through the sides of the dilated inguinal or crural
canals, or umbilical openings, in such a manner as to insure their
complete closure.
1. _For inguinal hernia._--To stitch together the two sides of the canal
with safety requires attention to several points--(1.) That it be done
nearly, if not entirely, subcutaneously. (2.) That the protruding bowel
should be kept out of the way, and not be transfixed by the needle. (3.)
That the spermatic cord should be protected from injurious pressure.
These different indications are attained by Mr. Wood by a very ingenious
mode of operating, which I can describe here only briefly, and for a
full description of which I must refer to Mr. Wood's own monograph
already alluded to.
For his first twenty cases Mr. Wood used strong hempen thread for the
stitches; of late, however, he has proved the greater advantage of
strong wire.
When a large old hernia in an adult is the subject of operation, it is
thus performed by Mr. Wood:--The pubes being shaved, and the patient put
thoroughly under the influence of chloroform, the rupture is reduced,
and the operator's forefinger forced up the canal so as to push every
morsel of bowel fairly into the abdomen. An assistant then commands the
internal ring by pressure, to prevent return of the rupture.
An incision is made in the scrotum over the fundus of the sac, large
enough to admit a forefinger and the large needle used in the operation;
the edges of the skin are to be separated from the fascia below for
about one inch all round. The forefinger is then to be passed in at the
aperture and pushed upwards, invaginating the detached fascia before it,
and it must be made to enter the inguinal canal far enough to define the
lower border of the internal oblique muscle stretched over it. A large
curved needle (unarmed) is then passed on the finger as a guide, through
the internal oblique tendon, the internal portion of the ring, and the
skin of the abdomen; it is then threaded and withdrawn. Again, the
needle (now with a thread) is guided by the finger and pushed through
Poupart's ligament and the external pillar of the ring as before; while
by a little manipulation its point is made to protrude through the same
opening in the skin as before, a loop of thread is now left there, and
the needle, still threaded, is again withdrawn. The next stitch, still
guided on the finger, takes up the tendinous layer of the triangular
aponeurosis covering the outer border of the rectus tendon close to the
pubic spine; the point of the needle is then turned obliquely, so as to
protrude through the original puncture in the skin a third time, the
needle is then freed from the thread and withdrawn, thus leaving two
ends and one intermediate loop of thread all at the one opening. These
are so arranged that when they are tightened they draw together the
sides of the canal; they are then secured over a compress of lint. The
compress is removed and the stitches loosened, at dates varying from the
third to the seventh day.
Mr. Wood now uses wire instead of thread. It has the advantage of
greater firmness, excites less suppuration, and may be left much longer
_in situ_, in consequence of which there is less risk of suppuration or
pyæmia, and more chance of a good consolidation of the parts.
In congenital herniæ, and small ruptures in children and young
boys, Mr. Wood uses rectangular pins in the following manner:--The
scrotum being invaginated (without any incision through the skin)
as far as possible up the canal, a rectangular pin, with a
slightly-curved spear-pointed head, is passed through the skin of
the groin to the operator's forefinger; guided by it, it is brought
safely down the canal, and brought out through the skin of the
scrotum just over the fundus of the hernial sac. A second pin is
passed from the lower opening (still guided by the finger) in an
upward direction, transfixing in its course the posterior surface
of the outer pillar of the superficial ring, its point being
brought out through, or at least close to, the first puncture made
by the first pin. The pins are then locked in each other's
loops--the punctures and skin protected by lint or adhesive
plaster,--and the whole is retained by lint and a spica bandage.
The pins should generally be withdrawn about the tenth day.
The author has now in many cases stitched with catgut the edges of the
ring after the ordinary operation for hernia with the best effect.
2. _For Femoral Rupture._--Cases suitable for operation are very
infrequent; but should such a one be met with, Mr. Wood proposes the
following operation on the same plan as the preceding. The hernia being
fully reduced and the parts relaxed by position, an incision about an
inch long should be made over the fundus of the tumour, and its edges
raised so as to admit the finger fairly into the crural opening. The
vein is then to be pushed inwards, and the needle passed through the
pubic portion of the fascia lata of the thigh, and then through
Poupart's ligament, appearing on the skin of the abdomen, a wire is then
passed through the eye of the needle and hooked down, appearing through
the wound, it is then withdrawn, and the needle again passed through the
pubic portion of the fascia lata, but about three-quarters of an inch to
the inside of the first puncture, then through Poupart's ligament again,
and protruded through the same orifice in the skin; the other end of the
wire is then hooked down as before, leaving a loop above, at the needle
orifice, and two ends at the wound in the skin below. Both loops and
ends must be managed as before.
The author after operating for the relief of strangulation in a
case of very large femoral hernia in a girl aged 23, stitched up
the neck of the sac, and also stitched it to Gimbernat's ligament.
The result for some months was admirable, though the hernia had
been a very difficult one to replace from its size, and had been
long in the habit of coming down. Eventually protrusion occurred to
a very slight extent, but a truss keeps it completely up.
3. _For Umbilical Rupture._--The principle involved in Mr. Wood's
operation for umbilical rupture is precisely the same as for inguinal
and crural. It consists in stitching the two edges of the tendinous
aperture by wire; the needle is passed on a sort of small scoop or
broad grooved director, which at once invaginates the skin and protects
the bowel. Two stitches are thus inserted on each side. For the
ingenious method by which they are introduced subcutaneously, I must
refer to the detailed description in Mr. Wood's monograph. The wires are
thus twisted and tightened over a pad of lint or wood, drawing together
the edges of the opening in the tendon.
OPERATIONS FOR ARTIFICIAL ANUS.--In children the condition known as
imperforate anus may sometimes be remedied by exploratory operations in
the perineum, guided by the protrusion caused by the distended
intestine. There are other cases, however, in which the rectum, as well
as the anus, seems to be deficient, and in which, from the want of
protrusion, there is no warrant for attempting an operation there; in
these the only chance of life that remains is in an attempt to open the
bowel higher up.
In adults, again, absolute closure of the rectum and anus, and complete
obstruction, may be the result of malignant disease, or even, very
rarely, of simple organic stricture.
In such cases, where the patient is tolerably strong and yet evidently
doomed from the complete obstruction, an attempt at the formation of an
artificial anus is warrantable, and in many cases afford great relief,
and prolongs life for months.
Without going into all the various positions proposed for such
operations, I select the two most warrantable, which have borne the test
of experience. These are--1. Colotomy in the left loin. This is
applicable in the case of adults with rectal obstruction. 2. Colotomy in
the left groin applicable in cases of imperforate anus and deficiency of
rectum in infants.
1. _Colotomy in the left loin_, generally known by the name of
_Amussat's operation_.--The patient is laid upon his face, a pillow
placed under the abdomen, rendering the left flank prominent. A
transverse incision should then be made at a level about two
finger-breadths above the crest of the ilium, extending from the outer
edge of the erector spinæ muscle forward for four or five inches,
according to the fatness of the patient; the muscles must then be
carefully divided till the transversalis fascia is exposed. It is then
to be pinched up and divided, as in the operation for strangulated
hernia. The muscular wall of the colon uncovered by peritoneum is then
in most cases very easily recognised from its immense distension. The
bowel should then be hooked up by a curved needle, two or three points
at least secured to the margins of the wounds by stitches, and then the
bowel should be opened by a longitudinal incision of at least an inch in
length. When the distension has been great, there is generally a rush of
fluid fæces, which must be provided for, special care being taken lest
any get into the cavity of the peritoneum.
[Illustration: FIG. XXXIII.[149]]
2. _Colotomy in the left groin_, for absence of anus and deficiency of
rectum in newly born infants.--The dissections of Curling, Gosselin, and
others have shown that in infants the operation of lumbar colotomy is
very difficult, and its results uncertain, while it is comparatively
easy to open the colon in the left groin. Huguier, again, has shown that
in certain cases the colon is not to be found in the left groin, but is
accessible in the right groin. This abnormality seems, as shown by
Curling, to occur not oftener than once in every ten cases.
_Operation._--An oblique incision from an inch and a half to two inches
in length should be made in the left iliac region above Poupart's
ligament, extending a little above the anterior-superior spinous process
of the ilium. The fibres of the abdominal muscles should be divided on a
director passed beneath them, and the peritoneum should next be
cautiously opened to a sufficient extent. The colon will most likely
protrude, but if small intestine appear the colon must be sought for
higher up. A curved needle armed with a silk ligature should be passed
lengthways through the coats of the upper part of the colon, and another
inserted in the same way below, and the bowel, being drawn forwards,
should then be opened by a longitudinal incision. The colon must
afterwards be attached to the skin forming the margin of the wound by
four sutures at the points of entry and exit of the needles.
OPERATION FOR THE REMOVAL OF AN ARTIFICIAL ANUS, in cases where the
bowel is patent below.--After the operation for hernia in a case where
the bowel is gangrenous, the only hope of the patient's recovery
consists in the formation of adhesions between the bowel and the
external wound, and the presence, for a time at least, of an artificial
anus. If adhesions do form, and the patient recovers, it becomes a
matter of great importance for his future comfort that the canal of the
intestine should be re-established, and the fistulous opening allowed to
close. This, however, is by no means easy, as even when the portion of
intestine destroyed has been very small, a septum or valve remains which
directs the contents of the bowel outwards, and so long as it exists is
an effectual obstacle to any of the fæcal contents passing into the
distal portion of the bowel. This septum or éperon is formed by the
mesenteric side of the two ends of the bowel. To destroy this without
causing peritonitis is the aim of the surgeon, and it is not an easy
matter to accomplish. To cut it away would at once open the peritoneal
cavity, so the mode of treatment now adopted in the rare cases where it
is necessary is that recommended by Dupuytren. The principle of it is to
destroy the éperon by pressure so gradual as to cause adhesive
inflammation between the two surfaces, and thus seal up the cavity of
the peritoneum, before the continuance of the same pressure shall have
caused sloughing of the septum. This is managed by the gradual
approximation by a screw of the blades of a pair of forceps, to which
Dupuytren gave the name Enterotome. The process, which extends over days
and weeks, must be carefully watched lest the inflammation go too far.
Plastic operations are occasionally required to close the opening after
the passage is restored. For a good example of such an operation see
_Edin. Med. Journal_ for August 1873, in which Mr. John Duncan describes
a case.
FOOTNOTES:
[141] _Description of Sir Spencer Wells's Trocar._--"It consists of a
hollow cylinder six inches long, and half an inch in diameter, within
which another cylinder fitting it tightly plays. The inner one is cut
off at its extremity, somewhat in the form of a pen, and is sharp. The
sharp end is kept retracted within the outer cylinder by a spiral spring
in the handle at the other end, but can be protruded by pressing on this
handle when required for use. When thus protruded it is plunged into the
cyst up to its middle; the pressure on the handle is taken off, and the
cutting edge is retracted within its sheath. The fluid rushes into the
tube, and escapes by an aperture in the side, to which an india-rubber
tube is attached, the end of which drops into a bucket under the table.
The instrument is furnished at its middle with two semicircular bars,
carrying each four or five long curved teeth like a vulsellum. These
teeth lie in contact with the outer surface of the cylinder, but can be
raised from it by pressing two handles. When the cyst begins to be
flaccid by the escape of the fluid, these side vulsellums are raised,
and the adjoining part of the cyst is drawn up under the teeth, where it
is firmly caught and compressed against the side of the tube."
[142] For further details on the operations described above, reference
may be made to Sir Spencer Wells's work on ovarian disease, and to the
very valuable papers contributed by Dr. Thomas Keith to the _Edinburgh
Medical Journal_. To the latter especially the author is indebted for
much oral instruction, and for the opportunity of seeing his careful and
dexterous mode of operating.
[143] _Lect. on Surgery_, 3d ed., vol. ii. p. 998.
[144] _Operative Surgery_, p. 462.
[145] Rough diagram of abnormal course of obturator and its relation to
the neck of a hernia. Parts seen from the inside: H, femoral hernia; A,
femoral artery; V, femoral vein; E, epigastric artery; O, obturator from
epigastric (dangerous); S O, obturator from epigastric (safe); N O,
normal course of obturator; I R, internal inguinal ring; Sp C, spermatic
chord and its vessels; G, Gimbernat's ligament; +, in triangle of
Hesselbach.
[146] Holmes's _Surgery_, 3d ed., 1883, vol. ii. p. 837.
[147] _Clinical and Pathological Observations in India_, pp. 44, 325.
[148] Wood _On Rupture_, 1863.
[149] Diagram of an artificial anus, showing small sutures which unite
the edges of the gut and the skin, and the large ones stitching up the
wound beyond.
CHAPTER XII.
OPERATIONS ON PELVIS.
LITHOTOMY.--However interesting and even instructive it might be, any
history of the various operations for the removal of calculi from the
bladder would be quite out of place in a manual such as this. It will be
sufficient here to describe the operations recommended and practised in
the present day.
There are three different situations in which the bladder may be entered
for the purpose of removing a calculus:--
1. The perineum, where access is gained through the urethra, prostate,
and neck of the bladder.
2. Above the pubes, where the portion of bladder not covered by
peritoneum is opened from above.
3. From the rectum.
1. LITHOTOMY THROUGH THE PERINEUM, by far the most frequent position for
the operation.--Very various methods for its performance have been
devised, differing in the nature and shape of the instruments employed,
the direction and size of the incisions, the nature of the wound; but
all resemble each other in certain very cardinal and important
particulars. Thus all agree that it is absolutely necessary to enter the
bladder at _one_ spot--the neck of the bladder; and that to do this
safely the urethra must be opened, and some instrument previously
introduced by the urethra is to be used as a guide for the knife. But an
instrument in the urethra and bladder is surrounded for at least an inch
of its course by the prostate; and thus the knife, gorget, or finger,
which, guided by the instrument in the urethra, is intended to cut or
dilate the entrance to the bladder for the purpose of allowing the
calculus to be removed, cannot do this without also cutting or dilating
this prostate gland. Experience has proved that much of the success of
the operation depends upon the position and amount of incision made in
this prostate gland. But it might be asked, Why can we not enter the
bladder by one side, avoiding altogether its neck and this prostate
gland? For this, among other reasons, that the bladder normally
contains, and so long as the patient lives must contain, a certain
quantity of a very irritating fluid. It is surrounded by the loose
areolar tissue of the pelvis, into which, if any of this fluid escapes,
abcesses will form and death probably ensue; this result will almost
certainly follow any opening made into the bladder except at one spot.
This spot is the neck of the bladder. Why does urinary infiltration not
occur there? Because the fascia of the pelvis (which when entire can
resist infiltration) is prolonged forwards at the neck of the bladder,
over the prostate (Fig. XXXIV. PF), for which it forms a very strong
funnel-like sheath. So long as this sheath is not cut where it covers
the sides of the prostate, urinary infiltration of the pelvis is
impossible, the urine being carried forwards and fairly out of the
pelvis in this urine-tight funnel.
[Illustration: FIG. XXXIV.[150]]
But it may now be said, If this be the case, we are very much limited in
the size of the incision we may make into the bladder. We cannot remove
a large stone, for the prostate ought not to be larger than a good-sized
chestnut, and any cut we might make through a chestnut without cutting
out of its side must be very small. Very true; but fortunately the
sheath of the prostate, unlike the rind of the chestnut, is very freely
dilatable, and will allow the passage of a very considerable stone.
Again, an inquirer might ask, If it is so dilatable, why should we run
the risk of cutting the prostate at all? Why should we not introduce
instruments gradually increasing in size into the membranous portion of
the urethra, and thus dilate prostate and neck of bladder? For this
reason, that the urethral canal passing through the prostate is itself
lined immediately outside of the mucous membrane by a firm membranous
sheath (Fig. XXXIV. RR), which resists dilatation to the utmost.
Experience tells us that any attempts to dilate or even forcibly to tear
this ring of fibrous texture are both ineffectual and dangerous, while a
clean cut into it and through it into the substance of the prostate is
at once effectual and comparatively safe.
In a word, we can describe the relation of the prostate to the operation
of lithotomy somewhat in this manner:--Its fibrous sheath surrounding
the urethra must be cut freely. The gland substance may be cut and
freely dilated by the finger. Its fibrous envelope must, as far as
possible, be preserved intact, but this interferes the less with the
operation, as it is comparatively freely dilatable.
The firm lining of the urethra, which must be cut, is specially strong
at its base, forming a tough resisting band just at the aperture of the
bladder, which, unfortunately, is often so high up in the pelvis in
tall patients, or in cases in which the prostate is much enlarged, as to
be almost out of reach of the finger, and so far up the staff as perhaps
to escape division. You will be warned of such an occurrence by the
urine in the bladder failing to make its appearance; and if any attempt
be made to dilate the opening and introduce the forceps without further
incision of the base of the prostate, the result will very likely be
fatal, generally from pyæmic symptoms depending on a suppurative
inflammation of the prostatic plexus of veins (Fig. XXXIV.). In fact,
upon a recognition of this fact is founded the aphorism, "that cases in
which the forceps have been introduced before the bladder fairly begins
to empty its contents are generally fatal."
[Illustration: FIG. XXXV.[151]]
We have thus traced the necessary guiding principles as to our incisions
from the bladder outwards through the prostatic portion of the urethra.
We have next to discover what sort of an opening is necessary in the
membranous portion of the urethra consistent with the fulfilment of the
same conditions, namely, freedom of escape for the urine, and room
enough to remove the stone. Both of these are gained at once by a free
incision of the membranous portion, dividing especially those anterior
fibres of the great sphincter muscle of the pelvis, the levator ani,
which embrace the membranous portion, under the special names of
compressor (Fig. XXV.) and levator urethræ (Guthrie's and Wilson's
muscles).
The principles which guide the position and size of the preliminary
incisions which enable the urethra to be opened are very simple:--(1.)
The wound in the perineum should be large enough to give free access to
the urethra, and easy egress to the stone; (2.) It should be conical,
with its base outwards, so as to favour escape of urine and prevent
infiltration; (3.) It should not wound any important organ or vessel;
that is, it must avoid the rectum, the corpus spongiosum, especially the
bulb, if possible, the artery of the bulb, and in every case should
leave the pudic artery intact.
So far for broad general principles, which must guide all methods of
successful lithotomy.
THE LATERAL OPERATION.--_Operation of Cheselden._--(1.) _Instruments
required._--A staff with a broad substantial handle, and a longer curve
than the ordinary catheter requires, furnished with a very deep and wide
groove, which occupies the space midway between its convexity and its
left side. The one used should invariably be large enough to dilate
fully the urethra.
A knife, with its blade three or four inches in length, but sharp only
for an inch and a half from its point, its back straight up to within a
sixth of an inch of its point, and there deflected at an angle to the
point, which again curves to the edge. The angle from the back to the
point permits the knife to run more freely along the groove in the
staff.
A probe-pointed straight knife with a narrow blade may occasionally be
useful in enlarging the incision in the prostate, when this is required
by the size of the stone.
Forceps of various sizes and shapes, some with the blades curved at an
angle to reach stones lying behind an enlarged prostate, all with broad
blades as thin as is consistent with perfect inflexibility, the blades
hollowed and roughened in the inside, but without the projecting teeth
sometimes recommended, which are dangerous from being apt to break the
stone.
A scoop to remove fragments or small stones, sometimes useful with the
aid of the forefinger in lifting out a large one.
A flexible tube of at least half an inch calibre, and about six inches
long, rounded off and fenestrated above, fitted at its outer end with a
ring and two eyelet-holes for the tapes, with which it is tied into the
bladder.
Prior to the operation the patient's health should be attended to, the
stomach and bowels regulated, and any disorder of the kidneys or bladder
as far as possible alleviated. If his health has been good and habits
active, three or four days' confinement to his room on low diet, with a
full purge the evening before the operation, is all the preparatory
treatment that is necessary.
It is of the utmost importance for the safety of the operation and the
patient's comfort after it, that the rectum be completely unloaded
before the operation, and the bowels so far emptied as to permit three
or four days after the operation to elapse without any movement of the
bowels being necessary. If there is any doubt as to the effect of the
laxative, a large stimulant enema should be administered on the morning
of the operation.
_Position._--Much depends on the proper tying up of the patient. He
should be placed with his breech projecting over the edge of a narrow
table, with head slightly raised on a pillow, but the shoulders low. The
hands are then to be secured each to its corresponding foot, by a strong
bandage passing round wrist and instep, or by suitable leather anklets,
the knees should be wide apart, and on exactly the same level, so that
the pelvis may be quite straight. An assistant should be placed to take
charge of each leg.
The staff is next introduced and the stone felt; if there is little
water in the bladder a few ounces may be injected, but this is rarely
necessary, for the patient should be ordered to retain as much water as
possible, and when he cannot retain it, injection of water may do harm,
and will probably not be retained, but at once come away along the
groove in the staff. The staff is then committed to a special assistant,
who must be thoroughly up to his duty, and attend to the staff alone.
Some surgeons direct the assistant to make the convexity of the staff
bulge in the perineum, to enable the groove to be struck more easily. It
will be, however, safer both for the rectum and the bulb, if the staff
be hooked firmly up against the symphysis pubis, as advised by Liston.
The same assistant can also keep the scrotum up out of the way.
If the perineum has not been previously shaved, this is now done.
The operator sits down on a low stool in front of the patient's
breech, his instruments being ready to his hand, and then steadying
the skin of the perineum with the fingers of his left hand, enters
the point of the knife in the raphe of the perineum, midway between
the anus and scrotum (one inch in front of anus--_Cheselden_,
_Crichton_; one and a quarter--_Gross_, _Skey_, and _Brodie_; one
and three-quarters--_Fergusson_; one inch behind the scrotum--_Liston_),
and carries the incision obliquely downwards and outwards, in a line
midway between the anus and tuberosity of the ischium. The length of the
incision must vary with the size of the perineum, and the supposed size
of the stone, but there is less risk in its being too large, so long as
the rectum is safe, than in its being too small. Its depth should be
greatest at its upper angle, where it has to divide the parts to the
depth of the transverse muscle of the perineum, and least at its lower
angle, where a deep incision is not required, and would be almost sure
to wound the rectum.
The forefinger of the left hand is now to be deeply inserted into the
wound, and any remaining fibres of the levator ani in front are to be
divided, the edge of the knife being directed from above downwards. The
left forefinger being still used to push its way through the cellular
tissue, the groove in the staff is now felt in the membranous portion of
the urethra covered by the deep fascia of the perineum. Now comes the
deeper part of the incision. Guided by the finger-nail of the left hand,
the surgeon introduces the point of the knife into the groove of the
staff. He then takes hold of the staff for a moment to feel that it is
held up properly against the pubis, and in the middle line, and also
that the knife is fairly in the groove. Giving the staff back again to
the assistant, and keeping the rectum well out of the way by the left
hand, he now steadily directs the knife along the groove of the staff
till the bladder is fairly entered, and the ring at the base of the
prostate completely divided. When this is the case a gush of urine takes
place, following the withdrawal of the knife.
When making the deep incision, and in the groove of the staff, the blade
of the knife should lie neither vertical nor horizontal, but midway
between the two, so as to make the section of the left lobe of the
prostate in its longest diameter, that is, in a direction downwards and
backwards (Fig. XXXIV. L).
The knife is now withdrawn, and the left forefinger inserted. In most
cases it will be long enough to reach the bladder and touch the stone,
and may then be freely used by gradual pressure to dilate the wound;
this may be done very freely when necessary for a large stone, if only
the ring of fibrous tissue surrounding the urethra be first cut and the
bladder fairly entered. Whenever the stone is felt by the finger, the
assistant may withdraw the staff.
When the operator has thus felt the stone and sufficiently dilated the
wound, the next step is to introduce the forceps; this should be done
under the guidance of the finger, and with the blades closed. When the
stone is felt the blades should be opened very widely, slightly
withdrawn, and then pushed in again, the lower one, if possible, being
insinuated under the stone. The blades must be made fairly to grasp and
contain the stone in their hollow, for if they only nibble at the end of
an oval stone, extraction is impossible. Extraction should then be
performed slowly, with alternate wrigglings of the forceps from side to
side, so as gradually to dilate, not to tear, the prostate, and the
operator must remember to pull in the axis of the pelvis, not against
the os pubis or the promontory of the sacrum.
If there is much resistance, it may possibly be caused by the stone
having been caught in its longer axis, and this may be remedied by
careful manipulation by means of the finger and forceps. If the stone is
still too large to be extracted without greater force than is
warrantable, there are still various expedients (see _infra_, pp. 265,
270).
In most cases, however, the stone is removed rapidly enough by the
single incision. The finger, or a sound, must then be introduced to feel
if any more stones are present. The closed forceps make a very effectual
instrument for this purpose. Much information may be gained from the
appearance of the first stone, the presence or absence of facets. Its
smoothness or roughness enables us to form a pretty certain opinion; yet
the bladder should always be carefully searched; and if the stone has
been friable or broken in extraction, should be washed out by a current
of water. Where the calculi are very numerous, or where many fragments
have separated, the scoop will be found useful, both for detecting and
removing them. All the stones being extracted, there is in most cases
little or no bleeding (see _infra_, Hæmorrhage). The tube already
described may now be inserted and tied into the bladder. It may be
retained for forty-eight or seventy-two hours, according to
circumstances. Care must be taken lest it be closed up by coagula during
the first hour or two after the operation. In children the tube is not
necessary, and from their restlessness might possibly do harm, but in
adults (though neglected by some surgeons) experience shows it is a
valuable adjunct in the after-treatment.
Having thus traced the course of an ordinary uncomplicated case of
lithotomy by the lateral operation, a brief notice is suitable of some
of the obstacles and difficulties, some of the dangers and bad results
which may be met with, and the best methods of overcoming them.
1. _Large size of the stone_, as an obstacle to extraction. When, either
from the enormous size of the stone, generally to be made out before the
operation, or from some congenital or acquired deformity of the pelvis,
it is obvious beforehand that the calculus cannot pass through the bony
pelvis entire, a choice of two courses remains, either--
(1.) The high or supra-pubic operation (_q.v. infra_); or (2.) Crushing
of the calculus in the bladder, and removal piecemeal. Instruments of
great strength have been devised for this latter operation. The risk to
the bladder is very great, and fragments are apt to be left behind;
these are sure to form nuclei of new calculi.
2. _Peculiarities in the position or relations of the stone_ in the
bladder:--
(1.) It may lie in a sort of pouch behind the prostate, and thus be out
of the reach of the forceps. This may be remedied by the use of curved
forceps, or, better still, by the finger in the rectum to tilt up the
stone into the bladder.
(2.) It may lie above the pubis in the anterior wall of the bladder.
Pressure on the hypogastrium, or the use of a strong probe as a hook,
will generally suffice to dislodge it.
(3.) The stone may be encysted. This is extremely rare, and, as
Fergusson says, we hear more of these from bunglers who have operated
only several times, than from those who have had large experience.
3. _An enlarged prostate_ is at once a source of difficulty and of some
danger.
The distance of the bladder from the surface may be so very much
increased by enlargement of the prostate as to render even the longest
forefinger too short to reach the stone or even the bladder. This
renders the introduction of the forceps more difficult and uncertain,
the dilatation more prolonged, and the extraction more dangerous. If
very large, the groove of the staff may not reach the bladder, and thus
the deep incision may fail of cutting the ring at the base of the gland,
and the urine may thus not escape, and all the dangers of laceration of
the ring may result. Such cases may be well managed by the insertion of
a straight deeply grooved staff into the insufficient incision, and
fairly into the bladder, and on this, pushing a cutting gorget through
the uncut portion of the gland. This insures a sufficient yet not
dangerous incision, which we cannot so safely perform with the knife, as
the parts are so far beyond the reach of the guiding forefinger.
Under the head of risks after lithotomy we may class the following:--
1. Sinking, or shock. In the very aged or very young, or after a very
prolonged or painful operation, shock may now and then kill the patient
within a few hours. Since the days of chloroform this result is
extremely rare.
2. Hæmorrhage seems to be a very infrequent risk. The transverse
perineal artery, which is always cut in the operation, is small, and
rarely bleeds much. If the bulb is wounded, as no doubt frequently
occurs, the flow from it can easily be checked. The pudic is so well
protected from any ordinary incision as to be practically safe; and if
wounded by some frightfully extensive incision, it can be compressed
against the tuberosity of the ischium.
There is an abnormal distribution of the dorsal artery of the penis, in
which, rising higher up than it ought, and coursing along the neck of
the bladder, and the lateral lobe of the prostate, it may be divided.
This may give trouble, and even result in fatal hæmorrhage. Fortunately
it is rare. The author has met with one case in a boy of eleven, in whom
a very severe hæmorrhage was not to be explained. The patient recovered
without another bad symptom.
Again, a general oozing may often appear a few hours after the
operation, when the patient is warm in bed, apparently from the
substance of the prostate. If raising the breech and the application of
cold fail to arrest it, it may be necessary to plug the wound. This is
done by stuffing it with long strips of lint round the tube. Great care
must be then taken lest the tube become occluded.
3. Infiltration of urine may occur as a result of a too free incision of
the vesical fascia (in adults), and still more frequently of a too small
external wound.
Here it should be noticed that in children it is fortunately of very
little consequence to preserve the integrity of the prostatic sheath of
vesical fascia. In them the prostate is so exceedingly small and
undeveloped, that even the forefinger could not be introduced into the
bladder without a complete section of the prostate. Probably from the
blander nature of their urine, and the greater vitality of their
tissues, this is of less consequence, as it is rarely found that any bad
effects result from this section.
Among other risks we find peritonitis, inflammation of neck of bladder,
inflammation of prostatic plexus of veins, resulting in pyæmia,
suppression of urine, and other kidney complications. For the symptoms
and treatment of these there is no place in a mere manual of surgical
operations.
_Wound of rectum and recto-vesical fistula._--Such wounds were not
uncommon, and in many cases unavoidable, before the days of chloroform,
from the struggles of the patient; now they are comparatively rare, and
should be still rarer. They probably occur in more cases than the
surgeon is aware of, and heal up without his knowledge; we may arrive at
this conclusion from the fact that small wounds are found in
_post-mortem_ examinations of cases in which no such complication has
been thought of.
They occasionally heal without giving any trouble, but, at other times,
as the external wound contracts, a communication forms between rectum
and the urethra, in which the contents are apt to be interchanged in a
most disagreeable manner, flatus passing per urethram, and urine per
rectum.
When it is evidently not going to heal spontaneously, the septum between
the external orifice of the wound and the communication with the gut
should be laid open, as in the operation for fistula _in ano_.
There are certain modifications and varieties in the method of
operating for stone through the perineum, which deserve at least a
brief notice:--
1. _The bilateral operation._--Though he was not the inventor,
Dupuytren's name is justly associated with this operation. The
principle of it is to divide both sides of the prostate equally, so
as to give more room for extraction of a large stone, without the
necessity of much laceration, or the risk of cutting through the
prostatic sheath of fascia.
_The operation._--A semilunar incision is made transversely across
the perineum, extending from a point midway between the right tuber
ischii and the anus, upwards, crossing the raphe nearly an inch
above the anus, and then curving downwards to a corresponding point
on the opposite side. The skin, superficial fascia, and a few of
the anterior fibres of the external sphincter, are thus divided,
and the groove of the staff sought by the forefinger. The
membranous portion of the urethra is then laid open in the middle
line, and the beak of a double lithotome caché securely lodged in
the groove. It is then pushed into the bladder with its concavity
upwards, and when fairly in it is turned round, its blades
protruded to the required extent, and withdrawn with its concavity
downwards, thus dividing both lobes of the prostate in a direction
downwards and outwards (Fig. XXIV. D D). The operation is finished
in the usual manner. Though it is a comparatively easy operation,
and theoretically may be proved to have many advantages, experience
has shown that the results are not so favourable as those of the
ordinary lateral operation.
2. _Buchanan's medio-lateral operation_ on a rectangular
staff.--The staff is bent at a right angle three inches from the
end, and deeply grooved on its left side. This is introduced into
the urethra so that the angle projects the membranous portion of
the urethra close to the apex of the prostate and the terminal
straight portion enters the bladder parallel to the rectum. The
angle projects in the perineum, so that the operator with his left
forefinger in the rectum is enabled, by a stab with a long straight
bistoury (held horizontally and with the cutting edge to the left
side), at once to enter the groove, and, by following the groove,
the bladder. Whenever the escape of urine shows that the bladder is
fairly reached, the knife is withdrawn so as to make a lateral
section of the prostate, and then, with the finger still in the
rectum, to make an incision in the ischio-rectal fossa, of
sufficient size to allow the stone to be easily withdrawn.
The inventor claims for this method that it is easier, that there
is less risk of hæmorrhage, wound of the rectum, and infiltration
of urine.
3. _Allarton's operation of median lithotomy_ suits admirably for
stones known to be small, but is quite unsuitable for large ones.
Probably in most cases it should be superseded by lithotrity.
_Operation._--A large curved staff with a central groove is to be
held firmly hooked up against the symphysis pubis, and then
steadied by the left forefinger in the rectum. The operator pierces
the raphe of the perineum with a long straight bistoury about half
an inch above the verge of the anus, enters the groove of the
staff, and cuts inwards, almost, but not quite, into the bladder.
In withdrawing the knife the wound in the urethra is enlarged
upwards towards the scrotum. A ball-pointed probe is then passed on
the staff into the bladder, the staff is withdrawn, and the finger,
guided by the probe, is used to dilate the neck of the bladder, to
an extent sufficient for the removal of the stone by a small pair
of forceps.
In this operation the prostate is hardly incised at all. The
results are not better than those of the lateral operation.
2. LITHOTOMY ABOVE THE PUBES, _or the High Operation_.--In cases where,
from the known size of the stone, or from the deformity of the bones of
the pelvis, it is impossible that the stone can be extracted entire in
the usual manner; in cases where the prostate is very much enlarged, or
where there is any real or supposed likelihood of inflammation of the
neck of the bladder, the supra-pubic operation _may_ be warrantable. Its
performance is easy, it does not involve any wound of the peritoneum if
properly performed, and there is no risk of hæmorrhage. There are
certainly great risks attending it of peritonitis and urinary
infiltration.
In more than one case this operation has been attended by wound of
peritoneum and subsequent escape of intestines through the wound, even
when dressed antiseptically and performed under spray.
_Operation._--The patient lies on his back, with his head and shoulders
slightly raised, so as to relax the abdominal muscles, and his legs
hanging down over the edge of the table. If his bladder can bear it, it
should be fully distended, either by voluntary retention of the urine,
or by injection with tepid water. A vertical incision is then made in
the middle line, separating the recti muscles from below upwards, care
being taken to push the peritoneum well out of the way, which is easily
done by the finger in the loose cellular tissue of the part. The
anterior wall of the bladder is then exposed, uncovered by peritoneum;
it must be opened with great care, also in the middle line, while the
wound in the parietes is held aside by retractors. The wall of the
bladder should be transfixed by a curved needle, and thus held in
position before it is opened. The stone is then removed by a pair of
straight forceps, generally with great ease. Attempts used to be made to
leave a catheter or canula in the bladder wound to prevent infiltration.
Probably the safest method now will be to close the bladder wound at
once by metallic stitches, and stitching the abdominal wound carefully
with deeply entered wires, to leave the patient on his back. When
compared with the lateral operations the statistics of the supra-pubic
operation are discouraging, the mortality being one in three and a half
to one in four. But in cases where the stone is known to be very large
and of firm consistence, the risks are probably less from this method
than from lateral lithotomy, followed by efforts to crush the stone
through the wound prior to its removal.
The late Mr. George Bell, a most successful lithotomist, proposed to
perform this operation in two stages. In a case of greatly enlarged
prostate, where the bladder had been punctured above the pubes by a
country surgeon for retention of urine, he dilated the track of the
canula by means of sponge-tents gradually increased in size, and then
succeeded in extracting through the dilated opening several large
calculi. The case recovered, and may encourage similar attempts.
3. OPERATIONS THROUGH THE RECTUM.--(_a._) _Sanson's Recto-vesical
Operation._--The principle of this operation consisted in laying the two
canals, the rectum and the urethra, into one. A large staff, grooved on
its convexity, being inserted into the urethra, the operator, with the
forefinger of his left hand in the rectum as a guide to the knife,
pierces the anterior wall of the rectum, reaches the groove of the staff
just in front of the prostate, and cutting outwards divides the rectum,
the anterior fibres of levator ani, and the sphincter, as well as the
skin of the perineum in the middle line. Entering the knife again into
the groove of the staff, it is to be pushed right onwards into the
bladder, dividing the prostate, and avoiding if possible the seminal
vesicles and ducts; the stone is then very easily removed.
Though this operation was supposed to lessen the risk of pelvic
infiltration it is _not_ found to do so, and it adds the additional
inconvenience of almost inevitable rectal fistula, through which the
urine escapes. It is certainly a very easy operation, but the mortality
is found to be greater than in the ordinary lateral operation.
(_b._) _Lithotomy through the rectum above the prostate._--The presence
of a small portion of bladder beyond the prostate in close relation to
the rectum renders it possible, in cases where the prostate is not
enlarged, to enter the bladder and remove a stone of moderate size,
without interfering with the peritoneum, prostate, or neck of the
bladder.
This ingenious but difficult operation was performed for the first time
by Drs. Sims and Bauer in 1859.
I quote the brief notice of the operation by Dr. Sims from the _Lancet_
of 1864 (vol. i. p. 111):--
"The patient was placed on the left side, and my speculum was introduced
into the rectum, exposing the anterior wall of the rectum, just as it
would the vagina in the female. A sound was passed into the bladder. The
doctor entered the blade of a bistoury in the triangular space bounded
by the prostate, the vesiculæ seminales, and the peritoneal
reduplication. He passed the finger through this opening, felt the
stone, and removed it with the forceps without the least trouble. The
operation was done as quickly and as easily as it would have been in a
female through the vaginal septum. After the removal of the stone, Dr.
Bauer kindly asked me to close the wound with silver sutures, which I
did, introducing some five or six wires, with the same facility as in
the vagina. There was no leakage of urine. The patient recovered without
the least trouble of any sort. The wires were removed on the eighth day,
and on the ninth day the patient rode in a carriage with Dr. Bauer a
distance of four or five miles, to call on, and report himself to, our
distinguished countryman, Dr. Mott."
The chief risks in this operation seem to be the chance of wounding the
peritoneal _cul-de-sac_, as the amount of free space between it and the
prostate seems to vary much in individuals and in races. Dr. Marion Sims
mentioned to me in conversation that he believed this operation
impossible in the negro race, from the greater projection downwards of
the peritoneal reduplication. An enlarged prostate would be an
insuperable objection. The use of silver wire, to close up the wound at
once, diminishes very much any risk of recto-vesical fistula.
LITHOTRITY OR LITHOTRIPSY.--There exist cases of stone in the bladder,
which, under certain conditions, may be relieved without lithotomy, by
an operation which crushes the stone into fragments small enough to be
discharged through the urethra.
To enter with any fulness into the history, literature, and varieties of
this operation, and the instruments required, would in itself require a
large volume. Suffice it here to describe the case suitable for the
operation, the essentials required in the instrument, and the method of
performance.
1. _For a case to be suitable_ the _stone_ should not be too large, and
especially not too hard, also there should not be too many of them.
The _urethra_ should be capacious enough to let the instrument pass
easily and painlessly.
The _bladder_ should be large enough to contain four ounces of water at
least, should not be much inflamed, and, on the other hand, should not
be paralysed. Paralysis or want of tone in the bladder prevents the
thorough evacuation of its contents, and still more the expulsion of the
fragments of stone.
2. _A good instrument_ should, as far as possible, combine strength with
lightness. The curved portion of the fixed blade should be fenestrated
to allow escape of the fragments and thorough closure of the
instrument.
The movable blade must be so arranged as to combine perfect ease of
movement up and down in seeking for the stone, with a powerful, slow,
and gradual approximation in crushing it. This can be managed by an
ingenious arrangement, which leaves the movable blade under the control
only of the operator's thumb till the stone is found, and yet, by
touching a spring, gives him the advantage either of a fine screw or of
a rack and pinion movement for crushing the stone.
3. _Operation._--The patient being prepared by a free evacuation of the
bowels, and the urethra having been previously fairly dilated, he is
asked to retain his urine as long as possible, or, if he cannot do so, a
few ounces of tepid water may be injected per urethram.
He is then laid on a sofa or table, the breech being well raised by
pillows, the shoulders low, the thighs and knees bent up and separated.
The instrument, well warmed and oiled, is then introduced with the
blades closed. When fairly into the bladder the search for the stone
begins.
There are differences of opinion regarding the best method of fishing
for the stone; great patience and gentleness, with a thorough previous
acquaintance with bladder manipulation, are required, whichever method
be chosen.
The two chief methods may be described as the English and the French,
the latter, Civiale's, being now used by Sir Henry Thompson, and other
English operators. Briefly, the two are:--
(1.) _Heurteloup's and Sir B. C. Brodie's._--In this, after the
instrument is fairly entered, its handle is elevated, thus depressing
the curved extremity, the forceps are then opened, and, by being kept as
low as possible in the bladder, it is hoped that the calculus will fall
into the opened blades by its own weight. In this method the fundus is
the scene of crushing, and there is a risk of injuring the sensitive
neck of the bladder, especially at the moment of opening the blades.
(2.) _Civiale's--Thompson's._--In this the pelvis is to be so elevated
that the centre of the bladder and space beneath it give plenty of room
for seizing the stone, and all contact with the wall of the bladder is
(as far as possible) avoided.
The instrument is introduced closed, and carried fairly away in to the
posterior part of the bladder before it is opened at all. It probably
grazes the stone in passing, and, if so, is directed to the side of the
bladder in which the stone is _not_ lying. Then when nearly touching the
posterior wall, the movable blade is withdrawn, the instrument inclined
towards the stone lying unmoved in the most dependent part, and there
seizes it generally with ease.
If not felt, the blades are again to be opened, turned a little to the
other side of the bladder, and then closed. Sir H. Thompson lays the
greatest stress on the importance of always having the blades fairly
opened before shifting their position, for if moved when closed, the
very opening of the movable blade is certain to drive the stone out of
the way and prevent its seizure.
Certain rules are useful:--Move the axis of the instrument as little as
possible; it should be kept in the centre of the bladder, so far in,
that the movements of the male blade are quite free from the neck of the
bladder and prostate, and the blades only should be moved in the bladder
on the centre of the shaft as an axis. There should be no jerking once
the stone is caught, and the crushing should be done as far as possible
in the very centre of the bladder, the blades not touching any of the
walls.
After the stone is seized, do not crush till, by a turn of the blades
from side to side, you discover that none of the mucous membrane of the
bladder is caught in the instrument.
The lithotrite is not meant to extract stones, but to crush them, hence
never attempt to withdraw it unless the blades are in absolute
apposition.
Never attempt too much at one time. Sir H. Thompson holds that five
minutes is the longest time that should be given, perhaps in most cases
three minutes being long enough.
While many surgeons will still agree with the above advice, Dr. Bigelow
of Boston has lately been highly commending a method which he has called
Litholapaxy, in which, at one sitting under chloroform, the stone is
crushed and aspirated, or sucked out of the bladder at once.[152]
Since the above was written the operation of Litholapaxy has made
great strides in the favour of surgeons, and many stones that would
have been removed by lithotomy are now broken down by powerful
instruments at a single sitting, and removed piecemeal by the
suction apparatus.
S. W. Gross has collected 312 cases, of which 17 died or 5.45 per
cent., but of 180 done by experienced surgeons, Thompson, Bigelow,
Van Buren, Weir, and Stevenson only five died, or 3.33 per cent.,
while of 1470 cases of lithotrity, as formerly practised, 159, or
10.81, per cent. died.[153]
OPERATIONS FOR STRICTURE OF URETHRA.--Under this head many manipulations
and operations might be described; the very instruments devised being
exceedingly numerous and complicated. Enough here to detail a few of the
more simple and practical procedures under the different heads of--1.
_Dilatation_ gradual and forced. 2. _Internal Division._ 3. _External
Division._
1. DILATATION.--Under this head we have--
_a._ _Vital dilatation._--The passing of a succession of bougies,
gradually increasing in diameter, at intervals of three or four days,
for the purpose of exciting an amount of interstitial absorption in the
new material constituting the stricture, sufficient to remove it.
Passing a bougie, though certainly often very difficult, perhaps should
hardly come into the category of surgical operations, yet to preserve a
certain completeness in the account of stricture, a very brief
description may be here inserted.
The recumbent posture is in most cases to be preferred. The patient
should lie flat on his back, with the knees slightly bent and separated,
and the head and shoulders slightly raised on a pillow. The operator
standing on the patient's left side, raises the penis in his left hand,
and with the right introduces the instrument, previously warmed and
oiled, into the meatus. He then pushes it very gently onwards, at the
same time stretching the penis with the left hand, just so far as to
efface any wrinkles in the mucous membrane, till the point reaches the
bulbous portion. The axis of the instrument, which at first for
convenience was over the left groin, has now gradually been approaching
the middle line. When this is reached, the instrument should be raised
from the abdomen, and the handle cautiously carried in the arc of a
circle first upwards and then downwards, till, when the instrument is
fairly into the bladder, the handle is depressed between the patient's
thighs. While this is being done the operator's left hand should be
withdrawn from the penis, and the points of the fingers applied to the
perineum.
In cases of difficulty certain points may be remembered:--
(1.) That the point of the instrument may in the first inch or two be
occasionally entangled in a lacuna in the roof, especially when a small
instrument is used; hence the beak should be at first maintained against
the inferior wall of the canal.[154]
(2.) That the handle should not be depressed too soon; if it is, there
is a risk of a false passage being made through the upper wall.
(3.) The opposite error may force the point out of the urethra between
the membranous portion and the rectum, and onwards into the substance of
the prostate gland.
And certain cautions may be given:--
(1.) In every exploration of an unknown urethra the surgeon should
commence with an instrument of medium size, certainly not less than No.
7 or 8.
(2.) In cases of difficulty occurring in the urethra behind the scrotum,
invariably use the forefinger of the left hand in the rectum as a guide.
(3.) Expression of pain on the part of the patient is no indication that
a false passage is being made, nor its absence that the instrument is in
the passage, for it is a remark of Mr. Syme, that passing an instrument
through a stricture is generally more painful than making a false
passage through the walls of the urethra.
An instrument may be passed, while the patient is erect, with the
following precautions:--The patient should stand with his back
against a wall, his arms supported on the back of a chair on each
side, heels eight or ten inches apart, and four or five inches from
the wall; his clothes thoroughly down, not merely opened. The
bougie should then be held nearly horizontal, with its concavity
over the left groin of the patient, the penis being raised in the
surgeon's left hand. Introduced thus for four or five inches, the
handle is gradually raised into the middle line of the abdomen, and
to the perpendicular; it is then to be lightly depressed, and, as
the point enters the bladder, brought down towards the operator
until it sinks beneath the horizontal line.
_b._ _Mechanical dilatation_ is of two kinds, both very rarely
used:--(1.) When an instrument cannot be passed, it consists of passing
down day after day the point of an instrument (sometimes armed with
caustic, sometimes not), and pressing it against the stricture till it
is overcome.[155] (2.) When an instrument is introduced through an
intractable stricture, and is left there either for some hours, or for
some days, to excite what is called "suppuration" of the stricture.[156]
_c._ _Forced dilatation._--Under this head we might describe at great
length mechanical contrivances to force or rupture a stricture. A word
or two on a few of the most important:--
(1.) Conical bougies of steel or silver.
(2.) Mr. Wakley's method, on which many others have been founded. He
passed a small bougie or wire into the bladder, over which were slipped
straight tubes of varying size, with perfect certainty that they could
not leave the urethra.
(3.) Mr. Holt's method.[157]--The principle of it is to rupture the
stricture at once, so that a No. 12 catheter can immediately be passed
into the bladder.
He attains this object by means of an instrument composed of two grooved
blades, united about one inch from their apex, into a conical sound,
which at its apex is about the size of a No. 2 bougie. This is passed
into the bladder, and the grooved blades are separated to any extent
that is desired by passing down between them a straight rod equal in
size of a No. 8, 10, or 12, bougie. To guide this properly it is made
hollow, and it is passed down over a central wire which lies between the
grooved blades of the instrument and is welded to the apex. A great
improvement is effected on Mr. Holt's later instruments by this wire
being made hollow, and fitted with a stilette, for by this means we can
with certainty ascertain whether or not the instrument has been passed
into the bladder. This instrument, which is an improvement upon one
invented by Perrève nearly forty years ago, has been used on very many
occasions by Mr. Holt and others with success. The risk to life, if the
case be properly managed, is trifling, but, like every other means of
treating stricture, it has the objection that the stricture is liable to
recur, unless bougies be passed at intervals for months and years.
Sir Henry Thompson has introduced and described another very ingenious
instrument for the same purpose, constructed on somewhat similar
principles. His account of it, to which I must refer, will be found in
Holmes's _System of Surgery_, 1st ed. vol. iv. p. 399.
2. INTERNAL DIVISION OF STRICTURE is a mode of treatment which by many
surgeons is highly disapproved, yet of late years it has been more used
than formerly, especially in resilient strictures. It may be done in two
ways:--
(1.) _From before backwards._--This method, to be at all admissible,
requires a guide to be previously passed; a lancet-shaped blade may then
be slipped down a groove in this guide till the stricture is divided.
This is least objectionable in cases of stricture close to the meatus.
(2.) _From behind forwards._--To make the incision thus, it is of course
necessary that the stricture should be so far dilatable as to admit an
instrument the point of which is large enough to contain the blade by
which the stricture is to be divided. This will be found to be at least
equal in size to a No. 3 or No. 4 catheter. In many instruments it is
much larger.
_Civiale's_ instrument for internal incision of the urethra from behind
forwards has the very high recommendation of Sir H. Thompson.[158] It
consists of a sound with a bulbous extremity (as large as a No. 5
bougie) which contains a small blade, which can be made to project for
such a distance as the operator wishes. It is passed through the
stricture with the blade concealed, till the bulb is carried about
one-third of an inch or more beyond the stricture; the blade is then
projected, and the incision made by drawing it slowly but firmly
outwards towards the meatus, with the blade towards the floor of the
urethra, till the stricture is divided in its whole extent. Sir H.
Thompson recommends this to be used in cases _where it is not that the
stricture is of very small calibre, but that it is undilatable_, that
prevents the cure. Many modifications of above have been devised by
Lund, Teevan, and other surgeons, on similar principles.
3. MR. SYME'S OPERATION OF EXTERNAL DIVISION.--Mr. Syme held that no
stricture through which the water can escape should be called
_impermeable_, for by patience and care the surgeon should always be
able to pass a slender director through the stricture on which it may be
divided with ease and certainty. The old operation of "perineal section"
for so-called impermeable stricture is very different, being difficult,
dangerous, and uncertain in its results.
_Operation._--A director is passed into the stricture. Mr. Syme's
directors are of different sizes, the smallest being in diameter less
than an ordinary surgical probe. They are made of steel, are grooved on
the convexity, and have this peculiarity, that while the lower half is
small, the upper is of full size (No. 8 or 10), the difference in
calibre occurring quite abruptly. The presence of this "shoulder" on the
staff enables the operator to ascertain exactly the position of the
stricture, and also to tell when it is fully divided without the
necessity of withdrawing the instrument.
This being fairly in the stricture, the patient is put in the position
for lithotomy, an assistant holds the staff in his right hand, drawing
up the scrotum with his left.
The surgeon then makes an incision in the middle line over the
stricture for the necessary distance, from above downwards, till he
exposes the urethra, and feels exactly the shoulder of the staff. Care
must be taken not to go past the urethra at either side. When he
distinctly feels the outline of the staff, he takes it in his left hand,
and a short sharp-pointed bistoury in his right. It should be held
firmly in the palm of the hand, with the back of the blade resting on
the forefinger, the pulp of which guides the point to the groove, and
guards it when making the incision; the knife is to be placed on the
groove beyond (_on the bladder side_) of the stricture, and brought
forwards, slowly cutting through _the whole_ stricture; till the
shoulder of the staff is reached. It requires strength and precision to
divide thoroughly the indurated stricture, which is apt to elude the
knife.
The shoulder of the staff can now be passed through the stricture if the
operation is complete; if not, the incision must be extended, always in
the middle line, and guided by the groove. When thoroughly divided, the
staff is now to be withdrawn, and a full-sized catheter with a double
curve passed into the bladder. This should _not_ be furnished with a
stop-cock or plug, lest the bladder should by inadvertence be allowed to
be too full, and extravasation into the cellular tissue of the urethra
take place along the side of the instrument.
The catheter should be tied in, and left for two, sometimes for three
days, when it can generally be removed with safety, and a bougie should
be passed at intervals of three or four, till the wound is healed. To
prevent recurrence of the stricture, it is a wise precaution to pass an
instrument at intervals for many months after the cure is apparently
complete.
In certain cases, where the stricture is far back and the urinary
symptoms severe, Mr. Syme found advantage from the introduction of a
shorter double-curved catheter (only about nine inches long) through
the wound into the bladder, where it should be left for three days.
This seems to diminish the risk of rigors, and other symptoms of fever,
which are apt to occur when the urine is allowed for the first time to
pass over the wound.
_Perineal Section_ is an operation both dangerous and difficult; as Sir
Astley Cooper used to say, "the surgeon who performs it requires to have
a long summer's day before him."
No director or guide can be passed. A full-sized catheter must be passed
as far as possible _up_ to the stricture, and held firmly in the middle
line. The patient must be tied up in lithotomy position on a table in
the very best light that can be obtained. The perineum being shaved, an
incision must be made in the middle line from over the point of the
catheter to the verge of the anus, if the stricture extends far back.
The urethra should then be opened over the catheter, the edges of the
mucous membrane held to each side by silk threads passed through them;
and the surgeon must endeavour to pass a fine probe into the opening of
the stricture; if this can be done, it is comparatively easy to slit the
stricture up. If not, the surgeon must simply seek for the remains of
the urethra by slow, cautious dissection in the middle line. If
successful, a catheter must be secured in the bladder in the usual way.
A stricture near the orifice, or, as it is not uncommon, involving
merely the meatus, can be treated with great ease in the above manner by
division on a grooved probe. When quite close to the orifice, with a
well-defined hardness, as of a ring round the urethra, it may be divided
subcutaneously by a tenotomy knife or other narrow-bladed instrument. It
is not necessary to keep a catheter in the bladder in cases where the
stricture has been in front of the scrotum.
PUNCTURE OF THE BLADDER.--A patient and dexterous use of the catheter
prevents this operation from being often required; still, circumstances
may arise in which it is found impossible to enter the bladder _per vias
naturales_. In such a case the bladder may be punctured from the outside
by a curved trocar and canula, in either of two situations.
1. _From above the pubis._--This operation is a very simple one, and
when the bladder is distended need not imply a wound of the peritoneum.
_Operation._--A preliminary incision, varying in length according to the
amount of fat, should be made above the pubis exactly in the middle
line; the edges of the recti should be separated, the peritoneum pushed
out of the way and upwards by the finger, and a curved trocar plunged
into the distended bladder obliquely backwards. The canula should be
retained for a day or two, and then a flexible catheter with a shield
inserted instead. Such instruments have been worn for years. The
aspirateur pneumatique of Dr. Dieulafoy will be found an exceedingly
useful instrument for puncture of bladder and removal of urine. The
author has now used it very frequently with the best results. Its
advantage is that the urine is removed through an aperture so small as
to allow of the withdrawal and reintroduction of the canula as often as
is necessary.
[Illustration: FIG. XXXVI.[159]]
2. _From the Rectum._--Except in cases of enlargement of the prostate,
it is at once easier and safer to puncture the bladder from the rectum.
The well-known triangular space uncovered by peritoneum, with its apex
in front close to the prostate, and bounded on either side by the vasa
deferentia and vesiculæ seminales, can be easily reached by a curved
trocar. This should be guided by one, or, still better, by two fingers,
into the rectum, with its concavity upwards, and the point should be
pushed upwards by depression of the handle, whenever it is fairly behind
the prostate. The trocar may then be withdrawn, and the canula retained
for at least forty-eight hours by a suitable bandage. Mr. Cock, of Guy's
Hospital, had a special canula for the purpose, which expands at its
extremity after its introduction, and thus is not apt to slip.[160] Some
surgeons insist that the surgeon should be able to ascertain the
existence of fluctuation between the finger in the rectum, and the other
hand above the pubes. This is exceedingly difficult to elicit when the
bladder is very much distended, and from the constrained position of the
finger in the bowel.
PHYMOSIS.--Elongation of the prepuce, with contraction of its orifice,
in most cases congenital, sometimes so extreme as to cause difficulty in
micturition, and frequently preventing the uncovering of the glans.
_Operation._--In all well-marked cases, the following is required:--The
elongated prepuce should be pulled forwards by a pair of catch-forceps,
and a circle of skin and mucous membrane removed by a single stroke of a
bistoury, or by sharp scissors. Care should be taken lest the glans be
included in the incision, as has happened in _at least_ one instance.
The skin will then be found to retract very freely beyond the glans, but
the mucous membrane is found still to cover the glans, and its orifice
is still constricted. It must then be slit up (Fig. XXXVII. _b b_) on
the dorsum of the glans, with probe-pointed scissors, as far as the
corona, and the glans will then be thoroughly exposed. The edges of
mucous membrane and skin should then be stitched to each other by at
least five or six fine silk sutures, any bleeding points having been
first carefully secured. The angles will in time round off, and a
wonderfully seemly prepuce be obtained. This operation may be done as a
method of cure for obstinate enuresis in cases in which the prepuce is
very long and redundant, even when it is not too tight. The author has
done this in more than twenty cases with excellent results.
[Illustration: FIG. XXXVII.[161]]
_Varieties._--When the prepuce is narrowed at its orifice without
being redundant in length, a milder operation will prove
sufficient. The principle is the same as in the former, but the
amount of incision is less, and nothing is removed. Two methods are
possible:--
1. _By scissors._--The blunt point of a pair of scissors is
introduced through the preputial orifice, the other blade being
outside, and the skin and mucous membrane are divided for about
half an inch; the skin being then retracted, the mucous membrane is
still further divided by one or two additional snips, and then the
edges of skin and mucous membrane are stitched together by one or
two points of suture.
2. _By knife._--A director being introduced within the prepuce, a
narrow-bladed knife is guided along it, and pushed through the
prepuce from within, and then made to divide skin and mucous
membrane from within outwards. Stitches as before.
_N.B._--Be careful lest the director pass into the meatus
urinarius, and the glans be split up.
Again, some surgeons prefer two lateral incisions instead of one
dorsal one. In this case skin and mucous membrane should be divided
by scissors for about a quarter of an inch, and then a single
stitch inserted in the angle of junction. This has been further
modified by Cullerier, who proposed the division of the tight
mucous membrane only, in three or four points. He used a pair of
scissors with one sharp and one probe-pointed blade, the sharp one
thrust in between skin and mucous membrane, the blunt one between
the mucous membrane and the glans.
AMPUTATION OF THE PENIS.--This exceedingly simple operation is performed
by a single stroke of an amputating knife, drawn along from heel to
point, while the penis is stretched in the operator's left hand. As
there is more risk of redundancy than of deficiency of the skin, no
attempt is made to save it. Numerous vessels in the corpora cavernosa
require ligature. Amputation of the penis may be done bloodlessly by the
thermo-cautery even close to its root. Transfix the root of corpora
cavernosa by a needle; above this pass two or three turns of an elastic
ligature; then slowly divide at a low red heat the skin and corpora
cavernosa below the needles; split the urethra after dividing its mucous
membrane with a knife. The author has done this several times with ease
and rapid healing.
[Illustration: FIG. XXXVIII.[162]]
The chief risk is stricture of the orifice of the urethra. To prevent
this, several modifications of the operation have been introduced.
1. _Ricord's method._[163]--After the amputation the surgeon seizes with
forceps the mucous membrane of the urethra, and with a pair of scissors
makes four slits in it, so as to form four equal flaps, and with a silk
ligature stitches each of these to the skin. Contraction of the
cicatrix will thus tend to open rather than close the urethral orifice.
2. _Teale's method._[164]--He slits up, by a bistoury on a director, the
urethra and skin over it for about two-thirds of an inch, and then
stitches the one to the other, thus making it a long oval dependent
orifice (Fig. XXXVIII.).
3. _Miller's proposed method._[165]--"A narrow-bladed knife is first
used to transfix the penis between the spongy and cavernous bodies close
to the root; the knife having been carried forwards for an inch and a
half, its edge is turned perpendicularly downwards, and the urethra and
skin flap are divided, the cavernous bodies and dorsal integument being
then cut perpendicularly upwards where the knife was originally entered
for transfixion. A button-hole is afterwards made in the lower flap,
though which the corpus spongiosum and urethra protrude, while the flap
itself is turned upwards, and attached dorsally and laterally, so as to
cover in the exposed cavernous structure."
HYDROCELE.--The very simple operation necessary for hydrocele is thus
performed:--The surgeon supports the tumour in his left hand so as to
project it forwards, and make the scrotum as tense as possible in front.
Having carefully ascertained the exact position of the testicle, which
can generally be easily enough done by a finger accustomed to
discriminate the difference between a soft solid, and a bag tensely
filled with fluid, aided by the peculiar sensation of the testicle when
squeezed, the surgeon enters a trocar and canula about an eighth of an
inch in diameter into the distended cavity of the tunica vaginalis, near
the fundus of the swelling. When it is evident the instrument is fairly
entered, and not till then, the trocar is withdrawn, and the fluid
allowed completely to drain off. When it ceases to flow the surgeon
places his forefinger over the end of the canula to prevent the entrance
of air, till he fits into its orifice a suitable syringe containing two
drachms of the tincture of iodine, made according to the Edinburgh
Pharmacopoeia: the tincture of the British Pharmacopoeia is not
sufficiently strong. Having injected this cautiously into the cavity,
the canula is withdrawn, and the surgeon, seizing the now flaccid
scrotum in his right hand, gives it a thorough shake, so as to spread
the iodine over as much as possible of the inner wall. When properly
performed this very simple procedure very rarely fails to produce a
radical cure; though less thorough operations, such as mere evacuation
of the fluid, less stimulating injections, unguents introduced on
probes, and the like, often fail of success, and thus give encouragement
to absurdities, such as wire-setons, or to more severe operations, such
as laying open the sac.
HÆMATOCELE.--When the contents of the sac of the tunica vaginalis are
found to be grumous instead of simply serous, or when, as often happens,
only pure blood escapes when the fluid is nearly evacuated, it is found
that simple evacuation and injection are very rarely sufficient to
effect a cure.
After they have been fairly tried, the sac of the hæmatocele should be
laid open in its full extent; any large vessels which bleed should be
tied, and the cavity then stuffed with lint. When the lint can be
removed, which will be after two or three days, the edges of the wound
should be brought closely together, and the cavity will then rapidly
heal up from the bottom, and be obliterated by secondary union of
granulations.
In cases where the walls of the cavity are enormously thickened, or
even, as sometimes happens, almost bony in consistence, an elliptical
portion may be removed with advantage.
EXCISION OF TESTICLE.--This operation is rarely required except for
tumours of the testicle. Hence the size of the incision necessary must
vary much with the size of the tumour; and the amount of skin to be
removed (if any) on the amount of adhesions it has formed to the tumour.
One or two points must be attended to in every case of extirpation of a
testicle:--
1. The incision should commence over the cord just outside of the
external ring, and be continued fairly over the tumour to its base.
2. As to removal of skin, some surgeons advise that none should be taken
away, others that a considerable quantity can be spared. There is
certainly less risk of secondary hæmorrhage if a portion be removed,
than when a flaccid empty bag is left. The author invariably removes a
very large quantity of skin if the tumour is large, as there is much
more rapid healing, and the resulting scrotum is much more comfortable
for the patient.
3. The cord should be exposed at the beginning of the operation, raised
from its bed and given to an assistant, who should compress it gently,
not from any fear of its escape into the abdomen, but to prevent
hæmorrhage. If the tumour has been very large and heavy, the cord will
have been much stretched, and if divided too high up, may really give
trouble by its elasticity, unless the above precaution is taken. The
cord then having been divided close to the tumour, the latter is
removed, care being taken not to include the sound testicle in the
removal. All the vessels are then to be tied or twisted, and the
spermatic artery is to be secured alone, not, as used to be the case,
included in a common ligature with the other constituents of the cord.
Secondary hæmorrhage is very apt to occur from small scrotal branches
which may have escaped notice during the operation.
OPERATIONS ON THE ANUS AND ITS NEIGHBOURHOOD.--FISTULA IN ANO.--While
much might be written on the pathology of fistula, and a good deal even
on its diagnosis, a very few words will suffice to describe the simple
and effectual operation for its relief.
Dismissing at once all so-called palliatives, drugs, unguents, pressure,
and injections, as mere waste of time, and holding that the only method
of cure consists in laying the fistula fairly open, the question narrows
itself into this: What is the best method of laying it open? Prior to
the discovery by Ribes of the great principle that the internal orifice
of the sinus is always within an inch or an inch and a half of the
orifice of the anus, the operations for fistula were most unnecessarily
severe; the gut used to be divided as far up as the sinuses extended;
and large portions of the anus used to be excised bodily along with the
sinuses. It is now a much simpler and more satisfactory operation.
_Operation._--A common silver probe bent to the required shape is passed
into the external opening, or, if there are more than one, into the
largest and oldest one. The forefinger of the left hand being introduced
into the rectum, the probe is passed through the internal orifice, and
its point brought out by the anus. The portion of tissue raised by the
probe can then be easily divided with the certainty that the fistula is
laid fully open. Anal fistulæ have been divided by the elastic ligature,
but it seems slower in action and more painful, with no counterbalancing
advantages.
The author has for last few years operated almost exclusively by a
long knife which is continued into a steel probe. The probe is
passed up the fistula, then into the bowel, and is hooked out at
the anus, and in being simply pushed on the knife cuts the
fistula--tuto, cito, et jucunde, the patient rarely knowing that
more has been done than an exploration.
In cases where, from the hardness and density of the parts it is
impossible to pass the probe and bring it out at the anus, a strong
probe-pointed bistoury may be passed in by the external orifice
till its probe-point can be felt by the finger in the bowel at the
internal opening. Supported by the finger it can then be made to
cut outwards till the whole septum is divided.
FISSURE OF THE ANUS, ULCER OF THE ANUS, resemble each other alike in the
exceeding annoyance which they give to the sufferer, and in the
simplicity of the treatment needed.
_Operation._--Once the presence of either is determined by the finger in
the anus, a sharp-pointed curved bistoury should be introduced,
transfixing the base of the fissure or ulcer, and then guided on the
finger, completely dividing it, so as to change the ragged ulceration
into a simple wound which will rapidly heal.
PROLAPSUS ANI, _Operation for_.--Complete prolapsus in which the whole
gut is involved, as seen in the very young and the very aged, is suited
for palliative rather than radical treatment.
Cases of prolapsus of the mucous membrane only, as is not uncommon in
connection with or as a result of hæmorrhoids in adults, give
opportunity for operative interference.
We may act on either the skin or mucous membrane, or both at once.
1. _The skin_ is often found loose, and arranged in radiating folds
round the anus. In such cases, as recommended first by Dupuytren, some
of these projecting folds may be removed. Again it may be prolapsed in a
great loose ring or circular fold round the margin, forming an
exaggerated external pile; in such a case the loose fold may be fairly
excised with curved scissors, as recommended by Hey of Leeds.
The first of these methods is apt to be insufficient, the second again
has the risk of removing too much.
2. If the protrusion is chiefly mucous membrane exposed in folds, or a
ring, which is generally outside, one of two methods of treatment may be
tried:--
_a._ By ligature, as recommended by Mr. Copeland. Raising a longitudinal
fold of the mucous membrane, he passed a ligature round it as if it were
a pile. There is less chance of the ligature slipping if a double thread
be used and its base thus transfixed. Three, four, or even more folds
may be thus treated.
_b._ When the mucous membrane has been so long exposed as to have lost
many of its characters, and to resemble leather in its toughness,
excision will be found less painful and much more rapid than ligature.
A longitudinal fold at each side of the anus should be pinched up and
excised by a pair of probe-pointed curved scissors. There is always a
certain amount of risk of hæmorrhage following such an operation. The
risk is lessened and the result improved by stitching up the wound in
the mucous membrane before the protruded portion of bowel is returned.
POLYPI OF THE RECTUM.--Pedunculated growths varying in consistence,
shape, and size, but resembling each other in having a distinct stalk,
and in frequently being protruded at stool.
_Operation._--Invariably by ligature, which may be single round the
stalk, if the tumour be globular and with a distinct narrow stalk, or by
transfixion, if (as sometimes happens) the tumour be of uniform
thickness throughout, like a worm.
HÆMORRHOIDS OR PILES.--In the treatment of piles it is the differential
diagnosis that is troublesome and occasionally difficult; the operative
interference required is generally very simple, if the nature of the
case be rightly determined.
_External piles._--_Operation._--The apex of the soft flabby excrescence
should be seized by a pair of catch-forceps, and it should be cut off
close to its base with a knife, or, what is better, a pair of curved
scissors. Any little vessel which jets may then be secured. If, instead
of numerous individual tumours, a ring of skin round the anus be
involved, the whole of it should be shaved off, but not very close to
its base, lest too great contraction of the anal orifice should ensue.
If the surgeon, after excising a pile or piles, will take the
trouble to stitch up the wound with catgut, he will find the cure
much more rapid and less painful than when this is omitted.
_Internal piles._--Incision is extremely dangerous, from the vascularity
of the parts, and their being so inaccessible from their position within
the sphincter ani. Hence ligature is safer and equally effectual. The
patient should be directed to sit over hot water, and strain till the
whole of his piles are fairly protruded. The surgeon should then
transfix the base of each separately with a curved needle bearing a
strong double thread. The needle being cut off, the threads should be
very firmly tied, each isolating its own half of the pile. The tying
should be exceedingly tight, so as to cause instant and complete
strangulation and death of the tumours. All the piles should be tied at
the same sitting. If the piles are very small they may be secured
without transfixion in a single noose after being seized by a hook or
forceps. There is greater risk of the noose slipping than when the base
has been transfixed.
The strangulated masses must then be returned into the bowel, and the
patient kept in bed or on a sofa till the ligatures separate, which is
generally not till the fourth or fifth day. A certain amount of urinary
irritation, showing itself sometimes in strangury, sometimes in complete
retention, occasionally follows this operation.
Mr. Smith of King's College, and many other surgeons, treat internal
piles by means of an ivory clamp to hold them tight, while they are
burned off by the actual cautery or the thermo-cautery at a low red
heat. They claim that pyæmia more rarely follows this mode.
There are certain cases in which the lower inch or two of the
rectum are found red and congested, and in which every stool is
followed by the loss of a certain quantity of florid arterial
blood, and yet no distinct hæmorrhoidal tumour is to be seen. In
such cases the ligature is not applicable, and relief is obtained
by the application of pure nitric acid, or other potential caustics
to the bleeding surface, as recommended by Houston, Lee, Smith,
Ashton, and others. These cases are comparatively rare, and
whenever they can be applied, the ligature is much simpler, safer,
and more certain.
_Venous piles._--When a sudden effusion of blood has occurred into one
of the varicose veins or sinuses of a congested anus, an oval or rounded
tumour is felt, very tense, shining, and painful. To slit it freely up
with an abscess lancet, and evert the clot inside, at once relieves all
the symptoms.
FOOTNOTES:
[150] Diagram of section of prostate seen from the inside:--PF, pelvic
fascia or prostatic sheath; RR, ring which must be cut; L, position of
incision in the lateral operation; DD, position of incisions in the
bilateral operation.
[151] Diagram of muscles of membranous portion of urethra seen from the
inside:--SS, section of os pubis; U, urethra; G, Guthrie's muscle,
compressor urethræ; W, Wilson's muscle, levator urethræ.
[152] _Boston Medical and Surgical Journal_, May 29, 1879.
[153] Gross, _Surgery_, 6th ed. vol. ii. p. 736.
[154] Holmes's _Surgery_, vol. iv. p. 392.
[155] See Miller's _Practice of Surgery_, p. 212.
[156] Solly's _Surgical Experiences_, pp. 537, 538, etc.
[157] _The Immediate Treatment of Stricture._ By Bernard Holt, F.R.C.S.
London. Third Edition, 1868.
[158] Holmes's _System of Surgery_, 1st ed. vol. iv. p. 403.
[159] Diagram of puncture of the bladder:--B, bladder; SP, symphysis
pubis; SC, scrotum; _b_, bulb; _pr_, peritoneum; P, prostate; R, rectum;
S, sacrum and coccyx.
[160] _Med. Chir. Trans._, vol. XXXV.
[161] Diagram of operation for phymosis:--_a_, glans penis; _b b_,
mucous membrane exposed by retraction of the skin, and slit up; _c d_,
sutures introduced and ready to be tied, uniting the skin and mucous
membrane.
[162] To illustrate Teale's operation:--_c_, section of penis _b_,
thread inserted uniting mucous membrane and skin; _a_, thread tied.
[163] _Med. Times and Gazette_, vol. xix. p. 354.
[164] Miller's _System of Surgery_, p. 1255.
[165] Miller's _System of Surgery_, p. 1256.
CHAPTER XIII.
TENOTOMY.
For convenience' sake I group under this one head certain operations
used for the relief of distortion, in which muscles or tendons are
divided subcutaneously. Since the discovery of the principle by Delpech,
and the application of it by Stromeyer, Dieffenbach, Little, and
countless successors, it has been used for very many cases for which it
is totally inapplicable, _e.g._ for the division of the muscles of the
back in spinal curvature. Still there remain several deformities for the
relief of which subcutaneous tenotomy is a most important remedy; chief
among these are Wry Neck and Club-foot.
OPERATION FOR WRY NECK.--_Subcutaneous section of the
sterno-mastoid._--In what cases of wry neck is this operation suitable?
In those only in which the muscles are the starting-point of the
mischief. These are sometimes congenital, more frequently they commence
in childhood. In cases where the distortion depends on disease of the
cervical vertebræ, or is secondary to curvature of the spine, division
of the muscle is worse than useless.
_Operation._--A tenotomy knife, which should be sharp-pointed, narrow in
the blade, with a blunt back, should be introduced through the skin a
little to one side of the sternal portion of the affected muscle, passed
along with its flat edge between the skin and the tendon, till it has
fairly crossed the tendon; the blade should then be turned so that by a
gradual sawing motion the edge may be made to divide the tendon about an
inch above the sternum. A distinct snap will then be felt or heard, and
the position of the head will be at once much improved. Exercise, warm
bathing, and rubbing, will generally suffice to complete the cure,
without it being necessary to call in the aid of the instrument-maker
with his expensive apparatus.[166]
OPERATIONS FOR CLUB-FOOT.--The following are the tendons which _may_
require division in the cure of club-foot, and the operations for their
division.
1. _The tendo Achillis._--There are very few cases of true club-foot
which can be successfully treated without division of the tendo
Achillis. While in talipes equinis it is generally the only disturbing
agent, in talipes varus and valgus it invariably increases and maintains
the deformity, which the tibiales or peronei seem to originate.
_Operation._--The foot being held at about a right angle with the leg,
the operator should pinch up the skin over the tendon, introduce the
knife flatwise, a little to one side of the tendon, till its point is
nearly projecting at the other, then turn the edge on the tendon and cut
inwards with a sawing motion till the tendon gives way with a distinct
snap, and the foot can be completely flexed with ease.
Dr. Little[167] recommends that the tendon should be divided from
before backwards. There is more risk by this method of wounding the
skin, and thus losing the subcutaneous character of the operation.
Professor Pancoast[168] divides the inferior portion of the soleus
muscle instead of the tendo Achillis.
2. _Tibialis posticus._--Next in frequency and importance to that of the
tendo Achillis, division of this tendon is much more difficult to
perform. It may be performed either above or below the ankle.
(_a._) _Above the ankle._--The blade of a tenotomy knife should be
entered perpendicularly at the posterior margin of the tibia, half an
inch or an inch above the internal malleolus, so as to pass between the
bone and the tendon of the tibialis posticus, the blade directed towards
the latter; the assistant should now evert the foot, the operator
pressing the blade against the tendon.[169]
(_b._) _Below the ankle, close to the attachment to the scaphoid._ This
is the better position of the two when the position of the tendon can be
made out, which is not always the case, especially in cases of old
standing.
Raising the skin just over the astragalo-scaphoid joint, the knife
should be entered with its blade downwards, and across the tendon, and
should be made to cut on the bone, while an assistant everts the foot
till the tendon gives way with a distinct snap.
3. _Tibialis anticus_ may in like manner be divided either just above
the ankle, or at its insertion. When it requires division it can
generally be made so prominent as to render its division comparatively
easy.
4. _Peronei._--These do not often require division, cases of talipes
valgus being usually paralytic in character. If necessary they can be
cut as they cross the fibula.
5. _The plantar fascia_, may require division; when this is the case, it
is so prominent as to render the operation very easy, if conducted on
the principles mentioned above.
FOOTNOTES:
[166] Syme's _Pathology and Practice of Surgery_, p. 220.
[167] Holmes's _Surgery_, vol. iii. p. 573.
[168] Cross's _Surgery_, vol. ii. p. 273, 3d ed.
[169] Miller's _System of Surgery_, p. 1339; Holmes's _Surgery_, vol.
iii. p. 571.
CHAPTER XIV.
OPERATIONS ON NERVES.
NERVE-STRETCHING.--Surgical literature in last ten years is full of
cases in which nerves have been stretched for all manner of diseases
with varying success: an example of the operative procedure may
suffice:--
1. Stretching of the great sciatic either for sciatica, sclerosis, or
locomotor ataxia.
_Operation._--A line drawn from the centre of the space between the
tuberosity of the ischium or the great trochanter to a corresponding
point between the condyles of the femur will give the direction. A free
incision in this line three or four inches in length--the nerve lies
just below the the femoral aponeurosis, beneath the edge of gluteal
fold, requiring no muscular fibres to be divided. It must be raised from
its bed and boldly stretched or elongated into a loop. Symington's
experiments have shown that in the average adult 130 lb. are required to
break the nerve.
2. The facial has been stretched for spasm. The trunk is easily reached
by an incision extending from near the external auditory meatus to the
angle of the jaw, which enables the parotid to be pushed forward and the
edge of the sterno-mastoid pulled backwards.
NEUROTOMY AND NEURECTOMY.--Chiefly performed for neuralgia of the fifth
nerve.
_a._ This is a very easy operation if directed at the terminal branches
only of the nerve, where they make their exit from the frontal,
supraorbital, and mental foramina. The author has done it in very
numerous cases, and with great relief, if care be taken to destroy the
nerve in the foramen to some extent--a sharp-pointed thermo-cautery does
this easily and safely.
_b._ The more severe and radical operation of cutting out a portion of
the trunk of the fifth nerve just after it has left the skull, and
destroying Meckel's ganglion, has been done pretty frequently, chiefly
by American surgeons--in various ways.
1. _Carnochan's Operation._--Exposing the whole front wall of antrum,
its cavity is opened into from the front by a large trephine. The lower
wall of the infra-orbital canal is cut away by a chisel, the posterior
wall of the antrum by a smaller trephine, the nerve thus isolated is
traced up to and past Meckel's ganglion, which is removed close to the
foramen rotundum by cutting the nerve by curved blunt-pointed scissors.
2. _Pancoast's Operation._--Expose the coronoid process by a free
incision, divide it at its root and throw it up, then expose and tie
internal maxillary artery, after which the upper portion of the external
pterygoid is to be detached from the sphenoid, thus exposing the nerve
leaving foramen ovale; the second portion is deeper and not so easily
got at.
3. The spinal accessory occasionally may be divided before it enters the
sterno-mastoid in cases of spasmodic wry neck, with great advantage.
This operation is an easy one; the sterno-mastoid edge being once fairly
exposed, the nerve is easily seen, and a piece should be cut out at
least half an inch in length.
NERVE SUTURE is occasionally practised with great advantage in cases
where nerves have been divided either by accident or in operation.
Catgut seems to be the best medium, and cases are on record in which,
even after months of separation and subsequent paralysis, improvement
has followed an operation for refreshing and joining the divided ends.
ADDENDUM TO CHAPTER IX.
DR. SOLIS COHEN has recently (in a paper read before the Philadelphia
College of Physicians, April 4, 1883) collected the notes of sixty-five
cases of excision of the entire larynx. Fifty-six of these were done for
cancer, and the remainder for sarcomata, papillomata, etc. Of the
fifty-six done for cancer, forty are reported as having died, either
shortly after the operation from shock or pneumonia, or a few months
later from recurrence of the disease. In two instances the disease had
recurred, but death had not been reported when the paper was read.
Fourteen remain in which neither death nor recurrence had been reported.
Dr. Cohen's conclusion is that laryngectomy does not tend to the
prolongation of life, and thinks that the greatest good to the greater
number appears better secured by dependence on the palliative operation
of tracheotomy.
INDEX.
Abdomen, operations on, 222.
Abernethy on ligature of external iliac, 8.
Adams on anatomy of common iliac, 4.
on hip deformity, 133.
Ægineta, Paulus, on excision of joints, 108.
Allarton on median lithotomy, 269.
Amputation and excision contrasted, 113.
Amputation at ankle-joint (Syme's), 78.
of anterior portion of foot (Hey's), 73.
of arm, 62.
at elbow-joint, 61.
through femur, condyles of, 92.
of fingers, 51-54.
of fore-arm, 58.
at hip-joint, 102.
at knee-joint, 92.
of penis, 286.
at shoulder-joint, 63.
at tarsus (Chopart's), 75.
at thigh, 94.
double primary of thigh, 106.
of toes, 69.
at wrist-joint, 56.
Amussat's operation, 252.
Anchylosis of elbow, excision for, 122.
Ankle-joint, excision of, 137.
Annandale on staphyloraphy, 203.
Anus, artificial, operation for, 252.
artificial, removal of, 254.
Arendt, ligature of external iliac, 12.
Astragalus, excision of, 145.
Auchincloss on ligature of subclavian, 36.
Avery, hard palate, fissures of, 203.
Barwell on excision of ankle-joint, 139.
on excision of tongue, 199.
Baudens on amputation at elbow-joint, 61.
on amputation of anterior portion of foot, 75.
on amputation at knee-joint, 92.
Bauer on recto-vesical lithotomy, 272.
Begbie, Dr. Warburton, on paracentesis thoracis, 220.
Bell, Benjamin, on amputation, 49.
on amputation of ankle, 86.
on amputation of thigh, 96.
Bell, Sir Charles, on ligature of femoral, 22.
Bell, George, on supra-pubic lithotomy, 271.
Bell, John, on ligature of gluteal, 14.
Bey, Gaetani, on amputation above the shoulder-joint, 70.
Bigelow, Dr., on litholapaxy, 276.
Billroth, Dr., on fissure of palate, 200.
Bladder, puncture of, 284.
Bonnet on radical cure of hernia, 245.
Botal on amputation, 47.
Bowditch on paracentesis thoracis, 221.
Bowman's operation, lachrymal canal, 153.
Brachial, ligature of, 242.
Brodie, Sir B. C., on lithotomy, 262.
on lithotrity, 274.
Bromfield, amputation of leg, 86.
Brown, Baker, ovariotomy, 231.
Bryant, on excision of joints, 112.
Buchanan, Dr. A., on lithotomy, 269.
Buchanan, Dr. G., on excision of tongue, 198.
Buchanan, Dr. M., on excision of ankle, 140.
Buck's operation for anchylosis, 136.
Butcher, ligature of subclavian, 35.
excision of joints, 110.
excision of wrist-joint, 128.
excision of knee-joint, 135.
excision of metacarpals. 142.
Campbell, Professor, on ligature of gluteal, 15.
Carden's amputation at condyles of femur, 50, 94.
Carmichael on ligature of gluteal, 14.
Carnochan on neurectomy, 300.
Carotid, ligature of common, 28.
ligature of external, 32.
Cataract operations, 160.
Celsus on amputation, 48.
on excision of joints, 108.
Chamberlaine, on ligature of axillary, 40.
Chassaignac on tracheotomy, 206.
Cheiloplastics, Syme on, 178.
Cheselden on amputation, 49.
on lithotomy, 260.
Chopart's amputation, 75.
Civiale on lithotrity, 275.
Club-foot, operations for, 297.
Cock on oesophagotomy, 216.
paracentesis thoracis, 220.
on puncture of bladder, 285.
Colles on ligature of brachial, 44.
Cooper, Sir Astley, on ligature of aorta and iliacs, 3, 10.
on perineal section. 276.
Cornea, puncture of, 159.
staphylomatous, excision of a, 168.
Corelysis, 170.
Crampton, Sir Philip, on excision, 119.
Crichton on lithotomy, 262.
Critchett's operation of iridesis, 169.
operation for staphyloma, 172.
Croft, Mr., on hip disease, 132.
Culbertson on excision of hip, 132.
Cullerier on phymosis, 287.
Curling on operation for artificial anus, 253.
Cusack on treatment of brachial aneurism, 43.
Davies, Redfern, on radical cure of hernia, 244.
Davy's (Mr. Richard), lever, 105.
Desault on ligature of axillary, 40.
Dieffenbach on excision of upper jaw, 191.
Dieulafoy's aspirateur, 284.
Dionis' amputation of leg, 87.
Dubrueil, amputation at wrist, 57.
Duncan, Mr. J., on artificial anus, 254.
Dupuytren on ligature of iliac, 11.
on ligature of subclavian, 36.
amputation at elbow-joint, 62.
removal of artificial anus, 254.
on bilateral lithotomy, 268.
Durand, case of hæmorrhage from iliac, 12.
Durham on thyrotomy, 215.
Dzondi on radical cure of hernia, 246.
Elbow-Joint, amputation at, 62.
Ellis on anatomy of iliac arteries, 6.
Ectropium, 152.
Entropium, 151.
Erichsen on excision of hip, 130.
Esmarch on excision of joints, 110.
Excision and amputation contrasted, 112.
Excision of ankle-joint, 138.
of astragalus, 145.
of elbow-joint, 118.
of hip-joint, 128.
of jaw, upper, 188.
of jaw, lower, 191.
of knee-joint, 133.
of mamma, 216.
of scapula, 139.
of shoulder-joint, 115.
of testicle, 290.
of tongue, 197.
of tonsils, 203.
of wrist-joint, 125.
Eye, operations on, 151.
Eyeball, extirpation of the, 173.
Eyelid, tumours on the, 152.
Fayrer, Sir J., on tracheotomy, 212.
on radical cure of hernia, 248.
Femoral, ligature of, 18.
superficial, ligature of, in Scarpa's space, 19.
in Hunter's canal, 21.
Femur, amputation through condyles of, 92.
Fergusson, Sir W., on ligature of subclavian, 38.
on amputation at shoulder-joint, 70.
on excision of joints, 110.
on excision of upper jaw, 191.
on excision of lower jaw, 195.
on fissures of palate, 201.
on lithotomy, 262.
Filkin on excision of joints, 110.
Fingers, amputation of, 51.
Fissures in the palate, soft, 200.
in the palate, hard, 202.
of anus, 292.
Fistula, salivary, operations for, 192.
in ano, operation for, 291.
Fore-arm, amputation through the, 58.
ligature of vessels in, 44.
Forster, Mr. Cooper, on gastrotomy, 224.
Furner, ligature of both subclavians, 38.
Gastrectomy, 224.
Gastrostomy, 223.
Gastrotomy, 223.
Gersdorf, Hans de, on amputation, 48.
Gerdy on radical cure of hernia, 246.
Gilbert, amputation above the shoulder-joint, 68.
Gillespie on excision of wrist-joint, 128.
Gluteal, ligature of, 12.
Gosselin on colotomy, 253.
Graefe on strabismus, 158.
on cataract operations, 166.
or iridectomy, 171.
Green on ligature of subclavian, 38.
Greenhow on excision of os calcis, 144.
Greenslade on Bowman's operation, 156.
Gritti's amputation, 93
Gross on amputation at elbow-joint, 61.
on amputation, 81-87.
on excision of hip, 132.
on lithotomy, 262.
on rhinoplastic operation, 178.
on excision of lower jaw, 192.
Guérin, Jules, on amputation of toes, 76.
on operation for strabismus, 158.
Guersant on excision of tonsils, 205.
Guillemeau on amputation at knee-joint, 91.
Gurlt's statistics, 118, 124.
Hæmorrhoids, operations for, 294.
Hæmatocele, operation for, 289.
Hamilton on rhinoplastic operations, 177.
Hancock on excision of hip, 130.
on excision of ankle, 138.
on excision of os calcis, 144.
Harelip, operations for, 183.
Harrison on anatomy of iliac, 6.
on brachial aneurism, 44.
Hart, Mr. Ernest, on flexion of limbs, 24.
Heath's case of aneurism of innominate, 28.
Heine on excision of hip, 130.
Hernia, strangulated inguinal, 232.
strangulated femoral, 237.
strangulated umbilical, 242.
strangulated obturator, 243.
radical cure of, 244.
Heurtloup on lithotrity, 274.
Hey on amputation, 48, 73.
Heyfelder on excisions, 110, 130.
Hildanus, Fabricius, on amputation, 47, 91.
Hip-joint, amputation at the, 102.
excision of, 128.
Hippocrates on excision of joints, 108.
Hodgson, statistics of aneurism, 12.
ligature of axillary, 40.
Hodge on excisions 112, 132.
Hoin on amputation at knee-joint, 92.
Holmes on excision of hip, 130, 132, 144.
Holt's operation for stricture, 279.
Howse, Mr., on gastrotomy, 224.
Hughes, Dr. on paracentesis thoracis, 220.
Huguier on colotomy, 253.
Hunter on ligature of femoral, 21.
Hutchinson's statistics, 20.
Hydrocele, operation for, 288.
Iliac, ligature of common, 3.
ligature of external, 7.
Iliac, ligature of internal, 6.
Innominate, ligature of the, 26.
Iridectomy, 171.
Iridesis, 169.
Jacobson on cataract operations, 166.
Jäger on excision of hip, 130.
James, Mr., on ligature of aorta, 3.
Jameson on radical cure of hernia, 246.
Jaw, excision of upper, 188.
excision of lower, 191.
Johnston, Dr., on amputation at ankle-joint, 84.
Joints, excision of, 108.
Jones on excision of joints, 110, 134, 136.
Jordan, Mr. F., on amputation, 106;
on excision of tongue, 199.
Keith, Dr. Thomas, on ovariotomy, 224-227.
Kirby, Mr., on ligature of iliac, 12.
Knife, Beer's description of, 164.
Knee, amputation below and above, 90, 91.
amputation at, 91.
joint, excision of, 132.
Lachrymal organs, operations on the, 153.
Lane, Mr., on amputation at knee-joint, 91.
Langenbeck on excision of joints, 110, 140.
on fissure in hard palate, 203.
on radical cure of hernia, 245.
Larrey on amputation at shoulder, 64.
on excision of joints, 109.
Larynx, operations on the, 206.
Laryngectomy, 216.
Dr. Solis Cohen on, 302.
Laryngotomy, 214.
Laryngo-tracheotomy, 215.
Layraud, Dr., case of hæmorrhage from iliac, 12.
Lee, Mr. Henry, amputation of leg, 88.
Ligature of the aorta, 2.
of the axillary, 38, 39, 40.
of the brachial, 42.
of the carotid, common, 29, 30.
of the carotid, external, 32.
of the femoral, 18, 21.
of the gluteal, 12.
of the iliac, 3.
of the iliac, external, 7.
of the iliac, internal, 6.
of the innominate, 26.
of the lingual, 32.
of the popliteal, 22.
of the subclavian, 33-37.
of the vessels in fore-arm, 45.
Lips, operations on the, 180.
Lisfranc on amputation, 52, 74.
Lister, Professor, on Syme's amputation, 87.
on excision of wrist, 125.
Liston, Mr., on ligature of subclavian, 36, 37.
on rhinoplastic operations, 177.
on excision of upper jaw, 186.
tracheotomy, 213.
on femoral hernia, 240.
on lithotomy, 262.
Litholapaxy, Dr. Bigelow on, 276.
Lithotomy, 255.
Lithotrity, 278.
Little on club-foot, 297.
Lloyd on harelip, 187.
Lorinzer on obturator hernia, 244.
Louis on amputation, 48.
Lower extremity, amputations of, 68.
Lupus, operative treatment of, 179.
Macilwain on tracheotomy, 208.
Mackenzie, Dr. Morell, on thyrotomy, 215.
Mackenzie, Dr. R., on modification of Syme's amputation, 83.
on excision of joints, 110, 134.
Malgaigne on Chopart's amputation, 77.
on harelip, 187.
Mamma, excision of, 218.
Manec on ligature of axillary, 40.
Maunder on excision of the elbow-joint, 122.
Maclennan, Dr. G., on amputation above the shoulder-joint, 69.
Metacarpals, amputation of, 54.
excision of, 141.
Metatarsals, amputation of, 72.
Miller on amputation of penis, 288.
Monteiro, Dr., on ligature of aorta, 3.
Mooren on cataract operations, 166.
Moreaus, the, on excision of joints, 109, 114, 120, 132, 134.
Morel, tourniquet invented by, 47.
Morton, Dr., on radical cure of hernia, 245.
Murray, Dr., on ligature of aorta, 3.
Mussey, case of amputation, 70.
Mynors on amputation, 48.
Nasal polypi, removal of, 179.
Needle operation for cataract, 160.
Nelaton on harelip, 184.
Nerve-stretching, 299.
Nerve suture, 300.
Neurectomy, 299.
Neurotomy, 299.
Norris's statistics, 12, 20, 31.
Nunneley on excision of tongue, 198.
Oesophagotomy, 216.
Ollier on excision of joints, 110.
Os calcis, excision of, 143.
Ovariotomy, 224.
Paget on excision of tongue, 198.
Palate, fissures in soft, 200.
fissures in hard, 202.
Pancoast, Professor, on rhinoplastic operations, 178.
on radical cure of hernia, 245.
on neurectomy, 300.
on club-foot, 297.
Paracentesis thoracis, 219.
abdominis, 222.
Paré, Ambrose, on amputation, 47.
on amputation at elbow-joint, 60.
Park on excision of joints, 110.
Peixotto, Dr., on ligature of innominate, 27.
Penis, amputation of, 287.
Perineal section, operation of, 273.
Percy on excision of joints, 109.
Phymosis, operation for, 285.
Pirogoff's modification of Syme's amputation, 80, 84.
Pollock on excision of lower jaw, 193.
Polypi, nasal, removal of, 179.
anal, removal of, 293.
Popliteal, ligature of, 22.
Porta's statistics, 20.
Porter, Professor, on ligature of innominate, 27.
on ligature of common carotid, 28.
statistics of amputation, 122.
Post on ligature of iliac, 10.
Pritchard, Mr., radical cure of hernia, 248.
Prolapsus ani, 292.
Pterygium, operation for, 156.
Puncture of bladder, 284.
Pupil, operations for artificial, 168.
Purmannus on amputation, 48.
Quain on anatomy of iliac, 4.
on anatomy of brachial, 43.
Regnoli on excision of tongue, 199.
Rhinoplastic operations, 175.
Richter on radical cure of hernia, 245.
Ricord on amputation of penis, 287.
Rigaud on amputation above the shoulder-joint, 67.
Ritchie, Dr. Charles, on ovariotomy, 224.
Rodgers, Dr., on ligature of subclavian, 36.
Rothmund on radical cure of hernia, 247.
Roux on ligature of subclavian, 38.
on ligature of axillary, 40,
on Chopart's amputation, 77, 78.
Sabatier on excision of joints, 109.
Salivary fistula, operation for, 196.
Sanson on recto-vesical lithotomy, 271.
Scalp, tumours of the, removal of 149.
Scapula, excision of (Syme), 140.
Schuh on radical cure of hernia, 245.
Schmucker on radical cure of hernia, 246.
Scultetus on amputation, 46.
Sedillot's operation for ligature of carotid, 30.
on excision of hip, 132.
Shoulder-joint, amputation at the, 66.
excision of, 115.
Signoroni on radical cure of hernia, 247.
Sims, Dr. M., on lithotomy, 272.
Smith, Dr. Nathan, on amputation at knee-joint, 91.
Smith, Thomas, on staphyloraphy, 200.
Smith, Dr. Tyler, on ovariotomy, 231.
Smyth on subclavian aneurism, 27.
Skey on ligature of subclavian, 38.
on amputation, 74, 91.
on excision of wrist, 127.
on rhinoplastic operation, 178.
on lithotomy, 262.
Solis Cohen, Dr., on laryngectomy, 302.
Solomon on strabismus, 158.
South on ligature of aorta, 3.
Spence, Professor, on amputation, 50, 66, 89, 100.
on excision of shoulder, elbow, and wrist joints, 118, 124, 128, 136.
Sperino on puncture of cornea, 159.
Stanley on excision of shoulder, 117.
Steven, Professor, on ligature of internal iliac, 15.
Strabismus, convergent, 156.
divergent, 157.
Streatfeild on entropium, 151.
on corelysis, 170.
Stricture, operation for, 276.
Stokes's amputation, 94.
Stromeyer on excision of joints, 110.
Subclavian, ligature of right, 34.
ligature of left, 35.
Surgeon-General, United States, statistical report by, 82.
Syme, Mr., on amputation at ankle-joint, 78.
on amputation through condyles of femur, 92.
on amputation at hip-joint, 106.
on amputation above the shoulder-joint, 73.
on modified circular amputation, 101.
on axillary aneurism, operation for, 41.
on cheiloplastic operation, 181.
Chopart's amputation introduced by, 77.
on excision of lower jaw, 191.
on excision of joints, 111-120.
on excision of scapula, 140.
on excision of tongue, 197.
on ligature of femoral, 20.
on ligature of gluteal, 14, 15.
on radical cure of hernia, 247.
on Hey's operation, 73.
on oesophagotomy, 216.
on removal of polypi, 180.
on rhinoplastic operation, 175.
on stricture, 278-282.
Tait on ligature of iliac, 10, 12.
Taliacotian operation, 178.
Tarso-metatarsal joint, amputation at, 72.
Tarsus, amputation through the, 75.
Teale on amputation, 50.
on amputation of fore-arm, 59.
on amputation of arm, 63.
on amputation of leg, 89.
on amputation of thigh, 98.
on amputation of penis, 288.
Teale, T. P., on cataract, 163.
Tenotomy, 296.
Testicle, excision of, 290.
Textor on amputation at elbow-joint, 60.
Thigh, amputations of, 96.
Thompson on lithotrity, 275.
on stricture, 277.
Thorax, operations on the, 218.
Thyrotomy, 215.
Toes, amputations of, 68.
Tongue, excision of, 197.
Tonsils, excision of, 203.
Tracheotomy, 206-214.
Trephining and trepanning, 147.
Trichiasis, 151.
Tripier's amputation, 78.
Trocar of Sir S. Wells described, 227.
Tumours of scalp, removal of, 149.
of eyelids, removal of, 152.
Tyrrell on treatment of brachial aneurism, 43.
Upper extremity, amputation of, 50.
Urethra, stricture of, 276.
Velpeau on ligature of iliac, 12.
on ligature of subclavian, 38.
on amputation at elbow-joint, 60.
on amputation at knee-joint, 91.
on radical cure of hernia, 245.
Vermale on amputation of thigh, 102.
Verneuil on Chopart's amputation, 78.
Vessels of fore-arm, ligature of, 44.
Wakley on stricture, 279.
Warren on fissure of hard palate, 203.
Watson, Dr. P. H., on excision, 135.
on excision of elbow-joint, 123.
on laryngectomy, 216.
Wells, Sir Spencer, on ovariotomy, 224-229.
trocar, 227.
hernia, radical cure of, 247.
White on amputation of leg, 86.
on excision of joints, 110.
Whitehead, Mr. W., on excision of tongue, 199.
Willet on oesophagotomy, 216.
Wood's statistics, 30.
on joints, 134.
on radical cure of hernia, 248-251.
Wry neck, operation for, 296.
Wrist-joint, amputation at, 55.
excision of, 124.
Wützer on radical cure of hernia, 247.
Wyeth, Dr., statistics, 36, 38.
Young, James, tourniquet introduced by, 47.
Zehender's statistics, 30.
*** End of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "A Manual of the Operations of Surgery - For the Use of Senior Students, House Surgeons, and Junior Practitioners" ***
Copyright 2023 LibraryBlog. All rights reserved.